MODEL
AR-M237
AR-M277
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM
OPERATION MANUAL
(for copier)
Page
• BEFORE USING
THE MACHINE
8
• COPY FUNCTIONS
21
• CONVENIENT COPY
FUNCTIONS
35
51
• USER SETTINGS
• TROUBLESHOOTING
AND MAINTENANCE
57
• PERIPHERAL DEVICES
AND SUPPLIES
76
80
• APPENDIX
➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣
FOR YOUR RECORDS ...
To protect against loss or theft, record and retain for reference the
copier’s serial number located on the back of the unit.
Model Number
Serial Number
Date of Purchase
Place of Purchase
Authorized Sharp Copier
Service Department Number
➣ ➢
Do not make copies of anything which is prohibited from copying by law. The
following items are normally prohibited from copying by national law. Other
items may be prohibited by local law.
G Money
G Stamps
G Bonds
G Stocks
G Bank drafts
G Checks
G Passports G Driver's licenses
CONTENTS
CAUTIONS................................................................................................................................................. 3
G CAUTIONS ON USING THE MACHINE........................................................................................................... 3
G IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN SELECTING AN INSTALLATION SITE ........................................................... 3
G CAUTIONS ON HANDLING THE MACHINE.................................................................................................... 4
G ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION................................................................................................................. 5
USING THE MANUAL ............................................................................................................................... 5
G ABOUT THE OPERATION MANUALS............................................................................................................. 5
G THE MEANING OF "R" IN ORIGINAL AND PAPER SIZE INDICATIONS....................................................... 6
G CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL....................................................................................................... 6
MAIN FEATURES...................................................................................................................................... 7
1
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
3
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS..................... 8
G OPERATION PANEL......................................10
G TOUCH PANEL ..............................................11
COPY FINISHING FUNCTIONS...................... 35
G SORT COPY.................................................. 35
G GROUP COPY............................................... 35
G OFFSET FUNCTION ..................................... 35
G STAPLE SORT (when the finisher
POWER ON AND OFF..................................... 13
G POWER ON....................................................13
G POWER OFF ..................................................13
G INITIAL SETTINGS.........................................14
G POWER SAVE MODES..................................14
(AR-FN5N) is installed) .................................. 37
G ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL AND
STAPLING POSITIONS................................. 37
SPECIAL MODES............................................ 39
G GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING THE
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS.................................. 40
G MARGIN SHIFT COPY .................................. 41
G ERASE COPY................................................ 42
G DUAL PAGE COPY ....................................... 43
G PAMPHLET COPY ........................................ 44
G JOB BUILD MODE......................................... 45
G MULTI SHOT COPY...................................... 46
G ORIGINAL SIZE............................................. 47
G COVER COPY ............................................... 48
G B/W REVERSE COPY................................... 50
LOADING PAPER............................................ 15
G PAPER............................................................15
G LOADING PAPER...........................................17
G CHANGING A TRAY’S PAPER TYPE AND
PAPER SIZE SETTINGS................................19
2
COPY FUNCTIONS
MAIN SCREEN OF COPY MODE ................... 21
NORMAL COPYING ........................................ 22
G
COPYING FROM THE DOCUMENT GLASS ....22
G COPYING FROM THE RSPF.........................23
POINTS TO NOTE WHEN MAKING COPIES ...24
G
4
USER SETTINGS
G BYPASS FEED (special paper) ......................26
AUTOMATIC TWO-SIDED COPYING............. 27
G USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS..................27
G USING THE RSPF..........................................28
CUSTOM SETTINGS....................................... 51
G GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR CUSTOM
SETTINGS ..................................................... 52
G SETTINGS ..................................................... 53
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT............................ 29
G
SELECTING THE ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE AND
MANUALLY ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE......29
JOB PROGRAM MEMORY............................. 54
G STORING A JOB PROGRAM........................ 54
G EXECUTING A JOB PROGRAM ................... 55
G DELETING A STORED JOB PROGRAM ...... 55
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM............ 30
G AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION .................30
G MANUAL RATIO SELECTION........................31
G SELECTING THE VERTICAL AND
AUDITING MODE ............................................ 56
G COPYING WHEN AUDITING MODE IS
HORIZONTAL COPY RATIOS SEPARATELY
(XY ZOOM copying)........................................32
ENABLED ...................................................... 56
INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN....................... 34
1
5
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
DISPLAY MESSAGES..................................... 58
TROUBLESHOOTING..................................... 60
MISFEED REMOVAL....................................... 64
G MISFEED REMOVAL GUIDANCE .................64
G MISFEED IN THE RSPF.................................65
G MISFEED IN THE BYPASS TRAY .................66
G MISFEED IN THE MACHINE..........................66
G MISFEED IN THE CENTER TRAY.................68
G MISFEED IN THE UPPER PAPER TRAY......68
G MISFEED IN THE LOWER PAPER TRAY .....69
G MISFEED IN THE UPPER EXIT AREA
(when a job separator tray kit or finisher
(AR-FN5N) is installed)...................................70
G MISFEED IN AN OUTPUT TRAY
(when a finisher (AR-FN5N) is installed).........70
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE ........ 72
STAPLE CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT......... 73
G STAPLE JAM REMOVAL ...............................74
CHECKING THE TONER QUANTITY AND
TOTAL OUTPUT COUNT................................ 74
CLEANING THE MACHINE............................. 75
G DOCUMENT GLASS AND RSPF...................75
G THE BYPASS TRAY PAPER
FEED ROLLER...............................................75
6
PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES
PERIPHERAL DEVICES.................................. 76
G FINISHER (AR-FN5N) ....................................77
G 500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT/
2 x 500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT..............78
STORAGE OF SUPPLIES............................... 79
G PROPER STORAGE ......................................79
7
APPENDIX
SPECIFICATIONS ........................................... 80
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET................ 82
INDEX............................................................... 90
G INDEX BY PURPOSE.....................................93
2
CAUTIONS
Follow the cautions below when using this machine.
CAUTIONS ON USING THE MACHINE
Warning:
• The fusing area is hot. Exercise care in this area when removing misfed paper.
• Do not look directly at the light source. Doing so may damage your eyes.
Caution:
• Do not switch the machine rapidly on and off. After turning the machine off, wait 10 to 15 seconds before turning it
back on.
• Machine power must be turned off before installing any supplies.
• Place the machine on a firm, level surface.
• Do not install the machine in a humid or dusty location.
• When the machine is not used for a long time, for example, during prolonged holidays, turn the power switch off
and remove the power cord from the outlet.
• When moving the machine, be sure to turn the power switch off and remove the power cord from the outlet.
• Do not cover the machine with a dust cover, cloth or plastic film while the power is on. Doing so may prevent heat
dissipation, damaging the machine.
• Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in
hazardous laser radiation exposure.
• The socket-outlet should be installed near the machine and should be easily accessible.
IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN SELECTING AN
INSTALLATION SITE
Improper installation may damage the machine. Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the
machine is moved.
If the machine is moved from a cool place to a warm place, condensation may form inside the machine. Operation
in this condition will cause poor copy quality and malfunctions. Leave the machine at room temperature for at least
2 hours before use.
Caution
Do not install your machine in areas that are:
• damp, humid, or very
• exposed to direct sunlight
dusty
• poorly
ventilated
• subject to extreme
temperature or humidity
changes, e.g., near an
air conditioner or
heater.
3
The machine should be installed near an accessible power outlet for easy connection and
disconnection.
Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meets the specified voltage and
current requirements. Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded.
Connect the machine to a power outlet which is not used for other electric appliances. If a lighting fixture is
connected to the same outlet, the light may flicker.
Note
Be sure to allow the required space around the
machine for servicing and proper ventilation.
12" (30cm)
12"
(30cm)
12"
(30cm)
A small amount of ozone is produced within the machine during operation.
The emission level is insufficient to cause any health hazard.
Note:
The present recommended long term exposure limit for ozone is 0.1 ppm (0.2 mg/m3) calculated as an 8 hr. time-
weighted average concentration.
However, since the small amount that is emitted may have an objectionable odor, it is advisable to place the
machine in a ventilated area.
CAUTIONS ON HANDLING THE MACHINE
Observe the following precautions when handling the machine to maintain top performance.
Do not drop the machine, subject it to shock or strike it against any object.
Store spare toner cartridges in a cool dry place without removing from the package before use.
• If they are exposed to direct sunlight or excessive heat, poor copies may result.
Do not touch the photoconductive drum (green portion).
• Scratches or smudges on the drum will cause dirty copies.
Safety precautions:
This Digital Copier is rated Class I and complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 of the CDRH standards. This
means that the machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation. For your safety, observe the precautions
below.
• Do not remove the cabinet, operation panel or any other covers.
• The machine’s exterior covers contain several safety interlock switches. Do not bypass any safety interlock by
inserting wedges or other items into switch slots.
Trademark acknowledgements
• Microsoft® Windows® operating system is a trademark or copyright of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and
other countries.
®
®
®
®
®
®
•
Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP are trademarks
or copyrights of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
• IBM and PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
®
•
Acrobat Reader Copyright© 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo,
Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
®
•
•
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Macintosh, Power Macintosh, Mac OS, LaserWriter, and AppleTalk are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
4
ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, SHARP has determined that this product meets
the ENERGY STAR® guidelines for energy efficiency.
The Environmental Choice Program guidelines are applied to the products only in Canada. The
products that meet the Environmental Choice Program guidelines carry the logo shown to the left.
The products without the logo may not meet the Environmental Choice Program guidelines.
"BATTERY DISPOSAL"
THIS MACHINE CONTAINS MANGANESE DIOXIDE BATTERY WHICH MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY.
CONTACT YOUR SHARP DEALER OR SERVICER FOR INSTRUCTIONS.
This product utilizes tin-lead solder, and a fluorescent lamp containing a small amount of mercury.
Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations.
For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance:
www.eia.org
USING THE MANUAL
This machine has been designed to provide convenient copying features in a minimum amount of office space and
with maximum operational ease. To get full use of all machine features, be sure to familiarize yourself with this
manual and the machine. For quick reference during machine use, keep this manual in a handy location.
ABOUT THE OPERATION MANUALS
The operation manuals for the machine are as follows:
Operation Manual for copier (this manual)
This manual contains explanations of the product and procedures for using the machine as a copier.
Online manual (for printer)
This manual is on the CD-ROM, and explains the procedures for using the machine as a printer, network printer, and
network scanner.
Software setup guide (for printer)
This manual contains instructions for installing the software that allows the machine to be used with your computer
and procedures for establishing initial printer settings.
Operation manual (for network scanner) (When the network scanner is
installed.)
This manual contains explanations of the product and procedures for using the machine as a network scanner.
Key operator's guide
This explains key operator programs for machine management and copier related functions.
Key operator programs for the fax functions are explained in the operation manual for facsimile.
5
THE MEANING OF "R" IN ORIGINAL AND PAPER SIZE
INDICATIONS
An "R" appearing at the end of an original or paper size (5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, 8-1/2" x 11"R, etc.) indicates that the original
or paper is oriented horizontally as shown below.
<Horizontal (Landscape) orientation>
Sizes that can be placed only in the horizontal (landscape) orientation (8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17"), do not contain the
"R" in their size indication.
CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
Warns that injury may result if the contents of the warning are not properly followed.
Warning
Caution
Note
Cautions that damage to the machine or one of its components may result if the contents of the
caution are not properly followed.
Notes provide useful information on the specifications, functions, performance, and operation of
the machine.
Explanation of words and illustration
• This operation manual refers to the Reversing Single Pass Feeder as the "RSPF".
• The illustrations in this manual show the AR-M237/AR-M277 with the optional job separator tray kit (AR-TR3)
installed.
The appearance of your machine may be different depending on the model and options installed, however, the
basic operations are the same.
RSPF
• For peripheral devices that can be installed, see "PERIPHERAL DEVICES" (p.76).
6
MAIN FEATURES
High-speed laser copying
• First-copy time*1 at 600 dpi*2 is only 4.8 seconds.
• Copying speed is 23 copies/min. (AR-M237) or 27 copies/min. (AR-M277) at 600 dpi (not in the super photo
mode). This is ideal for business use and provides a big boost to workplace productivity.
1
*
First-Copy time may vary depending on the power-supply voltage, ambient temperature, and other operating conditions.
"dpi" ("dots per inch") is unit that is used to measure resolution. Resolution indicates how much detail can be reproduced in
a printed or scanned image.
2
*
High-quality digital image
• High-quality copying at 600 dpi or 1200 dpi (super photo mode) is performed.
• In addition to automatic exposure adjustment, four original type modes are available: "TEXT mode" for text-only
originals, "TEXT/PHOTO mode" for mixed text and photo originals, "PHOTO mode" for photos, and "SUPER
PHOTO mode" for high-quality reproduction of photos. The exposure can be manually adjusted to 5 levels in each
mode.
Enhanced copying features
• Zoom copies can be made from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.
• Continuous copying of up to 999 copies is possible.
• Automatic two-sided copying can be performed.
• Useful special features such as erase, margin shift, 2 in 1 and 4 in 1, pamphlet copy, dual page copy and cover
copy are available.
A
A
A
A
Erase copy
Margin shift copy
2in1 copy 4in1 copy
4
3
2
1
SHARP
Cover copy
Pamphlet copy
Dual page copy
• Key operator programs allow the setting or modification of functions to meet your specific needs. The key operator
programs can also be used to enable audit mode, which allows the machine administrator to control use of the
machine.
Black and white LCD touch panel makes it easy to operate the machine
• Employing a backlit black and white LCD display, the touch panel provides step-by-step guidance for each
function of the machine. The touch panel even provides instructions for removing paper misfeeds and other
problems that occur.
Optional features
• An optional finisher allows automatic stapling of up to 30 sheets.
• This machine can be used as a network printer if the optional printer expansion kit is installed.
• This machine can be used as a facsimile machine if the optional facsimile expansion kit is installed.
• This machine can be used as a network scanner if the optional network scanner expansion kit is installed.
Environment and people friendly design
• Preheat and auto power shut-off modes are provided to reduce power consumption when the machine is not in
use.
• A universal design has been implemented in the product whereby the height of the operation panel and shape of
the keys are designed to be useable by as many people as possible.
7
Chapter 1
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
1
This chapter contains basic information that should be read before using the machine.
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Exterior
3
6
2
1
7
16
8
4
5
12
11
9
17
18
19
13
14
20
21
10
15
1
9
Document feeder tray
Power switch
Place the original(s) that you wish to scan face up
here. (p.23)
Press to turn the machine power on and off. (p.13)
10
11
Handles
Use to move the machine.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Original guides
Adjust to the size of the originals.
Operation panel
Document feeder cover
Open to remove misfed originals. (p.65)
Contains operation keys and the touch panel.
(p.10)
12
Job separator tray (Upper tray) (optional)
Print jobs and received faxes are delivered to this
tray.
Reversing tray
Pull out to remove misfed originals. (p.65)
Exit area
13
14
Center tray
Finished copies are delivered to the center tray.
Originals exit the machine here after copying.
Document transport cover
Open to remove misfed originals. (p.65)
Front cover
Open to remove paper misfeeds and perform
machine maintenance. (p.66)
Document transport cover knob
Pull to open the document transport cover (p.65)
Document glass
Place an original that you wish to scan face down
here. (p.22)
8
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Interior
22
23
27
1
24
25
26
15
24
25
Paper trays
Each tray holds 500 sheets of copy paper. (p.15)
Roller rotating knob
Turn to remove misfed paper. (p.66)
16
Upper right side cover
Photoconductive drum
Open to remove misfeeds when an optional job
separator tray kit or a optional finisher is installed.
(p.70)
Copy images are formed on the photoconductive
drum.
Do not touch the photoconductive drum
17
18
19
20
Side cover
Open to remove misfeeds. (p.66)
Caution
(green portion). Doing so may damage the
drum and cause smudges on copies.
Side cover handle
Pull to open the side cover. (p.66)
26
Fusing unit release levers
To remove a paper misfeed in the fusing unit, push
up on these levers and remove the paper. (p.67)
Bypass tray paper guides
Adjust to the width of the paper. (p.18)
The fusing unit is hot. Do not touch
the fusing unit when removing
Warning
Bypass tray
Regular paper and special paper (such as
transparency film) can be fed from the bypass tray.
(p.18)
misfed paper. Doing so may cause a
burn or injury.
27
Fusing unit paper guide
Open to remove misfed paper. (p.67)
21
Bypass tray extension
Pull out the bypass tray extension before placing
paper in the bypass tray. (p.18)
The model name is on the front cover of the
machine.
Note
22
23
Toner cartridge lock release lever
Use to unlock the toner cartridge. (p.72)
Toner cartridge
Contains toner. (p.72)
9
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
OPERATION PANEL
COPY
PRINT
SCAN
FAX
ON LINE
DATA
DATA
LINE
DATA
CUSTOM SETTINGS
JOB STATUS
ACC.#-C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
1
3
4
Touch panel
[JOB STATUS] key
Press to display the current job status. (p.12)
The machine status, messages and touch keys are
displayed on the panel. The display will show the
status of printing, copying or network scanning
according to the mode that is selected. For details
see the next page.
[CUSTOM SETTINGS] key
Use to adjust various settings of the machine
including the contrast of the touch panel and key
operator programs. (p.52)
2
Mode select keys and indicators
Use to change modes and the corresponding
display on the touch panel.
[COPY] key
Press to select copy mode.
5
6
Numeric keys
Use to enter numeric values for various settings.
[ACC.#-C] key (
)
When auditing mode is enabled, press this key
after finishing a job to return the machine to
account number entry standby.
[PRINT] key/ONLINE indicator/
DATA indicator
Press to select print mode.
• ONLINE indicator
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
7
[#/P] key (
)
Use this key to execute a job program in copy
mode.
The key is also used to dial in fax mode.
• DATA indicator
A print job is in memory. The indicator lights
steadily while the job is held in memory, and
blinks while the job is printed.
8
9
[CLEAR] key (
Press to clear a copy number setting or cancel a
job.
)
[SCAN] key/DATA indicator (When the
network scanner option is installed.)
Press to select network scan mode when the
network scanner option is installed.
• DATA indicator
Lights steadily or blinks while a scanned image
is being sent.
(See "Operation manual (for network
scanner)".)
[START] key (
Press in copy mode, scanner mode, or fax mode to
begin copying, network scanning, or faxing.
This key blinks when auto power shut mode has
activated. Press the key to return to normal
operation.
)
10
11
[INTERRUPT] key (
Use to perform an interrupt copy job. (p.34)
[CLEAR ALL] key (
Resets the settings to the initial settings.
)
[FAX] key/LINE indicator/DATA indicator
(When the fax option is installed.)
Press to select fax mode when the fax option is
installed.
)
• LINE indicator
this lights up while faxes are being sent or
received.
• DATA indicator
Blinks when a fax has been received to
memory and lights steadily when a fax is
waiting in memory for transmission.
(See operation manual for facsimile.)
10
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
TOUCH PANEL
Using the touch panel
Selecting a function
[Example 1]
[Example 1]
Items on the touch panel
are selected by touching
the key associated with
the item. A beep will
sound to confirm that the
item was selected and
the key will be
highlighted.
* A double-beep is
sounded when an
Items which are
CANCEL
OK
JOB QUEUE
COPY
SETS / PROG
003 / 000
highlighted at the time a
screen appears are
already selected and will
take effect when the [OK]
key is touched.
LEFT
RI
BINDING BINDING
SHARP001
003 / 000
Beep
tone
1
[Example 2]
invalid key is touched.
If you need to cancel a selection, simply press the key
once again so that it is not highlighted.
[Example 2]
Keys which are grayed
out cannot be selected.
1/13
COMPLETE
1/
DUAL PAGE
COPY
MULTI SHOT
The confirmation beeps can be disabled in the key
operator programs. (See "Key operator's guide".)
The key is no longer
highlighted and the
selection is canceled.
1/
DUAL PAGE
COPY
The touch panel screens shown in this manual are
printed images and may differ from the actual screens.
MULTI SHOT
[Example 3]
When the machine is
used in copy mode or fax
mode and a special
mode is selected, a icon
representing the feature
will appear on the touch
panel. If this icon is
READY TO COPY.
ORIGIN
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
½x11
14
touched, the setting
screen of the function (or
a menu screen) will
appear, allowing the
settings to be checked,
adjusted, or canceled.
11
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Job status screen (common to copy, print, network scan and fax)
This screen appears when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed.
A job list showing the current job and the stored jobs or a list showing completed jobs can be displayed.
The contents of jobs can be viewed and jobs can be deleted from the queue. The following screen shows the job
queue for print jobs.
1
2
JOB QUEUE
COMPLETE
JOB QUEUE
COPY
SETS / PROGRESS
003 / 000
STATUS
1
*
1/1
PAPER EMPTY
003 / 000
010 / 000
SHARP001
WAITING
WAITING
DETAIL
PRIORITY
0666211221
STOP/DELETE
PRINT JOB
E-MAIL/FTP
FAX JOB
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
3
Job list
Shows stored jobs and the job currently being
[PRINT JOB] key
Use to view the list of output jobs for all modes
(print, copy, and fax).
3
5
executed. Touch one of keys
to
in the above
illustration to select the type of job. The icon next
to each job name indicates the mode of the job as
follows:
4
5
[E-MAIL/FTP] key
Displays a network scanner job (When the network
scanner function is installed.).
Copy mode
Printer mode
[FAX JOB] key
This displays stored fax jobs and the fax job
currently being executed (When the fax option is
installed.).
Network scanner mode
Fax mode
Fax mode
6
7
Display switching keys
Use to change the page of the displayed job list.
(Send jobs)
(Receive jobs)
The jobs in the job list appear in the form of keys.
To give priority to a job or pause or delete a job,
touch the key of the job and then use the key
[STOP/DELETE] key
Use to pause or delete a job currently being
executed, or to delete a stored job. Copy jobs and
received faxes cannot be paused or deleted with
this key. Copy jobs can be canceled by pressing
7
8
described in
or
.
1
* :"PAPER EMPTY" in the job status display
"PAPER EMPTY" in the job status display
indicates that the machine is out of the specified
size of paper. Add the specified size of paper. If
the specified size of paper is not available and
you are in printer mode, another size of paper
can be loaded in the bypass tray to allow printing
to take place. (See the "Online manual".)
the [CLEAR] key (
) or [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).
8
9
[PRIORITY] key
Touch this key after selecting a stored job in this
[JOB QUEUE] list to print the job ahead of the
other jobs.
2
Mode switching keys
[DETAIL] key
Use to select the job list mode: "JOB QUEUE"
(Stored/currently executing jobs) or "COMPLETE"
(Finished jobs).
Shows information on the selected job. This
cannot be used for a received fax.
"JOB QUEUE":
Shows jobs that have been stored and the job that
is currently being executed.
"COMPLETE":
Shows the jobs that have been finished. Note that
copy jobs do not appear in this list.
If the power is turned off, or if auto power shut-off
mode activates when there are no jobs, the jobs in
the "COMPLETE" list will be erased.
12
POWER ON AND OFF
The power switch is located on the left side of the machine.
When the power switch is turned on, the machine starts up in the previously used mode. The following
explanations assume that the previously used mode was copy mode.
Note
POWER ON
Turn the power switch to the "ON" position.
POWER OFF
When the machine is not used for a long time, be sure
to turn it off.
Make sure that the machine is not in operation
and then turn the power switch to the "OFF"
position.
ON
1
•
When the power switch is turned to the "ON" position,
the message "WARMING UP. A COPYING JOB CAN
BE SET NOW." will appear in the message display and
the machine will start warming up. When "READY TO
COPY." appears, the machine is ready to copy. Copy
settings can be selected during warm-up.
OFF
If the power switch is turned off while the machine is in
operation, a misfeed may occur and the job that was in
progress will be canceled.
• If auditing mode is enabled, "ENTER YOUR
ACCOUNT NUMBER." will appear. When a valid
account number is entered, the account status will
appear on the main screen for several seconds.
Then copying can be performed. (See "Key
operator’s guide".)
If the fax option is installed, be sure to keep the power turned on. Faxes cannot be received when the power is
turned off.
Note
13
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
INITIAL SETTINGS
The machine reverts to the initial settings when it is first turned on, when the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) is pressed, or
the preset "auto clear time" elapses after the last copy is made in any mode. When the machine reverts to the initial
settings, all settings and functions selected to that point are canceled. The auto clear time can be changed in the key
operator programs. (See the "Key operator’s guide".)
The initial settings that appear in the display are shown below.
READY TO COPY.
0
AUTO
SPECIAL MODES
EXPOSURE
AUTO
8½x11
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
8½x11
PAPER SELECT
8½x11
8½x14
100%
COPY RATIO
Functions and settings are explained based on the above screen as applicable.
Copy ratio: 100%, Exposure: Automatic, Copy quantity: 0, Automatic two-sided: One side to One side,
Auto paper selection: On,
Paper tray: Upper paper tray (at power on, the previously selected paper tray will again be selected.)
The initial settings can be changed in the key operator programs. (See the "Key operator’s guide".)
For the initial settings (initial screen) of printer, fax, and scanner modes, see the operation manuals of those
Note
modes.
POWER SAVE MODES
The machine has two power save modes to reduce overall power consumption and thereby reduce the cost of
operation. These modes help conserve natural resources and reduce environmental pollution. The two power save
modes are "Preheat mode" and "Auto power shut-off mode".
The time settings for each mode can be changed in the key operator programs. (See the "Key operator’s guide".)
Preheat mode
When the set time elapses, the temperature of the fusing unit is automatically lowered to reduce power consumption
while on standby. The factory default setting is 15 minutes. To return to normal operation, touch any key on the
operation panel. To make a copy when the machine is in this mode, simply select the desired copy selections and
then press the [START] key (
).
Auto power shut-off mode
When the set time elapses, the power to the fusing unit automatically turns off to reduce power consumption (This is
based on the guidelines of the International Energy Star Program.). The factory default setting is 60 minutes. When
the machine enters this mode, the touch panel screen turns off and only the [START] key (
) blinks. To return to
normal operation, press the [START] key ( ). To copy after warm-up starts, make desired copy selections and
press the [START] key (
).
14
LOADING PAPER
When a tray runs out of paper, a message appears in the touch panel. Load paper in the tray.
OPEN TRAY 1 AND ADD PAPER.
0
ORIGINAL 8½x11
AUTO
SPECIAL MODES
EXPOSURE
AUTO
8½x11
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
PAPER SELECT
8½x11
8½x14
100%
COPY RATIO
PAPER
1
The specifications for the types and sizes of paper that can be loaded in the paper trays are shown below.
For best results, use only SHARP recommended paper.
Tray
No.
Paper tray type
Paper type
Plain paper
Letterhead paper
Recycled paper
Color paper
Size
Weight
Capacity
1
Upper paper tray*1
Lower paper tray*2
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 15 lbs. to 28 lbs.
11" x 17"
(A5 to A3)
500 sheets*4
2
2
(56 g/m to 105 g/m )
2
3
500-sheet paper
feed unit/
Upper paper tray of
2 x 500-sheet paper
feed unit
4
Lower paper tray of
2 x 500-sheet paper
feed unit
Bypass tray
Plain paper
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 15 lbs. to 34.5 lbs.
11" x 17"
(A6 to A3)
100 sheets*4
Letterhead paper
Recycled paper
Color paper
(56 g/m2 to 128 /m2) *3
g
Thin paper
14 lbs. to 15 lbs.
100 sheets
30 sheets
(52 g/m2 to 56 g/m2)
Heavy paper
Max. 54 lbs.
(200 g/m2)
Labels
40 sheets
40 sheets
5 sheets
Transparency film
Envelope International DL
(110 x 220 mm)
International C5
(162 x 229 mm)
Commercial 10
(4-1/8" x 9-1/2")
1
2
3
4
*
*
*
*
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A5) size paper can only be loaded in tray 1 and the bypass tray.
B5 size paper cannot be loaded in tray 2 (However, B5R paper can be loaded.).
When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size, do not use paper of weight greater than 28 lbs. (105 g/m2).
The number of sheets of paper which can be loaded varies depending on the weight of the paper.
15
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Special papers
Follow these guidelines when using special papers.
• Use SHARP recommended transparency film and
label sheets. Using other than SHARP
Envelopes
Do not use the following envelopes (Misfeeds will
occur.).
• Envelopes with metal tabs, clasps, strings, holes, or
windows.
• Envelopes with rough fibers, carbon paper, or glossy
surfaces.
recommended paper may result in misfeeds or
smudges on the output. If other than SHARP
recommended media must be used, feed each
sheet one at a time using the bypass tray (Do not
attempt continuous copying or printing.).
• Envelopes with two or more flaps.
• Envelopes with tape, film, or paper attached to the
flap.
• Envelopes with a fold in the flap.
• Envelopes with glue on the flap to be moistened for
sealing.
• Envelopes with labels or stamps.
• Envelopes that are slightly inflated with air.
• Envelopes with glue protruding from the seal area.
• Envelopes with part of the seal area peeled off.
• There are many varieties of special paper available
on the market, and some cannot be used with this
machine. Before using special paper, contact a
SHARP service center.
• Before using other than SHARP recommended
paper, make a test copy to see if the paper is
suitable.
Letterhead paper
Letterhead paper is paper with information pre-printed
at the top such as a company name and address.
SHARP
16
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
LOADING PAPER
Make sure that the machine is not copying, printing, or printing a received fax, and then follow these steps to load paper.
Loading the paper in the paper tray
Pull out the paper tray until it stops.
Load paper in the tray.
1
5
If you are loading the
same size of paper as
was loaded previously,
go to step 4. If you are
loading a different size of
paper, continue with the
following step.
Maximum height line
1
•
Load the paper with the print side facing up.
Squeeze the lock lever of the front
guide and slide the front guide to
match the width of the paper.
Note
• Insert the paper along the guides.
• The tray holds up to 500 sheets of 21 lb.
2
2
(80g/m ) bond paper.
• Do not load paper above the maximum
height line.
Front guide
• When adding paper, first remove any
paper remaining in the tray, combine it
with the paper to be added, and then
reload as a single stack.
Left guide
Push the paper tray firmly back into
the machine.
6
Move the left guide to the appropriate
3
slot as marked on the tray.
When using 11" x 17"
copy paper, store the left
guide in the slot at the left
front of the paper tray.
If you loaded a different size of paper that was loaded
previously, place the appropriate paper size card in the
front of the paper tray to indicate the new paper size.
Fan the copy paper.
4
Paper size card
Paper size card
E X T R A
3 X 2 / 1 8
4 X 2 / 1 8
1 X 2 / 1 8
R
1
1
1
51
/
2
X81
/
2
11X17
81
2X11
/
A4
If you loaded a different size of paper that
was loaded previously, go to "CHANGING A
TRAY’S PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE
SETTINGS" (p.19).
Note
17
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Loading paper in the bypass tray
Unfold the bypass tray.
Insert the copy paper (print side
down) all the way into the bypass tray.
1
3
To enable correct
detection of the paper
size, be sure to pull out
the bypass tray
extension.
Set the paper guides to the copy
paper width.
2
Important points when inserting paper in the bypass tray
• Be sure to place envelopes horizontally as shown in
the following diagram.
• Load the paper with the print side facing down.
Landscape
orientation
Portrait
orientation
• When loading envelopes, make sure that they are
straight and flat and do not have loosely glued
construction flaps (not the closure flap).
• When adding paper, first remove any paper
remaining in the bypass tray, combine it with the
paper to be added, and then reload as a single
stack. The paper to be added must be the same size
and type as the paper already in the bypass tray.
• Do not use paper that is smaller than the original
image. This may cause smudges or unclean images.
• Do not use paper that has already been printed on
by a laser printer or plain paper fax machine. This
may cause smudges or unclean images.
18
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
CHANGING A TRAY’S PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE
SETTINGS
When you change the paper in a tray, follow the steps below to change the tray’s paper type and paper size settings.
The settings cannot be changed when operation has stopped because the paper ran out or a misfeed occurred, or
when an interrupt copy job is being performed.
Even in copy mode, the settings cannot be changed while a print job or received fax is being printed.
• 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A5) size paper can only be set for tray 1.
Note
• B5 size paper cannot be set for tray 2 (However, B5R size paper can be set.).
• Tray settings for trays other than the bypass tray can be prohibited in the key operator programs. (See the
"Key operator's guide".)
1
Load paper in the tray as explained in
"Loading the paper in the paper tray"
(p.17).
Select the size and type of paper that
is loaded in the tray.
1
5
CUSTOM SETTINGS
OK
TRAY 1 TYPE/SIZE SETTING
TYPE
SIZE
AB
INCH
8½x13
Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.
2
PLAIN
LETTER HEAD
COLOR
11x17
8½x14
RECYCLED
8½x11
8½x11R
5½x8½
The custom settings
menu screen will appear.
LINE
DATA
CUSTOM SETTINGS
B STATUS
The currently selected paper type will be highlighted.
• To change the paper type selection, touch the
appropriate type key.
• To change the paper size selection, touch the
appropriate size key.
•
To change the displayed size selections to AB sizes,
touch [AB INCH].
Touch the [TRAY SETTINGS] key.
3
TOT L COUNT
The tray settings screen
will appear.
CONTRA
Touch the [OK] key.
6
ADDRES
TRAY SETTINGS
CONTRO
A message appears prompting you to
check the paper in the tray. Check the
paper and then touch the [OK] key.
7
KEYB
KEY
SELECT
You will return to the tray settings screen.
Select the tray in which you loaded
paper.
4
For the tray numbers,
TYPE / SIZE
see "PAPER" (p.15).
If the desired tray does
not appear in the display,
TRAY 1
TRAY 2
TRAY 3
PLAIN / 8½x11
LAIN / 8½x14
use the
key or
key
to scroll until it appears.
PLAIN / 11x17
19
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
Setting the paper type in the bypass tray
Use either of the following two methods to set the bypass tray's paper type setting.
From the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key
From the [PAPER SELECT] key
Load paper in the bypass tray as
explained in "Loading paper in the
bypass tray" (p.18).
Load paper in the bypass tray as
explained in "Loading paper in the
bypass tray" (p.18).
1
1
2
Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.
Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key.
2
The custom settings
menu screen will appear.
EXPOSURE
LINE
DATA
AUTO 8½x11
CUSTOM SETTINGS
B STATUS
PAPER ELECT
100%
Touch the [TRAY SETTINGS] key.
Touch the paper type selection key.
3
3
TOT L COUNT
The tray settings screen
CONTRA
READY TO COPY.
0
will appear.
ADDRES
TRAY SETTINGS
AUTO
CONTRO
11x17
PLAIN
8½x11
EXPOSURE
RECYCLED
PLAIN
8½x14
KEYB
KEY
PAPER SELECT
SELECT
EXTRA
ADJUST
100%
COPY RATIO
Touch the [BYPASS TRAY] key.
4
Select the paper type.
4
TYPE / SIZE
READY TO COPY.
0
TRAY 4
PLAIN / 11x17
AUTO
PLAIN
LETTER HEAD
COLOR
ENVELOPE
LABELS
BYPASS
TRAY
EXPOSURE
PLAIN
RECYCLED
PAPER SELECT
HEAVY APER
THIN PAPER
TRANSPARENCY
JAPANESE P/C
100%
COPY RATIO
Select the type of paper that is loaded
in the tray.
5
"JAPANESE P/C" refers to official postcards used in
Japan.
CUSTOM SETTINGS
OK
BYPASS TRAY TYPE SETTING
SELECT THE PAPER TYPE.
Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key.
5
PLAIN
LETTER HEAD
COLOR
ENVELOPE
LABELS
JAPANESE P/C
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
RECYCLED
HEAVY PAPE
THIN PAPER
TRANSPARENCY
"JAPANESE P/C" refers to official postcards used in
Japan.
Touch the [OK] key.
6
You will return to the tray settings screen.
20
Chapter 2
COPY FUNCTIONS
2
This chapter explains basic copying functions such as normal copying, reduction or enlargement, and exposure
adjustment.
MAIN SCREEN OF COPY MODE
The main screen of copy mode shows messages, keys, and settings that are used for copying. Touch a key to make
a selection. The main screen of copy mode appears when the [COPY] key is pressed (Except when the custom
settings screen appears.).
COPY
ON LINE
PRINT
DATA
SCAN
FAX
DATA
LINE
DATA
JOB STATUS
CUSTOM SETTINGS
ACC.#-C
1
2
READY TO COPY.
0
8½x11
ORIGINAL
9
10
AUTO
EXPOSURE
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
11
12
AUTO
8½x11
8½x11
PAPER SELECT
8½x11
8½x14
13
14
100%
COPY RATIO
The screen will vary depending on the
equipment installed.
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
8
9
Message display
Status messages are displayed here.
Original size display
Displays the original size only when an original is
placed for copying.
Copy number display
Exposure display
Displays the icon of the selected exposure type
and the exposure scale.
[EXPOSURE] key (p.29)
Use this key to adjust the copy exposure.
Paper select display
Displays the selected paper size. When auto paper
select mode is selected, "AUTO" appears when
auto paper select mode is selected.
Displays the selected number of copies before the
[START] key ( ) is pressed or the number of
remaining copies after the [START] key ( ) is
pressed. A single copy can be made when "0" is
displayed.
10
11
3
4
[2-SIDED COPY] key (p.27)
Touch to open the duplex copy mode setting screen.
[OUTPUT] key (p.35)
Touch to select sort, group, staple sort, and other
output settings.
[SPECIAL MODES] key (p.39)
Touch to open the special modes selection screen.
Original feed display
12
13
[PAPER SELECT] key (p.22, p.26)
Use this key to select the paper size.
Copy ratio display
5
6
Displays the selected copy ratio.
This appears when an original is placed in the
RSPF.
14
[COPY RATIO] key (p.31)
Use this key to select the copy ratio.
7
Paper size display
This shows the location of the paper trays, the size of
the paper in the trays. "
" indicates whether or not
there is paper. A paper tray can be touched to
change the paper tray selection.
21
NORMAL COPYING
COPYING FROM THE DOCUMENT GLASS
If "AUDITING MODE" (p.56) has been enabled, enter your 5-digit account number.
Note
•
•
To load paper, see "LOADING PAPER"
Open the RSPF and place the original
face down on the document glass.
1
Note
(p.15). If you change the paper size in the
tray, you will also need to change the tray's
paper size and paper type settings. (p.19)
The paper types for the auto paper selection
function can be selected, or the function
disabled, in the key operator programs. (See
the "Key operator's guide".)
Manually selecting the paper size (paper tray)
If auto paper selection is disabled in the key operator
programs, or if you wish to use a different size of paper
than the original, touch the [PAPER SELECT] key and
select the paper tray with the desired paper size. (The
selected paper will be highlighted and the paper selecting
screen will close.)
[How to place the original]
Align the corner or the original with the tip of the arrow
(
) at the left rear corner of the glass as shown in the
illustration.
To close the screen without selecting a paper size, touch
the [PAPER SELECT] key again.
Original scale
Original scale
READY TO COPY.
0
AUTO
PLAIN
11x17
PLAIN
1.8½x11
EXPOSURE
5-1/2" x
8-1/2"
8-1/2" x
14"
2.8½x14
RECYCLED
R
8-1/2" x 11"
PAPER SELECT
8-1/2" x 11"
11" x 17"
EXTRA IMAGE
ADJUST
100%
COPY RATIO
Close the RSPF.
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
2
3
4
The original size appears
in the touch panel.
ACC.#-C
If the original size is not automatically
detected, manually set the original size. (p.47)
Note
• The number in the copy quantity display will
decrease by 1 each time a copy is made.
• If you are only making a single copy, the copy can be
made with the copy number display showing "0".
Make sure that the same size of paper
as the original is automatically
selected.
• To clear a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key (
).
• Press the [CLEAR] key (
copying in the middle of a run.
) to stop
The selected tray is
highlighted. If the tray
contains a different size of
paper than the original,
"LOAD xxxx PAPER." will
appear.
Note
8½x11
ORIGINAL
AUTO
• To repeat the same copy sequence for a
different original, simply replace the
EXPOSURE
AUTO
8½x
original and press the [START] key ( ).
• If copying stops because the tray has run
out of paper, you can resume copying by
touching the [PAPER SELECT] key and
selecting the bypass tray or a paper tray
that has the same size and type of paper
loaded in the same orientation.
8½x11
PAPER SELE
8½x11
8½x14
100%
COPY RATI
Even if the message above is displayed, copying can
be performed using the selected paper tray.
22
COPY FUNCTIONS
COPYING FROM THE RSPF
• If "AUDITING MODE" (p.56) is enabled, enter your 5-digit account number.
• If the RSPF is disabled in the key operator programs, the RSPF cannot be used. See the "Key operator's
Note
guide".
• To load paper, see "LOADING PAPER"
Make sure that an original has not
been left on the document glass and
then close the RSPF.
1
Note
(p.15). If you change the paper size in the
tray, you will also need to change the
tray's paper size and paper type settings.
(p.19)
• If needed, manually select the paper tray
that has the desired size of paper as
explained on page 22.
If an original remains on
the document glass after a
copy was made,
"REMOVE THE
•
The paper types for the auto paper selection
function can be selected, or the function
disabled, in the key operator programs. (See
the "Key operator's guide".)
ORIGINAL FROM THE
DOCUMENT GLASS." will
appear in the touch panel.
2
• If the original size is larger than the paper
size, the result of copying from the
document glass may differ from the result
of copying from the RSPF. (p.22)
Adjust the original guides to the size
of the original.
2
3
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
5
Place the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
ACC.#-C
Insert the originals all the
way into the feed slot.
The original size appears
in the touch panel.
• The number in the copy quantity display will
decrease by 1 each time a copy is made.
• If you are only making a single copy, the copy can be
made with the copy number display showing "0".
• To clear a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key (
).
• Press the [CLEAR] key (
copying in the middle of a run.
) to stop
Note
2
• Up to 100 pages (24 lbs. (90 g/m )) can
Note
• If copying stops because the tray has run
out of paper, you can resume copying by
touching the [PAPER SELECT] key and
selecting the bypass tray or a paper tray
that has the same size and type of paper
loaded in the same orientation.
be inserted at once.
• If the original size is not automatically
detected, manually set the original size.
(p.47)
Make sure that the same size of paper
as the original is selected.
4
Stream feeding mode
If stream feeding mode is enabled in the key operator
programs, "SET ORIGINALS FOR STREAM
FEEDING." will appear in the touch panel for
approximately 5 seconds after the originals are fed.
Any new originals placed in the RSPF while this
message appears will be fed and copied automatically.
The selected tray is
highlighted. If none of the
8½x11
ORIGINAL
AUTO
EXPOSURE
trays have the same size
of paper as the original,
"LOAD xxxx PAPER."
will appear.
AUTO
8½x
8½x11
PAPER SELE
8½x11
8½x14
100%
COPY RATI
Copying a large number of originals
Job Build mode is useful when you need to copy more
originals that can be placed in the RSPF at once. For
information on Job Build mode, see "JOB BUILD
MODE" (p.45).
Even if the message above is displayed, copying can
be performed using the selected paper tray.
23
COPY FUNCTIONS
POINTS TO NOTE WHEN MAKING COPIES
Document glass and RSPF
• Paper in a different orientation from the original can be selected if the auto paper select or auto image function has
been selected. In this case, the image of the original will be rotated.
• When copying a book or an original that has been folded or crumpled, press down gently on the RSPF. This will
reduce shadow lines caused by uneven contact between the original and the document glass.
• When the center tray counter function is enabled, the number of pages that can be delivered to the output tray is
limited to 500 (A4 and 8-1/2" x 11" sizes only; the limit for all other sizes is 300 pages.). When the offset function is
used, the limit is approximately 300 pages. When the limit is reached, copying stops and the [START] key (
)
light turns off. Remove the copies from the center tray and then press the [START] key ( ) to resume copying.
The center tray counter function can be disabled in the key operator programs. (See the "Key operator’s guide".)
Originals that can be used in the RSPF
A maximum of 100 sheet originals of equal size (8-1/2" x 11", 24 lbs. (90g/m2)) can be placed in the RSPF. Originals
of different length can be placed together in the RSPF as long the widths are equal; however, some copy functions
may not operate correctly.
Acceptable originals
Originals of size 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 11" x 17" having a weight of 9 lbs. to 34 lbs. (35g/m2 to 128g/m2) or 14 lbs. to 28
lbs. (52g/m2 to 105g/m2) for two-sided originals can be used.
Other considerations
• Use originals that are within the specified size and weight ranges. Originals outside the specified ranges may
cause misfeeds.
• Make sure that there are no paper clips or staples on the original.
• If an original has damp spots from correction fluid or ink, or glue from pasteups, be sure it has dried completely
before using it to make a copy. Otherwise the interior of the RSPF or the document glass may become soiled.
• The following originals cannot be used. These may cause misfeeds, smudging, and unclear images.
• Transparencies, tracing paper, other transparent or translucent paper, photographs
• Carbon paper
• Thermal paper
• Originals that are creased, folded, or torn
• Glued originals, cut-out originals
• Originals with binder holes
• Originals printed using an ink ribbon (thermal transfer printing), originals printed on thermal transfer paper
24
COPY FUNCTIONS
Copying originals of mixed length (Mixed feeding)
When using the RSPF, originals of mixed length can be fed together as long as the width of the originals is the same.
To copy originals of mixed length, follow these steps:
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key.
Touch the [OK] key.
1
2
3
4
The setting is entered and
you return to the main
screen.
OK
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
The original size icon
changes to ( ) to indicate
that mixed feeding is
selected.
8½x11
When copying is started in mixed feeding
mode, all originals are scanned before
copying begins.
Touch the
key and then the
Note
[ORIGINAL SIZE] key.
2
ORIGINAL
SIZE
C
Select the "MIX SIZE ORIGINAL
FEEDING MODE" checkbox.
ORIGINAL SIZE
OK
AUTO
MANUAL
MIX SIZE ORIGINAL FEEDING MODE
Automatic copy image rotation (Rotation copying)
If the originals are placed in a different orientation than the copy paper, the original image will be automatically
rotated 90°. (When an image is rotated, a message will be displayed.) If a function is selected that is not suitable for
rotation, such as enlarging the copy to greater than 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size or margin shift copy, rotation will not be
possible.
[Example]
Orientation of
the placed original
Orientation of
the loaded paper
Copy after rotation
Face down
Face down
• This function operates in both the auto paper select and auto image modes. Rotation copying can be disabled in
the key operator programs. (See the "Key operator's guide".)
25
COPY FUNCTIONS
BYPASS FEED (special paper)
The bypass tray must be used to feed special papers such as transparency film and labels. The bypass tray can also
be used to feed standard copy paper.
Place the original(s). (p.22, p.23)
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
1
2
4
Insert the paper (print face down) all
the way into the bypass tray.
For paper that can be
used in the bypass tray,
see "PAPER" (p.15).
To load paper, see
ACC.#-C
"Loading paper in the
bypass tray" (p.18).
Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key or
the tray in the image of the machine in
the touch panel, and select the bypass
tray.
3
Set the type of paper that
EXPOSURE
you loaded in the bypass
tray. (p.20)
AUTO 8½x11
PAPER SELECT
100%
Shifting the starting position of copying
When copying on a special size of paper in the bypass tray, the starting position of printing can be shifted vertically
for fine adjustment of the image position. To adjust the starting position of printing, follow the steps below. This
function can only be used when feeding special sizes of paper from the bypass tray.
1 Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key and then touch the [EXTRA
READY TO COPY.
0
IMAGE ADJUST] key on the bypass tray.
OK
EXTRA IMAGE ADJUST
2 Use the
key or
key to adjust the printing position, and
then touch the [OK] key.
(-0.5 0.5)
inch
0.00
• The position can be adjusted from -0.5 inch to +0.5 inch in 0.02
inch increments.
TO FRONT TO REAR
•
When a setting from -0.5 inch to -0.02 inch is selected, the starting
position of printing is moved to front from the standard position. When
a setting from +0.02 inch to +0.5 inch is selected, the starting position
of printing is moved to rear.
26
AUTOMATIC TWO-SIDED COPYING
Two originals can be automatically copied onto both sides of a single sheet of paper. When the RSPF is used,
two-sided copies of two-sided originals can easily be made.
Original ¡ Paper
One-sided original ¡ Two sides (
)
Document glass
One-sided original
Two-sided original
Two-sided original
¡ Two sides
¡ Two sides
¡ One side
(
)
(
)
(
)
RSPF
2
• Paper sizes that can be used are 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 14" and 11" x 17" (A5, B5,
B5R, A4, A4R, B4, and A3).
Note
• When making two-sided copies on letterhead paper, place the side with the letterhead face down if using a
tray, or face up if using the bypass tray (This is the opposite of normal.).
•
Automatic two-sided copying is not possible on thick paper, thin paper, labels, transparency film, envelopes, and
other special types of paper.
• If automatic two-sided copying is performed using super photo mode, the memory may become full
("MEMORY IS FULL, SELECT ANOTHER EXPOSURE MODE." will appear.). Touch the [OK] key to cancel
automatic two-sided copying, set the exposure setting to other than super photo mode, and select automatic
two-sided copying once again.
• Automatic two-sided copying can be disabled in the key operator programs. (See the "Key operator’s guide".)
•
When dual page copy (p.43) is selected, two-sided original to two sides or two-sided original to one side cannot be used.
USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS
Touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key when making the tablet
Place the original on the document
glass. (p.22)
1
2
binding, or when making automatic two-sided copies of a
one-sided 11" x 17" or 8-1/2" x 14" size portrait original,
touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key.
Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.
Portrait-oriented original
(11" x 17" or 8-1/2" x 14" size)
Before [BINDING CHANGE] After [BINDING CHANGE]
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
Touch the [OK] key.
4
Touch the [One-sided to two-sided
copy] key.
3
OK
BINDG
CHANGE
27
COPY FUNCTIONS
Make sure that a suitable paper size is
Remove the first original and then place
the original for the back side on the
document glass. Close the RSPF and
then press the [START] key ( ).
5
7
automatically selected, or select
another size using the [PAPER
SELECT] key.
To cancel automatic
EXPOSURE
two-sided copying, press
the [CLEAR] key (
).
AUTO 8½x11
PAPER SELECT
100%
When making two-sided copies of an odd
number of originals, touch the [READ-END]
key after scanning the last original.
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
The original for the front
6
Note
side is scanned.
ACC.#-C
USING THE RSPF
Place the original(s) in the document
feeder tray. (p.23)
Touch the [OK] key.
1
4
5
OK
Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.
2
BINDG
CHANGE
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
Make sure that a suitable paper size is
automatically selected, or select
another size using the [PAPER
SELECT] key.
Touch the desired copy mode.
3
EXPOSURE
Y TO COPY.
D COPY
AUTO 8½x11
BIN
CH
PAPER SELECT
100%
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
6
Touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key when making the
tablet binding, or when making automatic two-sided copies
of a one-sided 11" x 17" or 8-1/2" x 14" size portrait
original, touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key.
Portrait-oriented original
(11" x 17" or 8-1/2" x 14" size)
Before [BINDING CHANGE] After [BINDING CHANGE]
ACC.#-C
28
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT
SELECTING THE ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE AND
MANUALLY ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE
[AUTO] is selected by default for automatic adjustment of the image according to the original. If you wish to specify
the original image type or manually adjust the exposure, place the original in the RSPF or on the document glass,
check the paper size, and then perform the following steps.
Touch the [EXPOSURE] key.
Manually adjust the copy exposure.
1
3
If [TEXT] was selected
0
for the original image
type, touch the [AUTO
MANUAL] key to
AUTO
1
3
5
EXPOSURE
select [MANUAL] and
then adjust the copy
exposure.
2
Touch the
Touch the
key to make darker copies.
key to make lighter copies.
Select [TEXT], [TEXT/PHOTO],
[PHOTO], or [SUPER PHOTO] as
appropriate for the original.
2
Exposure value guidelines
1 - 2 Dark originals like newspapers
Note
3
Normal originals
ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE
TEXT
4 - 5 Light colored text or text written in
pencil
AUTO
TEXT/PHOTO
To change back to automatic exposure adjustment,
follow these steps:
1
3
PHOTO
SUPER PHOTO
1 Touch the [EXPOSURE] key.
2 Touch the [TEXT] key.
The [AUTO
MANUAL] key appears when [TEXT]
is selected.
3 Touch the [AUTO
[AUTO] is highlighted.
4 Touch the [OK] key.
Selecting the original image type
• Four original image type selections are available.
MANUAL] key so that
Use for regular text, blueprints,
TEXT
and light pencil writing.
Use for mixed text/photo originals
TEXT/PHOTO
Touch the [OK] key.
4
and printed photos.
Use for photos and when you
PHOTO
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
desire clearer halftones.
SUPER
PHOTO
Use to copy photos at a high
resolution of 1200 dpi.
Check the paper size, select the
5
number of copies and any other
desired copy settings, and then press
the [START] key ( ).
• Automatic exposure adjustment can only be selected
when [TEXT] is selected for the original image type.
6
ACC.#-C
29
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM
There are three ways to enlarge and reduce copies:
G Automatic ratio selection according to the paper size ........................... AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION (below)
G Specifying a ratio with the reduce key, enlarge key, or zoom key..................MANUAL RATIO SELECTION (p.31)
G Separately selecting vertical and horizontal ratios ........................................................... XY ZOOM copying (p.32)
Ratios that can be selected vary depending on the following conditions:
Original type setting
Original position
Document glass
Selectable ratios
25 to 400%
Other than super photo mode
RSPF
50 to 200%
50 to 200%
50 to 141%
Document glass
RSPF
Super photo mode
AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION
The ratio is automatically selected based on the original size and paper size.
Place the original(s). (p.22, p.23)
• When automatic ratio selection is
selected, the [AUTO IMAGE] key is
highlighted in the main screen.
1
Note
The original size appears in the touch panel.
•
If the original and paper are in different
orientations, the image is automatically
rotated to match the paper orientation (for
paper sizes 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) or less).
• If the original size does not appear in the
touch panel, specify the original size
manually. (p.47)
Note
• Rotation of the image can be disabled in
the key operator programs. (See the "Key
operator’s guide".)
• If "IMAGE IS LARGER THAN THE COPY
PAPER." appears in the touch panel, part
of the image will be cut off in the copy.
• Automatic ratio selection is not possible if
the original or paper is a non-standard
size.
Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key and
then select the desired paper size.
The selected key is
2
Select the number of copies and any
other desired settings, and then press
the [START] key ( ).
4
highlighted and the paper
selection screen closes.
PLAIN
8½x11
8½x
RECYCLED
ACC.#-C
If paper of the desired size is not loaded in
any of the trays, load paper of the required
size in a paper tray or in the bypass tray.
(p.19)
Note
To cancel automatic ratio selection, touch
the [AUTO IMAGE] key.
Note
Touch the [AUTO IMAGE] key.
3
UTO
A suitable ratio is
PAPER
selected based on the
1
4
original size and selected
AUTO
1
paper size. (The ratio
appears in the touch
panel.)
IMAGE
COPY
30
COPY FUNCTIONS
MANUAL RATIO SELECTION
There are four preset reduction ratios and four preset enlargement ratios.
In addition, the [ZOOM] keys (
,
) can be pressed to select the ratio in increments of 1%.
Place the original(s). (p.22, p.23)
Use the enlargement key or reduction
1
2
4
key, or the [ZOOM] key (
the desired copy ratio.
/
) to set
Touch the [COPY RATIO] key.
100
%
1
ZOOM
PAPER SELECT
8½x11
5½x8½
11x17
8½x14
8½x14
8½x11
64%
77%
11x17
8½x11
8½x11
5½x8½
11x17
ZOOM
121%
12
100%
1
2
MENU
COPY RATIO
The [ZOOM] keys
) can be used to
change the ratio in
increments of 1%
2
(
/
77
ZOOM
%
Use the [MENU] key to select menu
3
1x17
½x11
8½x11
5½x8½
11x17
8½x14
8½x14
8½x11
[
] or menu [ ] for copy ratio
%
77
Touch the
key to
11x17
8½x11
8½x11
5½x8½
½x14
11x17
121%
129
selection.
increase the ratio or the
key to decrease the
ratio. Continuing to touch
XY ZOOM
MENU
1
2
Menu
READY TO COPY.
a [ZOOM] key (
makes the ratio change
faster.
/
)
0
OK
AUTO
100
ZOOM
%
EXPOSURE
AUTO
8½x11
100%
11x17
8½x11
8½x11
5½x8½
11x17
8½x14
8½x14
8½x11
64%
77%
PAPER SELECT
• Touch a reduction or enlargement key to
set the approximate ratio, then touch the
11x17
8½x11
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x14
11x17
121%
129%
Note
AUTO
IMAGE
COPY RATIO
XY ZOOM
MENU
1
2
[
[
] key to decrease the ratio or the
] key to increase the ratio.
• If "IMAGE IS LARGER THAN THE COPY
PAPER." appears, the selected copy ratio
is too large for the paper size. However, if
you press the [START] key ( ), a copy
will be made.
•
•
Preset reduction keys :
Preset enlargement keys : 121%, 129%
64%, 77%
• [100%] key
100%
Menu
Touch the [OK] key.
5
READY TO COPY.
0
OK
AUTO
EXPOSURE
100
ZOOM
%
OK
%
AUTO
8½x11
EX
100%
25%
50%
200%
400%
PAPER SELECT
AUTO
10
x17
x14
8½x14
8½x11
AUTO
IMAGE
77%
PAPE
COPY RATIO
11x17
8½x11
x11
x8½
1
2
XY ZOOM
MENU
129%
AUTO
IMAGE
COP
1
2
•
•
Preset reduction keys :
Preset enlargement keys : 200%, 400%
100%
25%, 50%
• [100%] key
31
COPY FUNCTIONS
Make sure that a suitable paper size is
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
6
7
automatically selected, or select
another size using the [PAPER
SELECT] key.
If AUTO PAPER
SELECT is enabled, the
EXPOSURE
appropriate copy paper
size is automatically
selected based on the
original size and selected
copy ratios.
AUTO 8½x11
ACC.#-C
PAPER SELECT
77%
To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch
Note
the [COPY RATIO] key to display the ratio
menu and then touch the [100%] key. (p.31,
step 3)
SELECTING THE VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL
COPY RATIOS SEPARATELY (XY ZOOM copying)
The XY ZOOM feature allows the horizontal and vertical copy ratios to be changed independently.
Example: Vertical ratio set to 100% and horizontal ratio set to 50%.
Original
Copy
• The AUTO IMAGE/MULTI SHOT/PAMPHLET COPY feature cannot be used in combination with the XY
ZOOM function.
Note
• To use the XY ZOOM feature with the DUAL PAGE COPY feature (p.43), set the DUAL PAGE COPY feature
first and then the XY ZOOM feature.
Place the original(s). (p.22, p.23)
Touch the [XY ZOOM] key.
1
2
3
11x1
8½x1
11x17
8½x11
8½x11
5½x8½
64%
Touch the [COPY RATIO] key.
8½x1
5½x8
8½x14
11x17
121%
1
PAPER SELECT
XY ZOOM
MENU
100%
COPY RATIO
32
COPY FUNCTIONS
Touch the [X] key.
Use the reduction, enlargement, and
4
5
7
[ZOOM] keys (
/
) to change the
The [X] key is selected
(highlighted) by default,
so there is normally no
need to perform this step
(Go to step 5.).
If the [X] key is not
highlighted, perform this
step.
copy ratio in the vertical (Y) direction.
1
X
Y
100
100
A fixed ratio key will not
become highlighted
when touched.
77%
64%
50%
X
Y
2
4
ZOOM
X
Y
50
70
Use the reduction, enlargement, and
[ZOOM] keys ( ) to change the
If you need to readjust
the horizontal ratio, touch
the [X] key again.
/
copy ratio in the horizontal (X)
direction.
ZOOM
A fixed ratio key will not
2
become highlighted
when touched.
CANCEL
ZOOM
64%
50%
Y
Touch the [OK] key.
8
Y ZOOM
OK
129%
E
The [ZOOM] keys
200%
(
/
) can be used to
100%
4%
Y
100
PAP
change the ratio in
increments of 1%
400%
ZOOM
0%
Touch the
key to
increase the ratio, or the
key to decrease the
ratio. Continuing to touch
CANCEL
XY ZOOM
Make sure that a suitable paper size is
automatically selected, or select
another size using the [PAPER
SELECT] key.
9
a [ZOOM] key (
/
)
makes the ratio change
faster.
If AUTO PAPER
EXPOSURE
SELECT is enabled, the
appropriate copy paper
size is automatically
Touch a reduction or enlargement key to set
the approximate ratio, then touch the [
Note
]
AUTO 8½x11
key to decrease the ratio or the [
increase the ratio.
] key to
PAPER SELECT
selected based on the
original size and selected
X-50% Y-70%
copy ratios.
Touch the [Y] key.
6
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
10
X
Y
50
100
OM
To cancel this function, touch the [CANCEL]
key in the XY ZOOM screen.
Note
33
INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN
A copy run can be temporarily interrupted to allow another copy job to be performed. When the other job is finished,
the copy run will resume using the original copy settings.
Automatic two-sided copying, sort/group copying, staple sort, pamphlet copy, job build, cover copy, job build, job
programs, or multi shot copying cannot be used for interrupt copying.
Note
Press the [INTERRUPT] key ( ) to
interrupt the copy run.
When the copy job is finished, press
the [INTERRUPT] key ( ) and remove
the original(s).
1
4
5
The [INTERRUPT] key
( ) blinks until the
machine is ready for the
interrupt job, after which
it lights steadily.
If you decide to cancel
the interrupt job while
selecting settings, press
the [INTERRUPT] key
( ).
Replace the previous original(s) and
press the [START] key ( ) to resume
copying.
• If audit mode is enabled, a message will
appear prompting you to enter your
Note
account number. Enter your account
number with the numeric keys. The copies
that you make will be added to your
account’s count.
Replace only the originals that have not yet been
scanned.
• If an original is being scanned when the
[INTERRUPT] key ( ) is pressed, the
interrupt job will begin after the original is
scanned. If a copy is being printed, the
interrupt job will begin after the copy is
printed.
Remove the previous original(s) and
place the original(s) of the interrupt
copy job. (p.22, p.23)
2
3
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
The interrupt copies will
be offset from the
previous copies. (Offset
function, p.35)
ACC.#-C
34
Chapter 3
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
3
This chapter explains special finishing functions and other convenient functions.
COPY FINISHING FUNCTIONS
This section explains the sort, group, and offset functions, as well as the staple sort function which is used to staple
output collated with the sort function when a finisher is installed.
SORT COPY
This function is used to collate sets of copies. The
copies are delivered to the center tray, and to other
trays when a job separator tray or finisher is installed.
GROUP COPY
This function is used to group sets of copies by page.
The copies are delivered to the center tray, and to
other trays when a job separator tray or finisher is
installed.
3
2
3
2
1
1
OFFSET FUNCTION
Each set of copies is offset from the previous set in the
output tray, making it easy to distinguish one set from
another. (The offset function can be used in the center
tray or in the offset tray of the finisher.)
Offset function "ON"
Offset function "OFF"
Enabling the offset function
The offset function operates when a checkmark
appears in the [OFFSET] checkbox, which is displayed
by touching the [OUTPUT] key. (If a checkmark
doesn't appear, touch the checkbox.)
35
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
Place the originals in the RSPF or on
the document glass. (p.22, p.23)
Touch the [OK] key.
1
5
6
If originals are placed in
the RSPF, the sort
function is automatically
selected. (To disable this
function, see the "Key
operator’s guide".)
OK
OFFSET
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
Example: 5 sets of copies or 5 copies per page of 3
originals
Originals
Touch the [OUTPUT] key.
2
ACC.#-C
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
[When using the RSPF:]
Copying will start after all the originals are
scanned.
7
[When using the document glass:]
Replace the original with the next original and
press the [START] key ( ). Repeat this step
until all originals have been scanned, and then
touch the [READ-END] key.
Touch the [SORT] or [GROUP] key.
3
UPPER
OUTPUT
TRAY
PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].
WHEN FINISHED, PRESS [READ-END].
SORT
CENTER
TRAY
READ-END
GROUP
Touch the output tray that you wish to
4
The copies are grouped as follows:
Sort Group
use.
The output tray can only
UPPER
TRAY
Copy
Copy
be selected when a job
separator or finisher is
installed.
CENTER
TRAY
5 sets of copies
5 copies per page
To enable the offset function (p.35), touch the
If the memory becomes full while scanning the
originals, "MEMORY IS FULL. PRESS [START] TO
BEGIN COPYING OR [CA] TO CANCEL." will appear.
To copy only the originals that have been scanned,
press the [START] key ( ) . To cancel the job, press
the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).
Note
[OFFSET] checkbox so that a checkmark
appears. To disable the offset function, touch
the [OFFSET] checkbox again to clear the
checkmark.
The number of originals that can be scanned
Note
into memory can be increased by increasing
the memory allocation in the key operator
programs, or by installing more memory.
(See the "Key operator’s guide".)
36
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
STAPLE SORT
(when the finisher (AR-FN5N) is installed)
This function collates the copies, staples each set, and delivers the sets to the offset tray. The staple sort function
can only be used when a finisher is installed.
Stapling position
Portrait orientation
Landscape orientation
Top left corner
Available paper sizes:
8-1/2" x 11" (A4 and B5)
Stapling capacity:
For each size, up to 30 sheets
can be stapled.
Available paper sizes: 11" x 17",
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2"
x 11" R, (A3, B4 and A4R)
Stapling capacity:
For each size, up to 30 sheets
can be stapled.
ORIENTATION OF THE ORIGINAL AND STAPLING
POSITIONS
If the orientation of the originals does not match that of the copy paper, the images will be rotated. The stapling
position varies with the orientation of the original.
3
Using the RSPF
Insert the originals face up.
Using the document glass
Place each original face down.
Stapling position
Stapling position
When copying 8-1/2" x 14" or 11" x 17" (B4 or A3) vertically oriented originals, the copies will be stapled at the
position shown below.
Stapling position
Stapling position
Document glass
RSPF
• When using letterhead paper in the staple sort, load the paper with the letterhead to
the front or to the right as shown in the diagram.
Note
S H A
• Different sized originals cannot be copied on the corresponding sizes of paper.
• The staple sort function cannot be used if disabled in the key operator programs. (See the "Key operator’s
guide".)
• The offset function (p.35) cannot be used.
37
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
Place the original(s). (p.22, p.23)
[When using the RSPF:]
Copying will start after all originals have been
scanned.
[When using the document glass:]
Replace the original with the next original and
press the [START] key ( ). Repeat this step
until all originals have been scanned, and then
touch the [READ-END] key.
1
6
Touch the [OUTPUT] key.
2
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].
WHEN FINISHED, PRESS [READ-END].
READ-END
Touch the [STAPLE SORT] key.
3
If the memory becomes full while scanning the
originals, "MEMORY IS FULL. PRESS [START] TO
BEGIN COPYING OR [CA] TO CANCEL." will appear.
To copy only the originals that have been scanned,
press the [START] key ( ). To cancel the job, press
the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).
When the [STAPLE
SORT] key is selected,
the offset tray is
automatically selected as
OUTPUT
TOP TRAY
SORT
STAPLE
SORT
the output tray. The top
OFFSET
tray and center tray
GROUP
TRAY
cannot be used.
The number of originals that can be scanned
Note
into memory can be increased by increasing
the memory allocation in the key operator
programs, or by installing more memory.
(See the "Key operator’s guide".)
Touch the [OK] key.
4
OK
CENTER TRAY
OFFSET
Select the number of copies and other
copy settings, and then press the
[START] key ( ).
5
38
SPECIAL MODES
When the [SPECIAL MODES] key in the main screen of copy mode is touched, the special modes screen will
appear. This screen contains the following special function keys.
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES]
key in the main screen
READY COPY.
0
ORIGINAL 8½x11
AUTO
PECIAL MODES
EXPOSURE
AUTO
8½x11
2-SIDED COPY
OUTPUT
8½x11
PAPER SELECT
8½x11
8½x14
100%
COPY RATIO
1
2
3
8
9
10
OK
OK
SPECIAL MODES
SPECIAL MODES
3
2/2
B/W
REVERSE
1/2
DUAL PAGE
COPY
ORIGINAL
SIZE
MARGIN SHIFT
ERASE
COVER
JOB
BUILD
PAMPHLET COPY
MULTI SHOT
4
5
6
7
11
1
2
6
[MARGIN SHIFT] key (p.41)
Use this to shift the image on the copy paper to
create binding margins.
[MULTI SHOT] key (p.46)
The multi shot copy function is used to copy two or
four originals onto one sheet of copy paper in any
of four layout patterns.
[ERASE] key (p.42)
7
8
(
) key, ( ) key
Use this to erase peripheral shadows that occur
when making copies of books and other thick
originals.
Use these to change pages in the special functions
screen.
3
4
[DUAL PAGE COPY] key (p.43)
Use this to make separate copies of the left and
right pages of bound documents.
[ORIGINAL SIZE] key (p.47)
Use to manually select the original size. When the
original size is selected, the auto ratio select
function will automatically select an appropriate
ratio based on the paper size.
[PAMPHLET COPY] key (p.44)
The pamphlet copy function is used to arrange
copies in the proper order for center-stapling and
folding into a booklet. Two original pages are
copied onto each side of the paper, such that a
total of four pages are copied onto one sheet.
9
[COVER] key (p.48)
Press this to use a different type of paper for front
and back covers (When the RSPF is used.).
10
11
[B/W REVERSE] key (p.50)
Use to reverse black and white areas.
5
[JOB BUILD] key (p.45)
Use this when you need to copy more originals
than can be placed in the RSPF at once. This
allows you to divide the originals into sets and
scan them sequentially in the RSPF.
[OK] key
Touch to return to the main screen of the copy
mode.
Some functions cannot be used in
Note
combination with each other. If a prohibited
combination of functions has been selected, a
message will appear in the touch panel.
39
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING THE SPECIAL
FUNCTIONS
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key.
1
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
Touch the key of the desired special
mode.
2
Example:
Selecting the margin shift
function
MARGIN SHIFT
PAMPHLET COPY
Procedures for modes that require further settings
are explained starting on the next page.
40
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
MARGIN SHIFT COPY
The margin shift function is used to automatically shift the text or image on the copy paper approximately 1/2" in its
initial setting.
• Right, left or down can be
selected for the shift direction
as shown in the illustration.
Image shifted
down
Image shifted
to the right
Image shifted
to the left
One-sided copying
Margin
• The shift width (margin) can
be set from 0" to 1" in
increments of 1/8".
Margin
Margin
• If [DOWN] key is selected,
set the original(s) so that the
margin to be increased is set
to the rear side of the RSPF
or the document glass.
Two-sided copying
Image shifted
to the right
Image shifted
to the left
Image shifted
down
Margin
3
Or
Margin
Margin
Touch the [MARGIN SHIFT] key in the
special modes screen.
Adjust the shift width as needed and
touch the [OK] key.
1
2
3
The margin shift setting
screen will appear.
The margin shift icon
Use the
and
keys
OK
to set the shift width. The
shift amount can be set
from 0" to 1" in
CANCEL
OK
MARGIN SHIFT
SIDE 1
SIDE 2
(
, etc.) will also
(0 1)
inch
(0
1/2
inch
1/2
appear in the screen to
indicate that the function
is turned on.
increments of 1/8".
PAMPHLET COPY
Select the shift direction.
Touch the [OK] key in the special
modes screen.
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
4
Touch the [RIGHT],
[LEFT], or [DOWN] key.
The selected key will be
highlighted.
RIGHT
LEFT
DOWN
About the steps that follow
If you are using the document glass, see page 22.
If you are using the RSPF, see page 23.
• When margin shift is selected, rotation
copying will not function.
Note
• This feature cannot be used with paper that
is not a standard size.
• To cancel the margin shift function, touch
the [CANCEL] key in the margin shift
setting screen. (See the screen of step 3.)
41
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
ERASE COPY
The erase function is used to erase the shadow lines on copies that are produced when copying thick originals or
books. The erase modes that can be selected are shown below. The erase width is initially set to 1/2".
EDGE ERASE
Eliminates shadow lines around the edges of copies
caused when heavy paper or a book is copied.
CENTER ERASE
Eliminates shadow lines produced by the bindings of
bound documents.
EDGE + CENTER ERASE
Eliminates both the shadow lines around the edges of
copies and the shadow at the center.
Touch the [ERASE] key in the special
modes screen.
Touch the [OK] key in the special
modes screen.
1
4
The erase setting screen
will appear.
The erase icon ( , etc.)
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
FT
ERASE
About the steps that follow
If the document glass is being used, see page 22.
If the RSPF is being used, see page 23.
will also appear in the
screen to indicate that
the function is turned on.
JOB
BUILD
PY
MU
• This feature cannot be used with
non-standard size originals.
Note
Select the desired erase mode.
• This feature cannot be selected when
mixed feeding (p.25) is used.
• To cancel the erase copy function, touch
the [CANCEL] key in the erase setting
screen. (See the screen of step 3.)
2
Select one of the three
ERASE
erase modes. The
selected key will be
highlighted.
EDGE
ERASE
CENTER
ERASE
EDGE+CENTER
ERASE
Adjust the erase width as needed and
touch the [OK] key.
3
Use the
and
keys
CANCEL
EDGE
OK
to adjust the erase width.
The erase width can be
set from 0" to 1" in
(0 1)
inch
1/2
increments of 1/8".
42
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
DUAL PAGE COPY
The dual page copy function produces separate copies of two adjoining pages on the document glass. It is
especially useful when copying books and other bound documents.
[Example] Copying the right and left pages of a book
• A reduction setting can be selected when using
the dual page copy function, however, an
enlargement setting cannot be selected.
Book original
Dual page copy
• The dual page copy function can only be used
when copying from the document glass. The
RSPF cannot be used.
• Only 8-1/2" x 11" paper can be used.
When copying book originals:
When copying a thick book, press down gently on the
book to flatten it against the document glass.
Touch the [DUAL PAGE COPY] key in
the special modes screen.
1
2
3
The [DUAL PAGE
COPY] key is highlighted
to indicate that the
function is enabled, and
the dual page copy icon
3
1/2
DUAL PAGE
COPY
MULTI SHOT
(
) will appear in the
screen.
Make sure that 8-1/2" x 11" size paper
4
is selected.
Touch the [OK] key in the special
modes screen.
If 8-1/2" x 11" size paper
is not selected, touch the
[PAPER SELECT] key to
select 8-1/2" x 11" paper.
AUTO 8½x11
PAPER SELECT
You will return to the
main screen of copy
mode.
0
OK
100%
/2
DUAL PAGE
COPY
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
5
Place the originals on the document
glass. (p.22)
ACC.#-C
Index
81/2x11
This page
is copied
first.
Center line of
original
• To cancel the dual page copy function,
touch the [DUAL PAGE COPY] key in the
Note
special modes screen. (The key will no
longer be highlighted.) (See the screen of
step 1.)
• To erase shadows caused by the document
binding, use the edge erase function (p.42).
(Center Erase and Edge + Center Erase
cannot be used with the dual page copy
function.)
43
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
PAMPHLET COPY
The pamphlet copy function is used to arrange copies in the proper order for center-stapling and folding into a
booklet. Two original pages are copied onto each side of the copy paper, such that a total of four pages are copied
onto each sheet.
This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.
[Example]: Copying 8 originals with pamphlet copy
• Scan the originals in order from the first page to the
last page. The order of copying will be automatically
adjusted by the machine.
Originals (one-sided)
The finished copies
can be folded.
1
2
• Either left binding (opening from right to left) or right
binding (opening from left to right) can be selected.
3
4
5
6
7
• Four originals will be copied onto one sheet. Blank
pages may be automatically added at the end,
depending on the number of the originals.
First page
8
Originals (two-sided)
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
First page
Touch the [PAMPHLET COPY] key in
the special modes menu screen.
The pamphlet copy
Touch the [OK] key in the special
modes screen.
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
1
4
MARGIN SHIFT
setting screen will
Place the original(s). (p.22, p.23)
appear. The pamphlet
copy icon ( , etc.) will
also appear in the upper
left corner of the screen
to indicate that the
5
PAMPHLET COPY
Make sure that a suitable paper size
has been automatically selected.
6
If the desired copy paper
function is enabled.
size is not selected, use
the [PAPER SELECT] key
to select the paper size.
AUTO 11x17
PAPER SELECT
Specify whether 1-sided or 2-sided
originals will be copied.
2
After the paper size is
CANCEL
OK
selected, touch the [AUTO
IMAGE] key. A suitable
ratio will be automatically
selected.
PAMPHLET COPY
100%
ORIGINAL
1-SIDED 2-SIDED
LEFT
BINDING
RIGHT
BINDING
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
7
Select the binding position ([LEFT
BINDING] or [RIGHT BINDING]) and
then touch the [OK] key in the
pamphlet copy setting screen.
You will return to the
3
[When using the RSPF:]
Copying will start after all originals have been
scanned.
8
[When using the document glass:]
9
CANCEL
OK
special modes menu
screen.
Replace the original with the next original and
press the [START] key ( ). Repeat this step
until all originals have been scanned, and then
touch the [READ-END] key.
LEFT
BINDING
RI
BINDING
D
When the pamphlet copy function is selected,
two-sided copying will be automatically enabled.
To cancel the pamphlet copy function, touch
the [CANCEL] key in the pamphlet copy
Note
setting screen. (See the screen of step 2.)
44
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
JOB BUILD MODE
Use this function when you need to copy more originals than can be placed in the RSPF at once. (The maximum
number of originals that can be placed in the RSPF at once is 100.)
• If the memory becomes full while scanning the originals, "MEMORY IS FULL. PRESS [START] TO BEGIN
Note
COPYING OR [CA] TO CANCEL." will appear. To copy only the originals that have been scanned, press the
[START] key ( ) . To cancel the job, press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).
Depending on the content of the originals, the memory may become full before 100 originals have been scanned. In
this case, press the [START] key ( ) to copy the originals that have been scanned, and then place the originals
that weren’t scanned in the RSPF once again and repeat the copy procedure.
•
• To increase the number of originals that can be scanned, install more memory or increase the memory
allocation in the key operator programs. (See the "Key operator’s guide".)
Example: Copying 130 sheets (8-1/2" x 11" size originals)
Originals
page 1
page 101
100 sheets
30 sheets
3
* Divide the originals into sets so that each set is no more than
100 pages. Scan the sets in order beginning from the first
page of set A.
Touch the [JOB BUILD] key in the
special modes menu screen.
Make sure that a suitable paper size is
selected, select the number of copies
and any other desired copy settings,
and then press the [START] key ( ) .
1
4
The [JOB BUILD] key is
highlighted.
D
T
ERASE
The job build copy icon
Scanning begins. When
scanning of the first set
of originals (A in the
above example) is
(
) will also appear in
JOB
BUILD
Y
MUL
the screen to indicate
that the function is
enabled.
finished, insert the
ACC.#-C
second set and press the
[START] key ( ).
Touch the [OK] key in the special
modes screen.
2
3
Repeat this step until all the remaining originals (B in
the above example) have been scanned.
Remove each scanned set of originals before inserting
the next set.
You will return to the
OK
main screen of copy
mode.
DUAL PAGE
COPY
ERASE
JOB
BUILD
MULTI SHOT
Touch the [READ-END] key.
5
Copying begins.
PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].
WHEN FINISHED, PRESS [READ-END].
Place the original(s) in the RSPF.
(p.23)
READ-END
To cancel the job build mode function, touch
Note
the [JOB BUILD] key in the special modes
screen so that it is no longer highlighted.
(See the screen of step 1.)
45
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
MULTI SHOT COPY
The multi shot copy function is used to copy two or four originals onto one sheet of copy paper in a specified order.
Example: Copying four originals onto one sheet of paper
(Page number: 4 in 1 ( ), layout: ( ))
• When using the multi shot copy function, place the
originals, select the desired paper size, and select
the copy mode before selecting the multi shot copy
function in the special modes screen.
One-sided copy of
one-sided original
•
When using the multi shot copy function, the
Copy
appropriate copy ratio will be automatically set based
on the original size, paper size, and the number of
originals to be copied onto one sheet. The minimum
reduction ratio is 25%. (The minimum ratio is 50% when
SUPER PHOTO is selected for the original image type
in the copy exposure settings or when the RSPF is
used.) Depending on the original size, paper size, and
the number of originals to be copied onto one sheet,
portions of original images may be cut off.
One-sided copy of
two-sided original
Touch the [MULTI SHOT] key in the
SPECIAL MODES menu screen.
The multi shot copy
Select a borderline setting.
1
2
4
Select [
].
], [
], or
OK
CANCEL
1/2
DUAL PAGE
COPY
[
setting screen will
LAYOUT
BORDER
appear. The multi shot
copy icon ( , etc.) will
also appear in the screen
to indicate that the
MULTI SHOT
function is enabled.
Touch the [OK] key in the multi shot
setting screen.
You will return to the special modes menu screen.
5
6
7
Select the number of originals to be
copied onto one sheet in the multi
shot copy selection screen.
Touch the [OK] key in the special
modes menu screen.
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
OK
SPECIAL MODES
OK
CANCEL
MULTI SHOT
LAYOUT
BORDER
2in1
4in1
Select the number of copies and any
other desired copy settings, and then
press the [START] key ( ).
Select the layout.
[When using the RSPF:]
Copying will start after all originals have been
scanned.
3
8
9
Select the order in which
the originals will appear
on the copy.
OK
CANCEL
[When using the document glass:]
LAYOUT
BORDER
Replace the original with the next original and
press the [START] key ( ). Repeat this step
until all originals have been scanned, and then
touch the [READ-END] key if necessary.
• The images may be rotated depending on
the number of originals and the orientation
of the originals and copy paper.
Note
• To cancel the multi shot copy function,
touch the [CANCEL] key in the multi shot
setting screen (the screen of step 2) .
46
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
ORIGINAL SIZE
If you wish to use the paper other than the automatically selected original size, original size setting is specified by
the special modes. The mix feeding setting (p.25) is also selected here.
Touch the
[ORIGINAL SIZE] key in the special
modes menu screen.
key and then touch the
Touch the [OK] key in the special
modes menu screen.
You will return to the main screen of the copy
mode.
1
5
The original size setting
screen will appear.
AL MODES
To select mixed feeding, select the "MIX SIZE
ORIGINAL FEEDING MODE" checkbox.
Note
ORIGINAL
SIZE
COV
Mixed feeding is explained on page 25.
Touch the [MANUAL] key.
2
GINAL SIZE
AUTO
MANUAL
3
MIX SIZE ORIGINAL FEEDING MOD
Select the original size.
3
ORIGINAL SIZE
OK
OK
AUTO
MANUAL
8½x11R
5½x8½
8½x11
8½x13
8½x14
11x17
AB
INCH
[MANUAL] key is highlighted and the selected paper
size is displayed.
To select an AB size original, touch the
Note
[AB
INCH] key. AB sizes will appear.
Touch the inside [OK] key.
4
You will return to the special modes menu
screen.
47
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
COVER COPY
Cover copy mode is used to add a cover to the front or back, or both the front and back, of a multipage document.
To use cover copy mode, the RSPF must be used.
Copying onto a cover
Not copying onto a cover
One-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided originals
One-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided originals
One-sided originals
One-sided copies
(copying onto a cover)
One-sided originals
One-sided copies
(not copying onto a cover)
4
3
4
2
1
3
4
4
3
2
1
3
2
Back cover
2
Back cover
(no copying)
1
1
SHARP
SHARP
Cover original
Front cover
(can copy onto front side)
Two-sided originals
Front cover
(not copying onto a cover)
3
1
Two-sided originals
5
4
2
4
3
2
Back cover
(no copying)
1
SHARP
SHARP
Two-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided originals
Cover original
Front cover
(can copy onto front side)
One-sided originals
One-sided copies
(not copying onto a cover)
4
Two-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided originals
3
2
1
One-sided originals
Two-sided copies
(copying onto a cover)
4
3
Back cover
3
2
1
1
Back cover
(no copying)
Two-sided originals
SHARP
3
1
3
1
Cover original
Front cover
Two-sided originals
SHARP
3
1
Front cover
• A front cover, back cover, or both a front and a
back cover can be selected.
(can copy onto front side)
(Back side of cover is blank.)
SHARP
Cover original
• A front cover, back cover, or both a front and a
back cover can be selected.
• You can specify whether or not the front cover is
copied on.
• Copying is not possible on either side of a back
cover.
48
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
Touch the
[COVER] key in the special modes
menu screen.
key and then touch the
Load the cover paper to be used into
the bypass tray.
1
2
6
Load the same size of
paper as the paper to
be used for the copy
job.
The cover setting screen
will appear.
The cover icon ( , etc.)
will also appear in the
screen to indicate that
the function is turned on.
L
COVER
About the steps that follow
See page 23.
Select the cover(s) that you wish to
add.
OK
SPECIAL MODES
COVER
FRONT
• It is not possible to copy on the inside of a
front cover, nor on either side of a back
cover.
• Be sure to place the originals in the RSPF.
The document glass cannot be used for this
function.
Note
CANCEL
OK
BACK
FRONT+BACK
PRINT ON FRONT COVER?
NO
YES
• During cover copying, stream feeding mode
will not function even if enabled in the key
operator programs. (See the "Key
operator’s guide".)
• To cancel the cover copy function, select
the cover copy function again and touch the
[CANCEL] key. (See the screen of step 2.)
3
To add only a front cover, touch the [FRONT] key. To
add only a back cover, touch the [BACK] key. To add
both a front and back cover, touch the
[FRONT+BACK] key.
Specify whether or not the front cover
3
is to be copied on.
CANCEL
OK
Select [YES] or [NO] in
the touch panel. If
[YES] is selected, the
first page of the
CK
PRINT ON FRONT COVER?
NO
YES
document will be
copied onto the front
cover sheet.
Touch the [OK] key in the cover
setting screen.
Return to the special modes screen.
4
Touch the [OK] key in the special
modes screen.
5
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
49
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
B/W REVERSE COPY
The B/W REVERSE feature is used to reverse black and white in a copy to create a negative image.
original
B/W reverse copy
When the B/W reverse function is selected, the
exposure mode will be automatically set to TEXT
mode. Other exposure modes cannot be selected. If
B/W reverse is canceled, TEXT mode will not
automatically be canceled.
Touch the
[B/W REVERSE] key in the special
modes menu screen.
key and then touch the
1
The [B/W REVERSE]
key is highlighted.
The B/W reverse icon
B/W
REVERSE
OVER
(
) will also appear in
the screen to indicate
that the function is
enabled.
Touch the [OK] key in the special
modes screen.
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.
2
About the steps that follow
If the document glass is being used, see page 22.
If the RSPF is being used, see page 23.
To cancel the B/W reverse copy function,
Note
touch the [B/W REVERSE] key in the special
modes screen. (The key will no longer be
highlighted.) (See the screen of step 1.)
50
Chapter 4
USER SETTINGS
4
CUSTOM SETTINGS
The custom settings let you adjust certain features of the machine to better suit your needs. The custom settings
include the following settings:
GTOTAL COUNT...........................This displays the number of pages output by the machine. (p.53)
GDISPLAY CONTRAST ................This is used to adjust the contrast of the touch panel. (p.53)
GLIST PRINT*1..............................This is used to print a setting list or a font list. (p.53)
GCLOCK........................................This is used to set the date and time of the machine’s built-in clock. (p.53)
GTRAY SETTINGS........................This is used to configure the paper type and paper size settings for each
tray, and select whether or not automatic switch over to another tray with the
same size and type of paper will take place if the paper runs out during
continuous printing. (p.53)
The following settings are explained in detail in the operation manual for facsimile.
GADDRESS CONTROL*2 .............If your machine has the fax option, this setting is used to store fax numbers
for automatic dialing. Group keys and user indexes can also be
programmed.
GRECEIVE MODE*2......................This is used to select the fax receive mode (automatic or manual).
GFAX DATA FORWARD*2 ............This is used to forward faxes received in memory to another destination.
GKEYBOARD SELECT*3 ...............When using the fax or network scanner function, use this setting to change the
layout of the keyboard in the letter entry screen. (p.53)
GKEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS..Settings for key operators (administrators of this machine). A key appears for
these settings in the custom settings menu screen. For explanations of the
settings, see the Key operator’s guide. (For explanations of key operator
programs for the fax option, see the operation manual for facsimile.)
*1 The fax option or network printer function must be installed.
*2 The fax option must be installed.
*3 The fax option or network scanner function must be installed.
51
USER SETTINGS
GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR CUSTOM SETTINGS
Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.
Touch the [OK] key in the setting
screen to close it.
1
3
LINE
DATA
When you are ready to exit the custom
settings, touch the [EXIT] key.
4
CUSTOM SETTINGS
B STATUS
CUSTOM SETTINGS
EXIT
DISPLAY
CONTRAST
TOTAL COUNT
LIST PRINT
CLOCK
ADDRESS
CONTROL
FAX DATA
FORWARD
TRAY SETTINGS
RECEIVE MODE
KEYBOARD
SELECT
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
Touch the key of the desired setting.
The setting screen will appear.
2
Each of the custom settings is explained on the
following pages.
The [TRAY SETTINGS] key is selected in the
following example.
CUSTOM SETTINGS
EXIT
DISPLAY
CONTRAST
TOTAL COUNT
LIST PRINT
CLOCK
FAX DATA
FORWARD
ADDRESS
CONTROL
TRAY SETTINGS
RECEIVE MODE
KEY
SE
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
When the [TRAY SETTINGS] key is selected, the
following screen appears.
CUSTOM SETTINGS
OK
TRAY SETTINGS
TYPE / SIZE
COPY
PRINT
FAX
1/3
TRAY 1
TRAY 2
TRAY 3
PLAIN / 8½x11
PLAIN / 8½x14
PLAIN / 11x17
• When a checkbox appears next to an item
Note
in a screen, touch the checkbox (
select the item. A checkmark (
appear to indicate that the item is
selected.
) to
) will
In the above settings, tray 1 can be used
for printer, copy, and fax mode. Tray 2
and tray 3 can only be used for copy
mode.
• For a detailed explanation of the trays,
see "CHANGING A TRAY’S PAPER
TYPE AND PAPER SIZE SETTINGS"
(p.19).
52
USER SETTINGS
SETTINGS
Total count
Keyboard select
The total page count display shows the following
counts:
• Total number of copies and printed pages
• Number of pages fed through the RSPF
• Number of two-sided copies
When using the fax or network scanner function, you
can change the layout of the keyboard that appears in
the letter entry screen. Select the layout that you find
easiest to use.
• Number of times the stapler was used
• Number of pages sent using the network scanner
function
• Number of sent and received fax pages
The counts that appear will vary depending on the
peripheral equipment installed.
The following three keyboard configurations are
available:
• Keyboard 1 (QWERTY configuration)*
• Keyboard 2 (AZERTY configuration)
• Keyboard 3 (ABCDEF configuration)
*The default setting is "Keyboard 1".
• Each sheet of paper that is 11" x 17" (A3) size is
counted as two sheets.
• Each sheet of paper used for automatic two-sided
copying is counted as two sheets (11" x 17" (A3)
paper is counted as four sheets.).
(Example: Letter entry screen when Keyboard 3 is
selected.)
ADDRESS NAME
CANCEL
OK
a
k
t
b
l
u
c
m
v
d
n
w
e
o
x
f
p
y
g
q
z
h
r
i
s
j
@
Display contrast
ABC
abc
Screen contrast adjustment is used to make the touch
panel easier to view under various lighting conditions.
Touch the [LIGHTER] key to make the screen lighter,
or the [DARKER] key to make the screen darker.
AB/ab
12#$
ÀÄÂ/àäâ
SPACE
4
List print
Use this to print the PRINTER TEST PAGE, the FAX
REPORT, or the SENDING ADDRESS LIST.
Clock
Use this to set the date and time of the machine’s
built-in clock. The date and time are used for functions
that require date and time information.
Tray settings
The paper type, paper size, and enabled modes can
be set for each tray. Auto tray switching and disabling
of two-sided printing on letterhead paper can also be
set. See page 19 and 20 for details on setting the
paper type and paper size.
• To select which trays can be used in each of copy,
printer, and fax modes, select the checkboxes (
of the desired trays in each mode.
)
• When a tray runs out of paper in the middle of a job,
the auto tray switching function automatically
switches the paper source to another tray that has
the same paper size and paper type settings. (The
auto tray switching function cannot be set for the
bypass tray.)
53
JOB PROGRAM MEMORY
If you frequently use the same settings for copy jobs, you can store in the settings in a job program. Up to 10 job
programs can be stored, and the programs are retained even when the power is turned off. By storing frequently
used copy settings in a program, you can eliminate the bother of selecting the settings each time you use them for a
copy job.
G After a job program is stored, if any settings of the key operator programs related to the stored job program are
prohibited, the related settings in the job program will not be recalled.
G If the overwriting of job programs is prohibited in the key operator programs, it will not be possible to overwrite or
delete a job program.
G To exit job program memory mode, press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) on the operation panel or touch the [EXIT]
key on the touch panel.
STORING A JOB PROGRAM
Press the [
] key.
Select the copy settings that you wish
to store in the program.
1
2
4
The number of copies
TO STORE, MAKE SELECTIONS AND PRESS
[OK], TO DELETE, PRESS [CANCEL].
cannot be stored.
SPECIAL MODES
2-SIDED COPY
S
8½x11
8½x14
ACC.#-C
OUTPUT
Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.
Touch the [OK] key.
5
The selected settings will
be stored under the
program number
D PRESS
EL].
CANCEL
OK
NUMBER.
AU
EXPOS
selected in step 3.
AUTO
8½x11
8½x11
PAPER SELECT
8½x11
8½x14
100%
ECALL
STORE/DELETE
COPY RATIO
Touch a program number from 1 to 10
in the storage register screen.
3
ROGRAMS
SS PROGRAM NUMBER.
RECALL
STORE
If a numeric key is selected that has already
been programmed, a confirmation screen
will appear. To replace the existing program
with the new program, touch the [STORE]
key and continue from step 4. If you do not
wish to replace the existing program, touch
the [CANCEL] key to return to the above
screen and select a different numeric key.
Note
54
USER SETTINGS
EXECUTING A JOB PROGRAM
Press the [
] key.
Place the original, check the original
size, and then set the number of
copies and any other desired copy
settings not stored in the program.
When finished, press the [START] key
( ).
1
3
S
ACC.#-C
ACC.#-C
Touch the program number key of the
desired program.
2
The job program will be
JOB PROGRAMS
executed. A number for
which no job program
has been stored cannot
be selected.
PRESS PROGRAM NUMBER.
RECALL
4
DELETING A STORED JOB PROGRAM
Press the [
] key.
Select the program number of the
program to be deleted.
1
3
If a number key for which
EXIT
no job program has been
stored is selected, the
proceed to step 4 on the
previous page (for
S
ACC.#-C
STORE/DELETE
storing a job program).
Touch the [DELETE] key.
4
Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.
2
The selected program will
be deleted and you will
A JOB PROGRAM HAS BEEN ALREADY STORED.
STORE ANOTHER PROGRAM?
return to the screen of step
3. If the [CANCEL] key is
touched, you will return to
the screen of step 3
without deleting the
program.
NUMBER.
CANCEL
REC LL
DELETE
STORE
STORE/DELET
ECALL
STORE/DELETE
If you are finished deleting programs, touch the [EXIT]
key in the screen of step 3 to exit.
55
AUDITING MODE
When auditing mode is enabled, a count is kept of the number of pages printed or copied by each account
(maximum of 100 accounts). The counts can be viewed whenever necessary.
• Auditing mode can be enabled for all modes (copy mode, fax mode, network scanner mode, and printer mode)
Note
in the key operator programs. (See the "Key operator’s guide".)
• To print in printer mode when auditing mode is enabled, enter your account number in the printer driver setup
screen on your computer.
COPYING WHEN AUDITING MODE IS ENABLED
When auditing mode is enabled, the following account number entry screen appears.
ENTER YOUR ACCOUNT NUMBER.
-----
Enter your account number (5 digits)
with the numeric keys.
When the copy job is finished, press
the [ACC.#-C] key ( ).
1
2
Each digit is indicated by
an asterisk " ".
The screen reverts to the
ON LINE
DATA
account number entry
screen.
DATA
LINE
DATA
CUSTOM SETTINGS
S
AC-C
S
ACC.#-C
• To perform an interrupt job when auditing
mode is enabled, press the [INTERRUPT]
key ( ) . The account number entry
screen will appear. Enter your account
number. When the interrupt job is
finished, be sure to press the
[INTERRUPT] key ( ) or the [CLEAR
ALL] key ( ) to end interrupt mode.
• If an invalid account number is entered in
step 1, the account number entry screen
reappears.
• When ACCOUNT NUMBER SECURITY in
the key operator programs is enabled (See
the "Key operator’s guide".) , the following
message will appear and operation will not
be permitted for 1 minute if an invalid
account number is entered 3 times in a
row.
READY TO COPY.
0
Note
ORIGINAL
8½x11
AUTO
SPECIAL M
EXPOSURE
ACCOUNT STATUS: COPIES MADE 000,000
COPIES REMAINING 999,999
UTO
8½x11
2-SIDED
APER SELECT
100%
OUTPU
COPY RATIO
• When a valid account number is entered, the
number of copies already made by that account
appears for several seconds on the initial screen.
• If a limit has been set in the key operator programs
for the number of copies that can be made by the
account, the remaining number that can be made is
displayed in the message display together with the
number of copies already made. (See the "Key
operator’s guide".)
PLEASE SEE YOUR KEY OPERATOR FOR
ASSISTANCE.
56
Chapter 5
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
5
This chapter describes troubleshooting and maintenance such as misfeed removal, replacing the toner cartridge and
cleaning the machine.
DISPLAY MESSAGES.................................................................................................................... 58
TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................................................................................... 60
Trouble
Page
Problems related to machine operation
The machine does not operate.
The power is on but copying is not possible.
Two-sided copying is not possible.
60
Wrong paper size is displayed for paper in the bypass tray.
A copy job stops before it is finished.
The contrast of the touch panel is too high or too low.
Image cannot be rotated.
Original size is not selected automatically, or copying does not take place on paper that matches the original size.
Paper size for a paper tray cannot be set.
Order of copies is incorrect.
The job is canceled after the originals were being scanned.
Not all pages are copied.
61
62
The RSPF cannot be used.
Lighting fixture flickers.
Paper feeding problems
When using paper fed from the bypass tray, the copied image is skewed.
Paper from the bypass tray misfeeds.
Paper misfeeds.
Image quality problems
Copies are too dark or too light.
Text is not clear in a copy.
Part of the copied image is cut off.
63
Blank copies.
Paper is wrinkled or the copied image comes off when the paper surface is rubbed.
Copies are smudged or dirty.
White or black lines appear copies.
MISFEED REMOVAL...................................................................................................................... 64
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE ....................................................................................... 72
STAPLE CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT........................................................................................ 73
STAPLE JAM REMOVAL ............................................................................................................................................. 74
CHECKING THE TONER QUANTITY AND TOTAL OUTPUT COUNT......................................... 74
CLEANING THE MACHINE............................................................................................................ 75
DOCUMENT GLASS AND RSPF................................................................................................................................. 75
THE BYPASS TRAY PAPER FEED ROLLER ............................................................................................................. 75
57
DISPLAY MESSAGES
If one of the following messages appears in the display, take prompt action as instructed by the message.
Message
Cause and solution
Page
56
ENTER YOUR ACCOUNT
NUMBER.
Auditing mode is enabled. Enter your account number.
A MISFEED HAS OCCURRED.
Remove the misfeed as explained in "MISFEED REMOVAL".
64
2-SIDED COPIES CANNOT BE
MADE ON THIS PAPER TYPE.
This appears when you attempt to make two-sided copies on special
paper that cannot be used for two-sided copying. Cancel two-sided
copying or change the paper.
15, 27
REMOVE PAPER FROM THE
<*>TRAY.
The indicated output tray is full. Remove the output from the tray.
(<*> indicates the tray that is full.)
-
-
CLOSE THE <**> COVER.
The indicated cover is open. Close the cover. (<**> indicates the
cover that is open.)
PLEASE EXTEND BYPASS-TRAY.
When copying from the bypass tray, be sure to pull out the bypass
tray extension.
18
COVER SHEETS MUST BE THE
SAME SIZE AS THE COPY
PAPER USED.
When adding a cover, load paper in the bypass tray that is the
same size as the paper in the tray selected for copying.
48
TONER SUPPLY IS LOW.
The toner cartridge must be replaced soon.
72
72
72
CHANGE THE TONER CARTRIDGE.
The toner cartridge is out of toner. Replace the toner cartridge.
CHECK THE TONER CARTRIDGE. Make sure that the toner cartridge is installed correctly.
THE DOCUMENT FEEDER IS
DISABLED.
The RSPF has been disabled in the key operator programs. Use
the document glass.
22
SELECTED PAPER TRAY IS
PROHIBITED. PLEASE SELECT
ANOTHER PAPER TRAY.
This appears when a tray is selected that has been prohibited in
"TRAY SETTINGS" in the custom settings.
53
PLEASE CHECK THE PAPER
SIZE OF TRAY <***>.
The tray's paper size setting is different from the actual paper size.
Load the correct size of paper. The tray is indicated in <***>.
15
73
70
ADD STAPLES.
The finisher is out of staples. Replace the staple cartridge as
explained in "STAPLE CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT".
PLEASE REMOVE PAPER FROM Paper remains in the stapler compiler. Remove the paper.
THE STAPLER COMPILER.
MEMORY IS FULL. PRESS [START] The memory becomes full while scanning originals. Press the
TO BEGIN COPYING OR [CA] TO
CANCEL.
[START] key ( ) to copy only the originals that have been
scanned, or press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) to cancel the job.
-
58
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
Message
Cause and solution
Contact your SHARP service center.
Page
SELECTED PAPER TRAY IS OUT
OF SERVICE.
-
CHECK STAPLER POSITION OR Staples are jammed in the finisher or the staple case is not
STAPLE JAM.
attached correctly. Check the staple case. If the message still
appears after removing the jammed staples, disable the stapler
using "DISABLING OF STAPLER" in the key operator programs
(See the "Key operator’s guide.), and contact your SHARP service
center.
74
(CALL FOR SERVICE SOON.)
(MAINTENANCE REQUIRED.)
It will soon be time for regular maintenance. Contact your SHARP
service center.
-
-
It is time for regular maintenance. Contact your SHARP service
center.
CALL FOR SERVICE.
CODE:
Turn off the power and then turn it back on. If this does not clear
the message, write down the 2-digit main code and 2-digit
sub-code and promptly contact your SHARP service center.
-
-
PLEASE CHECK THE ORIGINAL
SIZE. JOB IS CANCELED.
The original in the RSPF is longer than the size that was detected.
Reinsert the original, make sure that the size indicated in the touch
panel is the same as the actual size, and begin copying. You can
also select mixed feeding to copy onto paper that matches each
original size after all originals have been scanned.
5
59
TROUBLESHOOTING
If you experience difficulty using the machine, check the following troubleshooting guide before calling for service.
Many problems can be easily resolved by the user. If you are unable to solve the problem using the troubleshooting
guide, turn off the power switch, unplug the machine, and contact your SHARP service center. The following
problems are related to the general operation of the machine and copying.
For problems related the to printer, fax, and network scanner functions, see the corresponding operation manuals.
Problems related to machine operation
Problem
Cause and solution
Page
Power switch OFF.
→ Turn the power switch ON.
13
The machine is warming up.
→ The machine requires about 23 seconds to warm up after the
power switch is turned on. While the machine is warming up,
copy settings can be selected but copying is not possible. Wait
until "READY TO COPY." appears.
13
The machine does not operate.
Out of paper.
→ Load paper.
17
72
64
Out of toner.
→ Replace the toner cartridge.
Misfeed occurs.
→ Remove the misfed paper.
The machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
→ If only the [START] key ( ) blinks, auto power shut-off mode
has activated. Press the [START] key ( ) to return the machine
to normal operation.
14
10
27
The power is on but copying is not
possible.
Copy mode is not selected.
→ Press the [COPY] key to select copy mode.
Automatic two-sided copying was attempted on paper
that is not suitable for automatic two-sided copying.
→ Two-sided copying is not possible on special paper. Use paper
that is suitable for automatic two-sided copying.
Two-sided copying is not possible.
Two-sided copying is prohibited in the key operator
programs.
→ Change the setting in the key operator programs to permit
two-sided copying.
Key
operator’s
guide
The bypass tray extension is not pulled out.
→ To detect the paper size correctly, the bypass tray extension
must be pulled out when the paper is loaded.
Wrong paper size is displayed for
paper in the bypass tray.
18
-
Too many pages have accumulated in the output tray,
causing the tray full sensor to activate. Further
copying is not possible until the pages are removed.
→ Remove the pages from the output tray.
A copy job stops before it is
finished.
The display contrast has not been adjusted.
→ Adjust the contrast using "DISPLAY CONTRAST" in the custom
settings.
The contrast of the touch panel is
too high or too low.
53
Neither auto paper selection nor auto image mode are
selected.
→ Rotation copy functions only if auto paper select mode or auto
image mode is selected.
25, 30
Image cannot be rotated.
Rotation copy is prohibited in the key operator
programs.
Key
operator’s
guide
→ Change the setting in the key operator programs to permit
rotation copying.
60
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
Problem
Cause and solution
Page
The RSPF was not opened completely when the
original was placed on the document glass.
→ Open the RSPF completely, place the original on the document
glass, and close the RSPF.
-
The original contains large black solid areas.
→ If the original contains any large black solid areas, the original
size may not be detected automatically. Use the [SPECIAL
MODES] key to select the original size.
47
22
Original size is not selected
automatically, or copying does not
take place on paper that matches
the original size.
The original is smaller than 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" size.
→ When the original is smaller than 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" size, the size
cannot be detected. Use the [PAPER SELECT] key to select the
desired paper size.
The original is not a standard size.
→ When the original is not a standard size, the size cannot be
detected. Manually select the closest standard original size, or
use the [PAPER SELECT] key to select the desired paper size.
22, 47
-
A copy, print job, or received fax is being printed.
→ Set the correct paper size after printing is finished.
Operation has temporarily stopped because the tray is
out of paper or a misfeed occurred.
→ Load paper or remove the misfeed, finish the copy job, and then
set the paper size.
19, 64
Paper size for a paper tray cannot
be set.
During an interrupt copy job.
→ Set the correct paper size after the interrupt copy job is finished.
34
64
Misfeed occurs.
→ Remove the misfed paper.
Paper tray settings are prohibited in the key operator
programs.
Key
operator’s
guide
→ Change the setting in the key operator programs to permit paper
5
tray settings.
The originals were placed in the wrong order.
→ When using the document glass, scan the originals one sheet at
a time beginning from the first page. When using the RSPF, insert
the originals with the first page on top and facing up.
Order of copies is incorrect.
23
The memory become full while the originals were
being scanned.
→ When using a function such as pamphlet copy or multi shot copy
where all original pages are scanned into memory before copying
begins, scanning will stop and copying will not take place if the
memory becomes full. The number of pages that can be scanned
into memory can be increased by installing more memory.
The job is canceled after the
originals were being scanned.
76
The memory become full while the originals were
being scanned.
→ When the memory becomes full while the originals are being
scanned, you can select whether you want to continue the job
and print only those originals that were scanned, or cancel the
job. If you continue the job, copies will only be made of the
originals that were scanned, and thus all originals cannot be
copied at once.
Not all pages are copied.
-
Key
operator’s
guide
Use of the RSPF has been prohibited in the key
operator programs.
→ Enable use of the RSPF in the key operator programs.
The RSPF cannot be used.
Lighting fixture flickers.
The same power outlet is used for the lighting fixture
and the machine.
→ Connect the machine to a power outlet which is not used for other
electric appliances.
4
61
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
Paper feeding problems
Problem
Cause and solution
Page
The number of sheets placed on the bypass tray
exceeds the maximum number.
→ Do not place more than the maximum number of sheets.
15
When using paper fed from the
bypass tray, the copied image is
skewed.
The bypass guide is not adjusted to the size of the
loaded paper.
→ Adjust the bypass guide to the size of the loaded paper.
18
20
15
18
15
The paper type setting is not correct.
→ When using a special paper, be sure to set the correct paper
type.
The number of sheets placed on the bypass tray
exceeds the maximum number.
→ Do not place more than the maximum number of sheets.
Paper from the bypass tray
misfeeds.
The bypass guide is not adjusted to the size of the
loaded paper.
→ Adjust the bypass guide to the size of the loaded paper.
The paper is outside of the specified size and weight
range.
→ Use copy paper within the specified range.
Paper is curled or damp.
→ Do not use curled or crimped paper. Replace with dry copy paper.
During periods when the machine is not used for a long time,
remove the paper from the tray and store it in a dark place in a
bag to prevent moisture absorption.
79
Paper misfeeds.
Paper is not loaded properly.
→ Make sure the paper is properly loaded.
17
64
17
Pieces of paper remain inside machine.
→ Remove all pieces of misfed paper.
Sheets of paper stick together.
→ Fan the paper well before loading it.
62
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
Image quality problems
Problem
Cause and solution
Page
The image of the original is too light or too dark.
→ Select the correct original image type in the exposure setting and
adjust the copying exposure.
29
The copying exposure is set to "AUTO".
Key
operator’s
guide
→ The "EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT" key operator program can be
used to adjust the exposure level used for "AUTO" exposure.
Consult the administrator of the machine.
Copies are too dark or too light.
The original type that is most suitable for the original
has not been selected in the copy exposure setting
screen.
29
→ Change the original type selection to "AUTO", or manually select
the most suitable original type setting.
The correct original type has not been selected in the
copy exposure setting screen.
→ Change the original type setting to "TEXT".
Text is not clear in a copy.
29
22, 23
30
The original was placed in the wrong position.
→ Place the original in the correct position. When using the
document glass, place the original against the far left side.
A suitable ratio for the original size and paper size has
not been selected.
→ Use auto ratio selection to obtain the correct ratio for the copy.
Part of the copied image is cut off.
The tray’s paper size setting was not changed when a
different size of paper was loaded in the tray.
→ Be sure to change the tray’s paper size setting when loading a
different size of paper in the tray.
19
47
An AB paper size is being used.
→ When using copy paper that is an AB size, set the original size
manually.
5
The original is not placed face up in the RSPF or face
down on the document glass.
→ Place the original face up in the RSPF or face down on the
document glass.
Blank copies.
22, 23
15
The paper is outside of the specified size and weight
range.
→ Use copy paper within the specified range.
The paper type setting is not correct.
→ Set the correct paper type. To set the paper type for a tray, see
"CHANGING A TRAY’S PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE
SETTINGS".
Paper is wrinkled or the copied
image comes off when the paper
surface is rubbed.
19, 20
Paper is curled or damp.
→ Do not use curled or wrinkled paper. Replace with dry copy
paper. During periods when the machine is not used for a long
time, remove the paper from the tray and store it in a dark place
in a bag to prevent moisture absorption.
79
75
The document glass or the underside of the RSPF is
dirty.
→ Clean regularly.
Copies are smudged or dirty.
The original is smudged or blotchy.
→ Use a clean original.
-
The scanner glass for the RSPF is dirty.
→ Clean the long, narrow scanning glass.
White or black lines appear copies.
75
63
MISFEED REMOVAL
When a misfeed occurs during copying, the message "MISFEED HAS OCCURRED." will appear in the touch panel
and printing will stop.
G If the misfed paper tears during removal, remove the torn pieces. Take care not to touch the photoconductive
drum while removing the pieces. Nicks and scratches on the drum will cause dirty copies.
First, locate the misfeed
1
Misfeed in the RSPF (p.65)
Misfeed in the finisher (p.70)
A MISFEED HAS OCCURRED.
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
Misfeed in the machine (p.66)
Misfeed in the bypass tray (p.66)
Misfeed in the upper paper tray (p.68)
Misfeed in the lower paper tray (p.69)
3
4
5
6
INFORMATION
If the fax option is installed, all received faxes are stored in memory. The faxes are automatically printed after the
misfeed is removed.
Note
MISFEED REMOVAL GUIDANCE
Misfeed removal guidance can be displayed by touching the [INFORMATION] key on the touch panel after a
misfeed has occurred.
INFORMATION
64
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
MISFEED IN THE RSPF
Section C
Remove the misfed original.
1
Carefully remove the
misfed original from the
exit area.
Check sections A, B, and
C in the illustration at left
A
and remove the misfed
original.
B
C
If the misfed original cannot be easily removed from
the exit area, open the moveable part of the document
feeder tray and remove the reversing tray, and then
remove the original.
Section A
Open the document
feeder cover and
Document feeder cover
Reversing tray
Moveable
part
carefully remove the
misfed original from the
document feeder tray.
Close the document
feeder cover.
Section B
Open the RSPF and
rotate the release roller in
the direction of the arrow
to feed the original out.
Close the RSPF and then
carefully remove the
Roller
After removing a misfed original from the
exit area, be sure to attach the reversing
tray securely to the exit area (When the
RSPF is installed.).
original.
Note
5
If the misfed original
cannot be removed,
open the document
transport cover (below),
and rotate the release
roller again.
Open and close the RSPF to clear the
misfeed message from the touch
panel.
2
The message can also
be cleared by opening
and closing the
document feeder cover
or the document
If a small original (5-1/2" x 8-1/2", etc.) is misfed, or if
an original misfeed occurs in the reversing tray of the
RSPF, lift the document transport cover knob, open the
document transport cover, and remove the original.
transport cover.
Document
transport cover
After the misfeed is removed and the misfeed
message is cleared, a message will appear indicating
the number of originals that must be reinserted in the
RSPF.
Document transport
cover knob
Reinsert the originals that still must
3
be scanned (Including the original that
was being scanned when the misfeed
occurred.), and press the [START]
key( ).
Copying of the remaining originals will resume.
65
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
MISFEED IN THE BYPASS TRAY
Carefully pull the misfed paper out.
Open and close the side cover.
1
2
Make sure that the
misfeed message is
cleared.
The message can also
be cleared by opening
and closing the front
cover.
If the message is not
cleared, see "A. Misfeed
in the paper feed area".
MISFEED IN THE MACHINE
Determine the location of the misfeed and remove it appropriately as indicated below.
If paper is misfed, go to
"B. Misfeed in the fusing
area" (p.67).
If paper is misfed here, go to
"A. Misfeed in the paper feed
area" (below).
A. Misfeed in the paper feed area
Open the bypass tray and the side
cover.
Carefully remove the misfed paper.
Turn the roller rotating knob in the
direction of the arrow to assist in
removing it.
1
3
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
Roller rotating knob
Press gently on both sides of the front
cover and pull it open.
2
The fusing unit is hot. Do not touch
the fusing unit when removing
misfed paper. Doing so may cause a
burn or injury.
Warning
Caution
Do not touch the photoconductive drum
(green portion) when removing the misfed
paper. Doing so may damage the drum and
cause smudges on copies.
66
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
Close the front cover and side cover.
4
Make sure that the
misfeed message is
cleared.
B: Misfeed in the fusing area
Open the bypass tray and the side
cover.
If you were unable to remove the
misfeed in step 4, press down on the
fusing unit paper guide knob to open
the paper guide, and carefully remove
the misfed paper.
1
5
Press and pull it open gently on both
sides of the front cover.
2
• Do not touch the photoconductive drum
Caution
(green portion) when removing the misfed
paper. Doing so may damage the drum
and cause smudges on copies.
5
• Take care not to let unfixed toner on the
misfed paper soil your hands or clothes.
Turn the roller rotating knob in the
direction of the arrow.
3
Close the fusing unit paper guide and
press down on the fusing unit release
levers.
6
7
Roller rotating knob
Close the front cover and side cover.
Make sure that the
misfeed message is
cleared.
Lift the fusing unit release levers and
4
carefully remove the misfed paper.
Fusing unit release levers
The fusing unit is hot. Do not touch
the fusing unit when removing
Warning
misfed paper. Doing so may cause a
burn or injury.
67
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
MISFEED IN THE CENTER TRAY
Remove the paper by pulling it into the center tray.
MISFEED IN THE UPPER PAPER TRAY
Make sure that there is no misfed paper in the machine before pulling the tray out. (p.66)
Lift and pull out the upper paper tray
and then remove the misfed paper.
1
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
Replace the upper paper tray.
2
Push the upper paper
tray in completely.
Open and close the side cover.
3
Make sure that the
misfeed message is
cleared.
The message can also
be cleared by opening
and closing the front
cover.
68
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
MISFEED IN THE LOWER PAPER TRAY
G Make sure that there is no misfed paper in the machine before pulling the tray out. (p.66)
G
Use the following procedure to remove misfeeds that occur in the 500-sheet paper feed unit or 2 x 500-sheet paper
feed unit.
Open the lower side cover.
1
Remove the misfed paper.
2
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
If the misfed paper is not visible in
step 2, lift and pull out the lower paper
tray and remove the misfed paper.
3
5
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
Replace the lower paper tray.
Push the lower paper tray in completely.
Close the lower side cover.
4
5
Make sure that the
misfeed message is
cleared.
69
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
MISFEED IN THE UPPER EXIT AREA
(
when a job separator tray kit or finisher (AR-FN5N) is installed)
If a job separator tray kit or a finisher is installed, a misfeed may occur in the upper exit area.
Open the upper right side cover.
Close the upper right side cover.
1
3
Make sure that the misfeed message is cleared.
Gently pull the misfed paper out.
2
Be careful not to tear the
misfed paper during
removal.
MISFEED IN AN OUTPUT TRAY
(when a finisher (AR-FN5N) is installed)
A MISFEED HAS OCCURRED.
INFORMATION
Grasp the handle of the stapler
compiler cover and pull to open the
cover.
Remove any misfed paper from the
transport area.
1
2
70
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
If staple sort copying is being
performed, open the paper guide and
remove any misfed paper from the
stapler compiler.
3
Close the stapler compiler cover.
4
5
6
If the offset tray is being used, remove
any misfed paper from the offset tray.
5
If the top tray is being used, open the
top cover, remove any misfed paper,
and close the top cover.
Make sure that the
misfeed message is
cleared.
71
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE
To check how much toner remains in the toner cartridge (p.74), hold down the [COPY] key. The amount of toner
remaining will appear in the display. When less than 25% of the toner remains, obtain a new toner cartridge as soon
as possible. When "TONER SUPPLY IS LOW." appears in the display, be sure to have a new cartridge on hand for
replacement at any time as little toner remains. When "CHANGE THE TONER CARTRIDGE." appears in the touch
panel, the toner cartridge must be replaced. Follow these steps to replace the cartridge.
When running long copy jobs or copying originals with many areas of solid black, "TONER REPLENISHMENT IN
Note
PROGRESS." may appear in the touch panel and copying may stop even though the cartridge still has toner.
When this occurs, the toner is being replenished. Replenishment will last about two minutes. When the [START]
key ( ) illuminates, press the [START] key ( ) to resume copying.
Press gently on both sides of the front
cover and pull it open.
While pushing the lock release lever,
gently insert the toner cartridge along
the guides until it clicks into place.
1
2
4
Pull the toner cartridge out while
pressing the lock release lever.
When pulling out the
Toner cartridge
lock release lever
toner cartridge, place
your other hand on the
green part of the
cartridge.
Handle
If dirt or dust adheres to the toner cartridge,
remove it before installing the cartridge.
Note
• After removing the toner cartridge, do not
shake it or tap it. Doing so may cause
toner to leak from the cartridge. Put the
old cartridge immediately in the bag
provided with the new cartridge.
Note
Remove the tape from the shutter. Pull
the shutter out of the toner cartridge
as shown in the illustration.
Discard the shutter.
5
6
• Dispose of the old toner cartridge in
accordance with local regulations.
Remove the new toner cartridge from
the bag. Grasp both ends of the
cartridge and shake it horizontally
about 20 times. After shaking the
cartridge, remove the tape.
3
Grasp the hand grip to
hold the cartridge. Do not
hold the cartridge by the
About 20 times
Close the front cover.
Shutter
shutter. Be sure to only
shake the cartridge
before the tape is
removed.
Tape
72
STAPLE CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT
(when the finisher (AR-FN5N) is installed)
When the message "ADD STAPLES." appears, replace the staple cartridge as follows:
Open the stapler cover.
Remove the tape from the cartridge.
1
5
6
7
Grasp the green portion of the staple
box and remove the staple box from
the stapler.
Insert the staple box into the stapler
unit until it clicks into place.
2
Close the stapler cover.
Remove the staple cartridge from
inside the staple box.
3
4
5
Insert the new staple cartridge into the
box until it clicks into place.
Insert the new cartridge
by aligning the arrows on
the cartridge with those
on the box.
Check that the cartridge
has locked into place by
pulling it slightly.
73
TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE
STAPLE JAM REMOVAL
If staples become jammed in the stapler, the message "CHECK STAPLER POSITION OR STAPLE JAM." will appear.
Follow these steps to remove the jammed staples.
Open the stapler cover.
Return the lever to its original
position.
1
4
5
6
Grasp the green portion of the staple
box and remove the staple box from
the stapler.
Insert the staple box into the stapler
unit until it clicks into place.
2
Close the stapler cover.
Raise the lever at the end of the staple
box and remove the jammed staples.
3
CHECKING THE TONER QUANTITY
AND TOTAL OUTPUT COUNT
The approximate quantity of toner remaining and the total output count can be displayed as explained below.
G The output count shows the combined output total of the copy, fax, and printer functions.
Checking the total output count and toner quantity
Hold down the [COPY] key. The total output count and toner quantity appear while the key is held down.
TOTAL OUTPUT : 0,123,456
TONER QUANTITY : 100-75%
SPECIAL MODES
COPY
2-SIDED COPY
8½x11
8½x14
OUTPUT
• Each 11" x 17" (A3) page is counted as two pages. Two sided pages are also counted as two pages.
• The amount of toner consumed will vary depending on conditions of usage and the type of originals copied.
Note
The toner quantity display should only be used as an approximate guide.
74
CLEANING THE MACHINE
DOCUMENT GLASS AND RSPF
If the document glass, RSPF, or scanning glass for originals fed from the RSPF (the long narrow glass surface on
the right side of the document glass) become dirty, the dirt may appear on copies. Always keep these parts clean.
Stains or dirt on the document glass/RSPF will also be copied. Wipe the document glass, the RSPF and the
scanning window on the document glass with a soft, clean cloth.
If necessary, dampen the cloth with water. Do not use thinner, benzene, or similar volatile cleaning agents.
Do not spray flammable cleaner gas. Gas from the spray may come in contact with the internal
electrical components or high-temperature parts of the fusing unit, creating a risk of fire or
Warning
electrical shock.
Surface of document glass
Underside of RSPF
Scanning glass for RSPF
Scanning glass
5
THE BYPASS TRAY PAPER FEED ROLLER
If misfeeds occur frequently when feeding envelopes or other thick paper from the bypass tray, wipe the paper feed
roller at the feed slot of the bypass tray with a soft, clean cloth moistened with alcohol or water.
Bypass tray paper feed roller
75
Chapter 6
PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES
6
Optional equipments and supplies are explained in this chapter. To purchase optional equipment and supplies
contact your SHARP service center.
PERIPHERAL DEVICES
FINISHER (AR-FN5N) See page 77.
500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT (AR-D21) See page 78.
2 x 500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT (AR-D22) See page 78.
JOB SEPARATOR TRAY KIT (AR-TR3)
This enables separation of output locations by mode (copy, printer, etc.).
PRINTER EXPANSION KIT (AR-P17)
This allows the machine to be used as a network printer.
PRINT SERVER CARD (AR-NC5J)*1
This optional expansion kit adds the network printer function (10/100 BASE-TX).
PS3 EXPANSION KIT (AR-PK1)*1
This kit offers PostScript 3 compatibility.
BARCODE FONT KIT (AR-PF1)*1
This font set adds barcode printing capability.
NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT (AR-NS2)*2
This allows the machine to be used as a network scanner.
FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT (AR-FX7)
This allows the machine can be used as a facsimile machine.
8MB FAX MEMORY (AR-MM9)
Image memory can be expanded by installing the optional fax expansion memory.
256MB EXPANSION MEMORY BOARD (AR-SM5)
512MB EXPANSION MEMORY BOARD (AR-SM6)
Additional memory can be installed in the machine. There are two DIMM slots in this machine, and the memory
can be expanded to a maximum of 1056 MB.
*1Requires installation of the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT (AR-P17).
*2Requires installation of the PRINTER EXPANSION KIT (AR-P17), and 128MB or more of memory must be
extended.
A commercial 64/128/256/512MB (the 168 pin SDRAM DIMM) memory module can be used to expand memory
in this unit. For more information, consult your SHARP service center.
Note
76
PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES
FINISHER (AR-FN5N)
When an optional finisher (AR-FN5N) is installed, the machine can automatically staple the sorted copies. Each
collated set of copies or group of copies can be stacked offset from the previous set. (Offset function p.35)
Part names
Stapler compiler cover
Top cover
Top tray
Offset tray
Stapler cover
Specifications
AR-FN5N
Top tray
100 sheets
Tray capacity
Offset tray
1,000 sheets (500 sheets for sizes larger than 8-1/2" x 11" (A4))
Top tray: 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 11" x 17" (A5 to A3)
Offset tray: 8-1/2" x 11" to 11" x 17" (B5 to A3)
14 lbs. to 34 lbs. (52 g/m2 to 128 g/m2)
6
Size
Paper size
Offset
Weight
Approx. 1" (27 mm)
Paper sizes that can be
stapled
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17" (B5, A4, A4R, B4, A3)
Stapling capacity
Power supply
Weight
30 sheets (21 lbs. (80 g/m2))
Drawn from the machine
Approx. 42 lbs. (19 kg)
18-33/64" (W) x 20-1/8" (D) x 21-17/64" (H)
Exit area
Dimensions
(470 mm (W) x 511 mm (D) x 540 mm (H))
22-9/64" (W) x 17-31/64" (D) x 4-19/64" (H)
Stapler compiler
(562 mm (W) x 444 mm (D) x 109 mm (H))
As a part of our policy of continuous improvement, SHARP reserves the right to make design and specification
changes for product improvement without prior notice. The performance specification figures indicated are
nominal values of production units and there may be some deviations from these values in individual units.
Note
77
PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES
500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT/
2 x 500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT
These paper feed units provide the convenience of increased paper capacity for the machine and a greater choice of
paper sizes readily available for copying.
The AR-D21 contains one 500-sheet paper tray and the AR-D22 contains two 500-sheet paper trays.
Part names
500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT
2x500-SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT
(AR-D21)
(AR-D22)
Side cover
Side cover
Tray
Tray
Specifications
AR-D21
AR-D22
Size
8-1/2" x 11" to 11" x 17" (B5 to A3)
15 lbs. to 28 lbs. (56 g/m2 to 105 g/m2)
Paper
Weight
Upper tray 500 sheets
500 sheets
Paper
capacity
Lower tray
—
500 sheets
Weight
Approx. 13.5 lbs. (6.1kg)
Approx. 26.1 lbs. (11.8kg)
23-15/32" (W) x 19-39/64" (D) x 3-53/64" (H) 23-15/32" (W) x 19-39/64" (D) x 7-53/64" (H)
Dimensions
Power supply
(596 mm (W) x 498 mm (D) x 97 mm (H))
(596 mm (W) x 498 mm(D) x 194 mm(H))
Drawn from the machine
As a part of our policy of continuous improvement, SHARP reserves the right to make design and specification
changes for product improvement without prior notice. The performance specification figures indicated are
nominal values of production units and there may be some deviations from these values in individual units.
Note
78
STORAGE OF SUPPLIES
Standard supplies for this product that are to be replaced by the user are paper and the toner cartridge.
For best copying results, be sure to use only SHARP Genuine Supplies which are designed, engineered
and tested to maximize the life and performance of SHARP copiers. Look for the Genuine Supplies label
on the toner package.
GENUINE SUPPLIES
PROPER STORAGE
Store the supplies in a location that is:
• clean and dry,
• at a stable temperature,
• not exposed to direct sunlight.
Store paper in the wrapper and lying flat.
Paper stored out of the wrapper or in packages
standing on end may curl or get damp, resulting in
paper misfeeds.
6
79
Chapter 7
APPENDIX
7
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
AR-M237
AR-M277
Type
Digital Multifunction System, Desktop
OPC drum
Photoconductive type
Document glass type
Copy system
Originals
Fixed
Dry, electrostatic transfer
Sheets, bound documents
Max. 11" x 17" (A3)
Originals size
Max. 11" x 17" (A3)
Min. 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A6)
Image loss: Max. 5/32" (4 mm) (leading and trailing edges)
Max. 11/64" (6 mm) (along other edges in total)
Copy size
600 dpi:
600 dpi:
12 copies/min. (11" x 17")
13 copies/min. (8-1/2" x 14")
16 copies/min. (8-1/2" x 11"R)
23 copies/min. (8-1/2" x 11")
23 copies/min. (5-1/2" x 8-1/2")
14 copies/min. (11" x 17")
16 copies/min. (8-1/2" x 14")
18 copies/min. (8-1/2" x 11"R)
27 copies/min. (8-1/2" x 11")
27 copies/min. (5-1/2" x 8-1/2")
Copying speed
(one-sided copying at
100% copy ratio)
1200 dpi:
1200 dpi:
7.5 copies/min. (11" x 17")
8 copies/min. (8-1/2" x 14")
9 copies/min. (8-1/2" x 11"R)
13.5 copies/min. (8-1/2" x 11")
13.5 copies/min. (5-1/2" x 8-1/2")
7.5 copies/min. (11" x 17")
8 copies/min. (8-1/2" x 14")
9 copies/min. (8-1/2" x 11"R)
13.5 copies/min. (8-1/2" x 11")
13.5 copies/min. (5-1/2" x 8-1/2")
Continuous copy
First-copy time*
Warm-up time*
Max. 999 copies; subtractive counter
Approx. 4.8 sec.
Approx. 23 sec.
600 dpi:
Variable: 25% to 400%, in 1% increments (total 376 steps)
Fixed preset: 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%, 129%, 200%, 400%
Copy ratio
1200 dpi:
Variable: 50% to 200%, in 1% increments (total 151 steps)
Fixed preset: 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%, 129%, 200%
Document glass: Moving optical source, slit exposure (stationary platen) with
automatic exposure function
Exposure system
RSPF:
Moving original
Paper feed
Two automatic feeding paper trays (500 sheets x 2) + bypass tray (100 sheets)
Fusing system
Developer system
Light source
Heat rollers
Magnetic brush development
Xenon lamp
Scan: 400 dpi
Scan: 400 dpi
Output: 600 dpi
Output: 1200 dpi
(AUTO/TEXT/PHOTO mode)
(SUPER PHOTO mode)
Resolution
80
APPENDIX
Scanning: 256
Printing: 2 value
Gradation
Power supply
AC 120V, 60 Hz, 12A
Max. 1.4 kW
Power consumption
Overall dimensions
(with bypass tray folded)
24-17/32" (W) x 24" (D) (623 mm (W) x 609.5 mm (D))
Weight
Approx. 103.7 lbs. (47 kg) (Not includes toner cartridge)
24-17/32" (W) x 24" (D) x 30-15/16" (H)
(623mm (W) x 609.5mm (D) x 785.5mm (H))
Dimensions
Operating conditions
Temperature: 59°F to 86°F (15°C to 30°C), Humidity: 20% to 85%
Sound Power Level LwA(1B=10dB)
Copying: 6.3[B]
Standby: 3.6[B]
Sound Pressure Level LpA (bystander positions)
Copying: 50[dB(A)]
Noise level
Standby: 25[dB(A)]
Sound Pressure Level LpA (operator position)
Copying: 51[dB(A)]
Standby: 20[dB(A)]
Noise emission measurement in accordance with ISO 7779.
Ozone: 0.02 mg/m3 or less
Emission concentration
(measured according to Dust:
RAL-UZ62)
0.075 mg/m3 or less
Styrene: 0.07 mg/m3 or less
*
The first-copy time and warm-up time may vary depending on the power-supply voltage, ambient temperature, and other
operating conditions.
Reversing single pass feeder (RSPF)
9 lbs. to 34 lbs. (35 g/m2 to 128 g/m2) (14 lbs. to 28 lbs. (52 g/m2 to 105 g/m2) for
two-sided original)
Weight
Acceptable
original
Size
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 11" x 17"
Capacity
Up to 100 sheets (Thickness 33/64" (13 mm) and below)
5-1/2" x 8-1/2", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17"
(A4, A3)
Detectable original sizes
Weight
16.6 lbs. (7.5 kg)
22-61/64" (W) x 17-9/64" (D) x 5-1/4" (H)
(586 mm (W) x 457 mm (D) x 145 mm (H))
Dimensions
7
As a part of our policy of continuous improvement, SHARP reserves the right to make design and specification
changes for product improvement without prior notice. The performance specification figures indicated are
nominal values of production units. There may be some deviations from these values in individual units.
Note
81
Page: 1/4
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Data Revised: Jul. 31. 2002
Data Issued: Apr. 2. 2001
MSDS No. F-00981
1. PRODUCT AND COMPANY IDENTIFICATION
Product Name
: AR-270NT / AR-270T / AR-270ST / AR-270FT / AR-270NT-J /
AR-270ST-C/ AR-270FT-T (Black Toner)
Supplier Identification : Sharp Corporation
22-22 Nagaike-cho, Abeno-ku, Osaka, Japan
Local suppliers are listed below. Please contact the nearest supplier for additional information.
Area
(Country)
U.S.A.
(Name and Telephone Number)
Sharp Electronics Corporation
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, NJ
Telephone number for information
Emergency telephone number
Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
Telephone number for information
Emergency telephone number
Sharp Corporation of Australia PTY. Ltd.
No1 Huntingwood Drive Huntingwood Blacktown N.S.W.
Telephone number for information
Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Sonninstrasse 3, 20097 Hamburg
Telephone number to access MSDS
For more information
: 1-800-237-4277
: 1-800-255-3924
North
America
Canada
Australia
Germany
: 905-890-2100
: 1-800-255-3924
Oceania
: 1300-13-50-22
: 040-2376-2185
: 040-2376-2613
United
Sharp Electronics (U. K.) Ltd.
Kingdom
Telephone number for information
Sharp Electronics France S.A.
Telephone number for information
Sharp Electronics GMBH
Telephone number for information
Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
Telephone number for information
: 08705-274-277
: 01-49-90-34-00
: 01-727-19-0
: 02895951
France
Austria
Italy
Europe
Spain
Sharp Electronics (Espana) S.A.
Telephone number for information
: 93-581-97-00
: 30-6359500
: 08-634-36-00
: 01-846-6111
Netherlands Sharp Electronics Benelux B.V.
Telephone number for information
Sweden
Sharp Electronics Nordic AB
Telephone number for information
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
Telephone number for information
U.A.E.
Sharp Middle East FZE
P.O.Box 17115 Jebel Ali, Dubai
Telephone number for information
Middle
East
: 04-815311
2. COMPOSITION/INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS
Substance[ ]
Preparation[X]
Ingredient
CAS No.
Proportion OSHA PEL ACGIH TLV MAK-TWA NOHSC-TWA
Styrene-Acrylate
copolymer
29497-14-1
85-95%
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
Carbon black
Iron oxide
Metal Complex dye* 109125-51-1
84179-66-8
1333-86-4
1309-38-2
5-10%
1-5%
< 2%
3.5mg/m3
Not listed
0.5mg/m3
3.5mg/m3
Not listed
0.5mg/m3
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
3mg/m3
Not listed
Not listed
}
* EC N0. : 400-110-2, Symbol letter : F, R Phrase : R11
82
Page: 2/4
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Data Revised: Jul. 31. 2002
Data Issued: Apr. 2. 2001
MSDS No. F-00981
3. HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION
Most Important Hazards and Effects of the Products
Human Health Effects : There are no anticipated carcinogenic effects from exposure based on animal tests
performed using toner. When used as intended according to instructions, studies do
not indicate any symptoms of fibrosis will occur.
Environmental Effects : No data are available.
Specific Hazards
: Dust explosion (like most finely divided organic powders)
Directive 1999/45/EC(Europe): Not classified as dangerous
4. FIRST-AID MEASURES
Route(s) of Entry: Inhalation?
Skin?
Ingestion?
Yes
No
Possible but very unusual.
Inhalation
: Remove to fresh air. If symptoms occur, consult medical personnel.
Skin Contact: Wash with soap and water for 15 minutes or until particle is removed.
If irritation does occur, consult medical personnel.
Eye Contact : Flush eyes immediately with water for 15 minutes. If irritation does occur, consult medical
personnel.
Ingestion
: Rinse with water and drink several glasses of water . If irritation or discomfort does occur, consult
medical personnel.
5. FIRE –FIGHTING MEASURES
Extinguishing Media
: Water, CO2, foam and dry chemicals
Special Fire fighting Procedures : None
Fire and Explosion Hazards : Toner material, like most finely divided organic powders, may form an
explosive mixture.
6. ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES
Personal Precautions
: None
Environmental Precautions
Methods for Cleaning Up
: None
: Wipe off with paper or cloth. Do not use vacuum cleaner when a large
amount is released. It, like most finely divided organic powders, is capable of
creating a dust explosion.
7. HANDLING AND STORAGE
Handling
Technical Measures : None
Precautions
: None
Safe Handling Advice : Use of a dust mask is recommended when handling a large quantity of toner or during
long term exposure, as with any non-toxic dust. Try not to disperse the particles.
Storage
Technical Measures : None
Storage Conditions : Keep container closed and Store in a cool and dry place.
Keep out of the reach of children.
Incompatible Products: None
8. EXPOSURE CONTROLS/PERSONAL PROTECTION
Engineering Measures
Ventilation
: Not required under intended use.
83
Page: 3/4
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Data Revised: Jul. 31. 2002
Data Issued: Apr. 2. 2001
MSDS No. F-00981
Exposure limit values
OSHA-PEL (USA)
ACGIH-TLV (USA)
: 15mg/m3 (Total Dust) , 5mg/m3 (Respirable Dust)
: 10mg/m3 (Total Dust) , 3mg/m3 (Respirable Dust)
Personal Protective Equipment
Respiratory Protection
Hand Protection
: Not required under intended use.
: Not required under intended use.
Eye Protection
: Not required under intended use.
Skin Protection
: Not required under intended use.
Other Protective Equipment
: Use of a dust mask and goggles are recommended when handling a large
quantity of toner or during long term exposure, as with any non-toxic dust.
9. PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES
Appearance
Physical State:Solid
Ph
Boiling/Melting Point
Softening Point (°C)
Flash Point (°C )
Ignition Point (°C )
Explosion Properties
Density (g/cm3)
Form: Powder
Color:Black
Odor:odorless
: Not applicable
: Not applicable
: 100 - 130
: Not applicable
: > 350
: No data
: 1.1 (bulk density : 0.35)
: Negligible
Solubility in water
10. STABILITY AND REACTIVITY
Stability
: Stable
Hazardous Reactions
Conditions to Avoid
Materials to Avoid
: Dust explosion, like most finely divided organic powders.
: Electric discharge, throwing into fire.
: Oxidizing Materials
Hazardous Decomposition Products : CO, CO2 and NOX
Further Information
: None
11. TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION
Acute Toxicity
Ingestion (oral)
Inhalation
: LD50 > 2000mg/kg (Rats)
: LC50 > 4.97mg/L
Eye irritation
: Not an irritant (Rabbits)
Skin irritation
Skin sensitizer
Mutagenicity
Carcinogenicity
: Not an irritant (Rabbits)
: No sensitization
: Negative (Ames Test)
: In 1996 the IARC reevaluated carbon black as a Group 2B carcinogen (possible human
carcinogen). This classification is given to chemicals for which there is inadequate
human evidence, but sufficient animal evidence on which to base an opinion of
carcinogenicity. The classification is based upon the development of lung tumors in rats
receiving chronic inhalation exposures to free carbon black at levels that induce particle
overload of the lung. Studies performed in animal models other than rats did not show
any association between carbon black and lung tumors. Moreover, a two-year cancer
bioassay using a typical toner preparation containing carbon black demonstrated no
association between toner exposure and tumor development in rats.
84
Page: 4/4
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Data Revised: Jul. 31. 2002
Data Issued: Apr. 2. 2001
MSDS No. F-00981
Chronic Effect
: In a study in rats of chronic inhalation exposure to a typical toner, a mild to moderate
degree of lung fibrosis was observed in 92% of the rats in the high concentration
(16mg/m3) exposure group, and a minimal to mild degree of fibrosis was noted in 22% of
the animals in the middle (4mg/m3) exposure group, but no pulmonary change was
reported in the lowest (1mg/m3) exposure group, the most relevant level to potential
human exposures.
12. ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION
No data are available.
13. DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS
Waste from Residues
: Waste material may be dumped or incinerated under conditions which meet all
federal, state and local environmental regulations.
Contaminated Packaging : Waste may be disposed or incinerated under conditions which meet all federal,
state and local environmental regulations.
14. TRANSPORT INFORMATION
UN Classification
: None
Not classified as hazardous for transport.
15. REGULATORY INFORMATION
US Information
TSCA (Toxic Substances Control Act):
All chemical substances in this product comply with all applicable rules or order under TSCA.
SARA (Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act) Title III
302 Extreme Hazardous Substance: None
311/312 Hazard Classification
EU Information
: None
1999/45/EC and 67/548/EEC
Symbol & Indication
R-Phrase
: Not required
: Not required
76/769/EEC
: All chemical substances in this product comply with all applicable rules
or order under 76/769/EEC.
16. OTHER INFORMATION
NFPA Rating (USA)
: Health=1 Flammability=1 Reactivity=0
WHMIS Legislation (Canada) : This product is not a controlled product.
List of R phrases
References
: R11 : Highly flammable
IARC (1996) : IARC monographs on the Evaluation of the Carcinogenic Risk of Chemicals to Humans, Vol.
65, Printing Process And Printing Inks, Carbon Black and Some Nitro Compounds, Lyon,
pp.149-261
H.Muhle, B.Bellmann, O.Creutzenberg, C.Dasenbrock, H.Ernst, R.Kilpper, J.C.MacKenzie, P.Morrow,
U.Mohr, S.Takenaka, and R.Mermelstein (1991) Pulmonary Response to Toner upon Chronic Inhalation
Exposure in Rats.
Fundamental and Applied Toxicology 17, pp.280-299.
The information on this data sheet represents our current data and best opinion as to the proper use in handling
of this product under normal conditions. However, all materials may present unknown hazards and should be
used with caution. Although certain hazards are described herein, we do not guarantee that these are the only
hazards which exist.
85
Page: 1/4
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Data Issued: Aug. 1. 2003
MSDS No. F-31201
1. PRODUCT AND COMPANY IDENTIFICATION
Product Name : AR-271ND / AR-271DV / AR-271SD / AR-271SD-C (Black Developer)
Supplier Identification : Sharp Corporation
22-22 Nagaike-cho, Abeno-ku, Osaka, Japan
Local suppliers are listed below. Please contact the nearest supplier for additional information.
Area
(Country)
U.S.A.
(Name and Telephone Number)
Sharp Electronics Corporation
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, NJ
Telephone number for information
Emergency telephone number
Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
Telephone number for information
Emergency telephone number
Sharp Corporation of Australia PTY. Ltd.
No1 Huntingwood Drive Huntingwood Blacktown N.S.W.
Telephone number for information
Sharp Electronics (Europe) GMBH
Sonninstrasse 3, 20097 Hamburg
Telephone number to access MSDS
For more information
: 1-800-237-4277
: 1-800-255-3924
North
America
Canada
Australia
Germany
: 905-890-2100
: 1-800-255-3924
Oceania
: 1300-13-50-22
: 040-2376-2185
: 040-2376-2613
United
Kingdom
Sharp Electronics (U. K.) Ltd.
Telephone number for information
Sharp Electronics France S.A.
Telephone number for information
Sharp Electronics GMBH
Telephone number for information
Sharp Electronics (Italy) S.P.A.
Telephone number for information
: 08705-274-277
: 01-49-90-34-00
: 01-727-19-0
: 02895951
France
Austria
Italy
Europe
Spain
Sharp Electronics (Espana) S.A.
Telephone number for information
: 93-581-97-00
: 30-6359500
: 08-634-36-00
: 01-846-6111
Netherlands Sharp Electronics Benelux B.V.
Telephone number for information
Sweden
Sharp Electronics Nordic AB
Telephone number for information
Switzerland Sharp Electronics (Schweiz) AG
Telephone number for information
U.A.E.
Sharp Middle East FZE
P.O.Box 17115 Jebel Ali, Dubai
Telephone number for information
Middle
East
: 04-815311
2. COMPOSITION/INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS
Substance[ ]
Preparation[X]
Ingredient
Iron powder
Styrene-Acrylate
copolymer
CAS No.
7439-89-6
29497-14-1
Proportion OSHA PEL ACGIH TLV MAK-TWA NOHSC-TWA
> 90%
5-10%
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
Not listed
Carbon black
1333-86-4
< 1%
3.5mg/m3
3.5mg/m3
Not listed
3mg/m3
86
Page: 2/4
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Data Issued: Aug. 1. 2003
MSDS No. F-31201
3. HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION
Most Important Hazards and Effects of the Products
Human Health Effects : There are no anticipated carcinogenic effects from exposure based on animal tests
performed using toner. When used as intended according to instructions, studies do
not indicate any symptoms of fibrosis will occur.
Environmental Effects : No data are available.
Specific Hazards
: Dust explosion (like most finely divided organic powders)
Directive 1999/45/EC(Europe): Not classified as dangerous
4. FIRST-AID MEASURES
Route(s) of Entry: Inhalation?
Skin?
Ingestion?
No
No
Possible but very unusual.
Inhalation
: Remove to fresh air. If symptoms occur, consult medical personnel.
Skin Contact: Wash with soap and water for 15 minutes or until particle is removed.
If irritation does occur, consult medical personnel.
Eye Contact : Flush eyes immediately with water for 15 minutes. If irritation does occur, consult medical
personnel.
Ingestion
: Rinse with water and drink several glasses of water . If irritation or discomfort does occur, consult
medical personnel.
5. FIRE –FIGHTING MEASURES
Extinguishing Media
: Water, CO2, foam and dry chemicals
Special Fire fighting Procedures : None
Fire and Explosion Hazards : Toner material, like most finely divided organic powders, may form an
explosive mixture.
6. ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES
Personal Precautions
: None
Environmental Precautions
Methods for Cleaning Up
: None
: Wipe off with paper or cloth. Do not use vacuum cleaner when a large
amount is released. It, like most finely divided organic powders, is capable of
creating a dust explosion.
7. HANDLING AND STORAGE
Handling
Technical Measures : None
Precautions
: None
Safe Handling Advice : Use of a dust mask is recommended when handling a large quantity of toner or during
long term exposure, as with any non-toxic dust. Try not to disperse the particles.
Storage
Technical Measures : None
Storage Conditions : Keep container closed and Store in a cool and dry place.
Keep out of the reach of children.
Incompatible Products: None
8. EXPOSURE CONTROLS/PERSONAL PROTECTION
Engineering Measures
Ventilation
: Not required under intended use.
87
Page: 3/4
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Data Issued: Aug. 1. 2003
MSDS No. F-31201
Exposure limit values
OSHA-PEL (USA)
ACGIH-TLV (USA)
: 15mg/m3 (Total Dust) , 5mg/m3 (Respirable Dust)
: 10mg/m3 (Total Dust) , 3mg/m3 (Respirable Dust)
Personal Protective Equipment
Respiratory Protection
Hand Protection
: Not required under intended use.
: Not required under intended use.
Eye Protection
: Not required under intended use.
Skin Protection
: Not required under intended use.
Other Protective Equipment
: Use of a dust mask and goggles are recommended when handling a large
quantity of toner or during long term exposure, as with any non-toxic dust.
9. PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES
Appearance
Physical State:Solid
Ph
Boiling/Melting Point
Flash Point (°C )
Ignition Point (°C )
Explosion Properties
Density (g/cm3)
Form: Powder
Color:Black
Odor:odorless
: Not applicable
: Not applicable
: Not applicable
: No data
: No data
: 7.3 (bulk density : 2.0)
: Negligible
Solubility in water
10. STABILITY AND REACTIVITY
Stability
: Stable
Hazardous Reactions
Conditions to Avoid
Materials to Avoid
: Dust explosion, like most finely divided organic powders.
: Electric discharge, throwing into fire.
: Oxidizing Materials
Hazardous Decomposition Products : CO, CO2 and NOX
Further Information
: None
11. TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION
Acute Toxicity
Ingestion (oral)
Inhalation
: LD50 > 2500mg/kg (Rats)
: No data
Eye irritation
: No data
Skin irritation
Skin sensitizer
Mutagenicity
Carcinogenicity
: Not an irritant (Rabbits)
: No sensitization
: Negative (Ames Test)
: In 1996 the IARC reevaluated carbon black as a Group 2B carcinogen (possible human
carcinogen). This classification is given to chemicals for which there is inadequate
human evidence, but sufficient animal evidence on which to base an opinion of
carcinogenicity. The classification is based upon the development of lung tumors in rats
receiving chronic inhalation exposures to free carbon black at levels that induce particle
overload of the lung. Studies performed in animal models other than rats did not show
any association between carbon black and lung tumors. Moreover, a two-year cancer
bioassay using a typical toner preparation containing carbon black demonstrated no
association between toner exposure and tumor development in rats.
88
Page: 4/4
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Data Issued: Aug. 1. 2003
MSDS No. F-31201
Chronic Effect
: In a study in rats of chronic inhalation exposure to a typical toner, a mild to moderate
degree of lung fibrosis was observed in 92% of the rats in the high concentration
(16mg/m3) exposure group, and a minimal to mild degree of fibrosis was noted in 22% of
the animals in the middle (4mg/m3) exposure group, but no pulmonary change was
reported in the lowest (1mg/m3) exposure group, the most relevant level to potential
human exposures.
12. ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION
No data are available.
13. DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS
Waste from Residues
: Waste material may be dumped or incinerated under conditions which meet all
federal, state and local environmental regulations.
Contaminated Packaging : Waste may be disposed or incinerated under conditions which meet all federal,
state and local environmental regulations.
14. TRANSPORT INFORMATION
UN Classification
: None
Not classified as hazardous for transport.
15. REGULATORY INFORMATION
US Information
TSCA (Toxic Substances Control Act):
All chemical substances in this product comply with all applicable rules or order under TSCA.
SARA (Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act) Title III
302 Extreme Hazardous Substance: None
311/312 Hazard Classification
EU Information
: None
1999/45/EC and 67/548/EEC
Symbol & Indication
R-Phrase
: Not required
: Not required
76/769/EEC
: All chemical substances in this product comply with all applicable rules
or order under 76/769/EEC.
16. OTHER INFORMATION
NFPA Rating (USA)
: Health=1 Flammability=1 Reactivity=0
WHMIS Legislation (Canada) : This product is not a controlled product.
References
IARC (1996) : IARC monographs on the Evaluation of the Carcinogenic Risk of Chemicals to Humans, Vol.
65, Printing Process And Printing Inks, Carbon Black and Some Nitro Compounds, Lyon,
pp.149-261
H.Muhle, B.Bellmann, O.Creutzenberg, C.Dasenbrock, H.Ernst, R.Kilpper, J.C.MacKenzie, P.Morrow,
U.Mohr, S.Takenaka, and R.Mermelstein (1991) Pulmonary Response to Toner upon Chronic Inhalation
Exposure in Rats.
Fundamental and Applied Toxicology 17, pp.280-299.
The information on this data sheet represents our current data and best opinion as to the proper use in handling
of this product under normal conditions. However, all materials may present unknown hazards and should be
used with caution. Although certain hazards are described herein, we do not guarantee that these are the only
hazards which exist.
89
INDEX
Symbols
Copy number display ............................................. 21
Copy ratio display................................................... 21
[COPY RATIO] key .................................... 21, 31, 32
Cover copy............................................................. 48
[COVER] key.................................................... 39, 49
Custom settings ..................................................... 51
[CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.................. 10, 19, 20, 52
[#/P] key ...................................................... 10, 54, 55
2 - 8
2 x 500-sheet paper feed unit ..................... 69, 76, 78
256MB expansion memory board ........................... 76
[2-SIDED COPY] key .................................. 21, 27, 28
500-sheet paper feed unit ........................... 69, 76, 78
512MB expansion memory board ........................... 76
8MB fax memory..................................................... 76
D
[DELETE] key......................................................... 55
[DETAIL] key.......................................................... 12
Disabling of two-sided printing on
A
ABCDEF configuration............................................ 53
[ACC.#-C] key ................................................... 10, 56
Account number...................................................... 56
Adjusting the exposure............................................ 29
Audting mode.......................................................... 56
[AUTO IMAGE] key................................................. 30
Auto tray switching.................................................. 53
Automatic ratio selection......................................... 30
Automatic two-sided copying
letterhead paper..................................................... 53
Display contrast................................................ 51, 53
Display message.................................................... 58
Display switching key............................................. 12
Document feeder cover...................................... 8, 65
Document feeder tray................................... 8, 23, 65
Document glass ....................................................... 8
Document transport cover.................................. 8, 65
Document transport cover knob......................... 8, 65
Dual page copy ...................................................... 43
[DUAL PAGE COPY] key................................. 39, 43
- Document glass ............................................... 27
- RSPF ............................................................... 28
AZERTY configuration ............................................ 53
E
B
[E-MAIL/FTP] key................................................... 12
Enlargement key .................................................... 31
Envelope .......................................................... 15, 16
Erase copy ............................................................. 42
[ERASE] key .................................................... 39, 42
Erase mode
- Center erase ................................................... 42
- Edge erase...................................................... 42
- Edge+center erase.......................................... 42
Erase width ............................................................ 42
Error message........................................................ 58
Exit area............................................................. 8, 65
Exposure adjustment ............................................. 29
Exposure display.................................................... 21
[EXPOSURE] key............................................. 21, 29
Exposure value guidelines ..................................... 29
Extra image adjust ................................................. 26
B/W reverse copy.................................................... 50
[B/W REVERSE] key......................................... 39, 50
Barcode font kit ....................................................... 76
[BINDING CHANGE] key ........................................ 27
Bypass feed ............................................................ 26
Bypass tray ............................................. 9, 26, 66, 75
Bypass tray extension......................................... 9, 18
[BYPASS TRAY] key............................................... 20
Bypass tray paper feed roller .................................. 75
Bypass tray paper guides.......................................... 9
C
Cautions on handling the machine ............................4
Cautions on using the machine................................. 3
Center tray .......................................................... 8, 68
Center tray counter function.................................... 24
Changing a tray’s paper tray
and paper size settings ........................................... 19
Checking the toner quantity .................................... 74
Cleaning the machine
F
Facsimile expansion kit.......................................... 76
[FAX JOB] key........................................................ 12
[FAX] key
- DATA indicator................................................ 10
- LINE indicator.................................................. 10
Finisher .......................................... 37, 70, 73, 76, 77
Front cover............................................. 8, 66, 67, 72
Fusing unit paper guide...................................... 9, 67
Fusing unit release lever.................................... 9, 67
- Bypass tray paper feed roller........................... 75
- Document glass ............................................... 75
- RSPF ............................................................... 75
[CLEAR ALL] key .............................................. 10, 14
[CLEAR] key................................................ 10, 22, 23
Clock ....................................................................... 51
Color paper ............................................................. 15
Copy finishing functions
- Group copy ...................................................... 35
- Offset function.................................................. 35
- Sort copy.......................................................... 35
- Staple sort........................................................ 37
[COPY] key ................................................. 21, 72, 74
G
Grayed out ............................................................. 11
Group copy............................................................. 35
[GROUP] key ......................................................... 36
90
H
Misfeed removal
Handles..................................................................... 8
Heavy paper............................................................ 15
How to place the original
- Document glass ............................................... 22
- RSPF ............................................................... 23
- Bypass tray ..................................................... 66
- Center tray ...................................................... 68
- Lower paper tray ............................................. 69
- Machine........................................................... 66
- Output tray ...................................................... 70
- RSPF............................................................... 65
- Upper exit tray................................................. 70
- Upper paper tray ............................................. 68
Misfeed removal guidance ..................................... 64
Mixed feeding......................................................... 25
Mode select keys ................................................... 10
Mode switching key................................................ 12
Multi shot copy ....................................................... 46
[MULTI SHOT] key........................................... 39, 46
I
icon (Job status screen).......................................... 12
Important points when inserting paper
in the bypass tray.................................................... 18
Important points when selecting an installation site.. 3
[INFORMATION] key .............................................. 64
Initial settings .......................................................... 14
[INTERRUPT] key............................................. 10, 34
Interrupting copy ..................................................... 34
N
J
Network scanner expansion kit .............................. 76
Normal copying
[JOB BUILD] key............................................... 39, 45
Job build mode.................................................. 23, 45
Job list..................................................................... 12
Job program
- Deleting............................................................ 55
- Executing ......................................................... 55
- Storing............................................................. 54
Job separator tray ............................................... 8, 76
[JOB STATUS] key ........................................... 10, 12
Job status screen.................................................... 12
- document glass............................................... 22
- RSPF............................................................... 23
Number of pages fed through the RSPF................ 53
Number of pages sent using the
network scanner function ....................................... 53
Number of sent and received fax pages ................ 53
Number of times the stapler was used................... 53
Number of two-sided copies................................... 53
Numeric keys ......................................................... 10
L
O
Label ....................................................................... 15
Layout ..................................................................... 46
Letterhead paper......................................... 15, 16, 27
List print............................................................. 51, 53
Loading paper ......................................................... 15
Loading paper in the bypass tray............................ 18
Loading the paper in the paper tray ........................ 17
Offset function.................................................. 35, 36
Offset tray................................................... 35, 71, 77
Operation panel........................................................ 8
Optional equipment................................................ 76
Orientation of the original (Staple sort) .................. 37
Original feed display............................................... 21
Original guides ......................................................... 8
Original image type
- Photo............................................................... 29
- Super photo..................................................... 29
- Text ................................................................. 29
- Text/photo ....................................................... 29
Original size ......................................... 22, 23, 24, 47
Original size display ............................................... 21
[ORIGINAL SIZE] key ...................................... 39, 47
Originals that can be used in the RSPF................. 24
[OUTPUT] key...................................... 21, 35, 36, 38
Output tray ............................................................. 70
M
Main screen of copy mode...................................... 21
[MANUAL] key......................................................... 47
Manual ratio selection ............................................. 31
Margin shift copy..................................................... 41
[MARGIN SHIFT] key........................................ 39, 41
Material safety data sheet....................................... 82
[MENU] key............................................................. 31
Message display ..................................................... 21
Misfed original......................................................... 65
Misfeed in an output tray......................................... 70
Misfeed in the bypass tray ...................................... 66
Misfeed in the center tray........................................ 68
Misfeed in the fusing area....................................... 67
Misfeed in the lower paper tray............................... 69
Misfeed in the machine ........................................... 66
Misfeed in the paper feed area ............................... 66
Misfeed in the upper exit area................................. 70
Misfeed in the upper paper tray .............................. 68
P
Pamphlet copy ....................................................... 44
[PAMPHLET COPY] key.................................. 39, 44
Paper...................................................................... 15
Paper capacity ....................................................... 15
Paper guide............................................................ 71
Paper misfeeds ...................................................... 62
Paper select display............................................... 21
[PAPER SELECT] key ................... 20, 21, 22, 23, 26
Paper size ........................................................ 15, 19
Paper size card ...................................................... 17
Paper size display.................................................. 21
91
Paper tray.......................................... 9, 15, 17, 19, 68
Paper type................................................... 15, 19, 20
Paper weight ........................................................... 15
Part names and functions
- Original size .................................................... 47
- Pamphlet copy ................................................ 44
[SPECIAL MODES] key ............................. 21, 39, 40
Special papers
- Operation panel ............................................... 10
Peripheral devices................................................... 76
Photoconductive drum ........................................ 9, 66
Plain paper.............................................................. 15
Points to note when making copies......................... 24
Power off................................................................. 13
Power on................................................................. 13
Power outlet .............................................................. 4
Power save modes
- Auto power shut-off mode................................ 14
- Preheat mode .................................................. 14
Power switch....................................................... 8, 13
Preset enlargement ratios....................................... 31
[PRINT JOB] key..................................................... 12
[PRINT] key
- Envelope ......................................................... 16
- Letterhead paper............................................. 16
special papers........................................................ 26
Specifications......................................................... 80
Staple box .............................................................. 73
Staple cartridge...................................................... 73
Staple cartridge replacement ................................ 73
Staple cover ..................................................... 74, 77
Staple jam removal ................................................ 74
Staple sort.............................................................. 37
[STAPLE SORT] key.............................................. 38
Stapler compiler ..................................................... 71
Stapler compiler cover ........................................... 70
Stapler cover.......................................................... 73
Stapling positions................................................... 37
[START] key............................................... 10, 22, 23
[STOP/DELETE] key.............................................. 12
Storage of supplies ................................................ 79
[STORE/DELETE] key ..................................... 54, 55
Stream feeding mode............................................. 23
- DATA indicator................................................. 10
- ONLINE indicator............................................. 10
Print server card...................................................... 76
Printer expansion kit................................................ 76
[PRIORITY] key....................................................... 12
PS3 expansion kit ................................................... 76
T
Q
Thin paper.............................................................. 15
Toner cartridge................................................... 9, 72
Toner cartridge lock release lever...................... 9, 72
Top cover ............................................................... 77
Top tray............................................................ 71, 77
Total count ....................................................... 51, 53
Total number of copies and printed pages............. 53
Total output count .................................................. 74
Touch panel ..................................................... 10, 11
Transparency film....................................... 15, 16, 27
Tray number..................................................... 15, 19
Tray settings......................................... 19, 20, 51, 53
[TRAY SETTINGS] key.................................... 19, 20
Troubleshooting ..................................................... 60
QWERTY configuration........................................... 53
R
[READ-END] key................................... 36, 38, 45, 46
Recycled paper ....................................................... 15
Reduction key ......................................................... 31
Reduction/enlargement/zoom ................................. 30
Release roller.......................................................... 65
Replacing the toner cartridge.................................. 72
Reversing tray..................................................... 8, 65
Roller rotating knob....................................... 9, 66, 67
Rotation copying ..................................................... 25
RSPF .................................................... 23, 24, 65, 81
S
U
[SCAN] key
Upper exit area....................................................... 70
Upper right side cover........................................ 9, 70
Using the touch panel ............................................ 11
- DATA indicator................................................. 10
Selecting the original image type ............................ 29
Setting the paper type in the bypass tray
- [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.............................. 20
- [PAPER SELECT] key ..................................... 20
Shift direction .......................................................... 41
Side cover ........................................................... 9, 67
Side cover handle ..................................................... 9
Sort copy................................................................. 35
[SORT] key.............................................................. 36
Special modes
- B/W reverse copy............................................. 50
- Cover copy....................................................... 48
- Dual page copy................................................ 43
- Erase copy....................................................... 42
- Job build mode................................................. 45
- Margin shift copy.............................................. 41
- Multi shot copy................................................. 46
W
warm-up ................................................................. 13
X
[X] key .................................................................... 33
XY ZOOM copying ................................................. 32
[XY ZOOM] key...................................................... 32
Y
[Y] key .................................................................... 33
92
INDEX BY PURPOSE
Preparations
Special modes, using
Bypass tray, loading paper in...................................18
Initial settings, returning to .......................................14
Paper size, changing................................................19
Paper type, changing ...............................................19
Paper, loading..........................................................17
Power, turning off.....................................................13
Power, turning on.....................................................13
- B/W reverse copy............................................. 50
- Cover copy....................................................... 48
- Dual page copy ................................................ 43
- Erase copy ....................................................... 42
- Job build mode................................................. 45
- Margin shift copy.............................................. 41
- Multi shot copy ................................................. 46
- Original size ..................................................... 47
- Pamphlet copy ................................................. 44
Staple sort function, using....................................... 37
Making copies
Auditing mode, copying when enabled ....................56
Automatic two-sided copying
- Document glass ................................................27
- RSPF ................................................................28
Bypass tray, copying from........................................26
Copy run, stopping.............................................22, 23
Copying
- Document glass ................................................22
- RSPF ................................................................23
Document glass, copying from.................................22
Enlarging/reducing copies
- Automatic ratio selection...................................30
- Manual ratio selection.......................................31
- XY zoom copying..............................................32
Exposure, adjusting..................................................29
Exposure, selecting..................................................29
Image orientation, changing...............................27, 28
Interrupt copying ......................................................34
Mixed feeding...........................................................25
Original image type, selecting..................................29
Paper size (tray), selecting manually .......................22
RSPF, copying from.................................................23
Special paper, copying on........................................26
Stream feeding mode, using ....................................23
Making the machine easier to use
Canceling a job ....................................................... 12
Canceling a job in progress..................................... 12
Date and time, setting ............................................. 53
Deleting a job .......................................................... 12
Display contrast, adjusting ...................................... 53
Job details, displaying............................................. 12
Job program, deleting ............................................. 55
Job program, executing........................................... 55
Job program, storing ............................................... 54
Keyboard, changing ................................................ 53
Lists, printing........................................................... 53
Priority, giving to a specified job.............................. 12
Total count, displaying ............................................ 53
Trays, configuring settings ...................................... 53
User settings, configuring........................................ 51
Troubleshooting and maintenance
Cleaning the machine ............................................. 75
Misfeeds, removing
- Bypass tray ...................................................... 66
- Center tray ....................................................... 68
- Lower paper tray .............................................. 69
- Machine............................................................ 66
- Output tray ....................................................... 70
- RSPF................................................................ 65
- Upper exit area................................................. 70
- Upper paper tray .............................................. 68
Staple cartridge, replacing ...................................... 73
Staple jams, removing............................................. 74
Toner cartridge, replacing ....................................... 72
Toner, checking....................................................... 74
Total output count, checking ................................... 74
Troubleshooting ...................................................... 60
Using convenient copy functions
Black and white reverse copying..............................50
Cover, adding to copies ...........................................48
Dual page copying ...................................................43
Erase copying ..........................................................42
Group copying, using ...............................................35
Large number of originals, copying..........................45
Margin, creating .......................................................41
Multi shot copying ....................................................46
Offset function, using ...............................................35
Original size, specifying ...........................................47
Pamphlet copying.....................................................44
Selecting finishing functions
- Group copying...................................................35
- Offset function...................................................35
- Sort copying......................................................35
- Staple sort function ...........................................37
Sort copying, using...................................................35
93
Connectors
Caution:
This connector is only intended for service purposes.
Any connection to this terminal may cause malfunctions
of the copy machine.
Instruction for service technician:
The cable length for the service terminal has to be less
than 10 feet (3 m).
RSPF connector
Finisher connector
Parallel connector
USB connector
For users in the USA
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING:
FCC Regulations state that any unauthorized changes or modifications to
this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment gener-
ates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the operation manual, may cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his own expense.
Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance
with standard.
NOTICE for users in the USA
BE SURE TO ASK YOUR AUTHORIZED SHARP DEALER ABOUT THE WAR-
RANTY THAT YOUR SELLING DEALER EXTENDS TO YOU. In order to assure
you, the end-user, of warranty protection, Sharp extends a limited warranty to each
of its authorized dealers and, in turn, requires each of its authorized dealers to
extend its own warranty to you on terms that are no less favorable than those given
to the dealer by Sharp. You should be aware, however, that Sharp does not itself
extend any warranties, either express or implied, directly to you, the end-user, and
no one is authorized to make any representations or warranties on behalf of Sharp.
Specifically, SHARP DOES NOT EXTEND TO YOU, THE END-USER, ANY EX-
PRESS WARRANTY OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR USE OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN CON-
NECTION WITH THE HARDWARE, SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE EMBODIED
IN, OR USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THIS PRODUCT. Sharp is not respon-
sible for any damages or loss, either direct, incidental or consequential, which you,
the end-user, may experience as a result of your purchase or use of the hardware,
software or firmware embodied in or used in conjunction with this Product. Your
sole remedy, in the event that you encounter any difficulties with this Product, is
against the authorized dealer from which you purchased the Product.
AR-M237 Digital Multifunctional System
AR-M277 Digital Multifunctional System
In the event that this authorized dealer does not honor its warranty commitments,
please contact the General Manager, Business Products Group, Sharp Electronics
Corporation, Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, NJ 07430-2135, so that Sharp can try to help
assure complete satisfaction of all the warranty rights to which you are entitled from
the authorized dealer.
MODEL
AR-M236
AR-M237
AR-M276
AR-M277
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM
SOFTWARE SETUP GUIDE
Page
• INTRODUCTION
Back cover
• SOFTWARE FOR THE SHARP
AR-M230/M270 SERIES
2
2
3
• BEFORE INSTALLATION
• INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
• CONNECTING TO A COMPUTER 10
• CONFIGURING THE PRINTER
DRIVER
11
•
CONFIGURING THE PC-FAX
DRIVER WHEN USING A USB CABLE
(if the PC-FAX driver is installed)
12
• HOW TO USE THE ONLINE
MANUAL
13
14
• TROUBLESHOOTING
INTRODUCTION
This manual explains how to install and configure the software that is required for the printer function
of the machine. The procedure for viewing the online manual is also explained.
®
• The screen images in this manual are mainly for Windows XP. With other versions of
Windows , some screen images may be different from those in this manual.
Note
®
• The explanations in this manual are based on the North American version of the software.
Versions for other countries and regions may vary slightly from the North American version.
• Where "AR-XXXX" appears in this manual, please substitute the name of your model for "XXXX".
For the name of your model, see "PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS" in the operation manual for
copier.
• This manual refers to the "SHARP Digital Multifunctional System AR-M230/M270 Series
Software CD-ROM" simply as "CD-ROM".
Trademark acknowledgments
• Microsoft® Windows® operating system is a trademark or copyright of Microsoft Corporation in the
U.S.A. and other countries.
• Windows® 95, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0, Windows® 2000, and Windows®
XP are trademarks or copyrights of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
• Acrobat® Reader Copyright© 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Adobe,
the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• IBM and PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SOFTWARE LICENSE
The SOFTWARE LICENSE will appear when you install the software from the CD-ROM. By using all
or any portion of the software on the CD-ROM or in the machine, you are agreeing to be bound by the
terms of the SOFTWARE LICENSE.
CONTENTS
SOFTWARE FOR THE SHARP AR-M230/M270 SERIES.................................................... 2
BEFORE INSTALLATION..................................................................................................... 2
● HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................2
● INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE....................................2
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE............................................................................................ 3
● INSTALLATION IN WINDOWS XP (USB/PARALLEL CABLE)..................................................3
● INSTALLATION IN WINDOWS 98/ME/2000 (USB CABLE).......................................................6
● INSTALLATION IN WINDOWS 95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000 (PARALLEL CABLE) ............................8
CONNECTING TO A COMPUTER...................................................................................... 10
● CONNECTING A USB CABLE .................................................................................................10
● CONNECTING A PARALLEL CABLE ......................................................................................10
CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER ............................................................................ 11
CONFIGURING THE PC-FAX DRIVER WHEN USING A USB CABLE (if the PC-FAX driver is installed)...... 12
HOW TO USE THE ONLINE MANUAL............................................................................... 13
TROUBLESHOOTING......................................................................................................... 14
1
SOFTWARE FOR THE SHARP
AR-M230/M270 SERIES
The CD-ROM that accompanies the machine contains the following software:
• Printer driver
The printer driver enables you to use the printer function of the machine.
• PC-FAX driver
The PC-FAX driver lets you easily send faxes from your computer through the machine to another
fax machine (when the facsimile expansion kit is installed).
* To use the PC-FAX driver, Internet Explorer 4.0 or later must be installed in your computer.
• Acrobat Reader 5.0
Software that allows you to view the online printer manual on your computer.
BEFORE INSTALLATION
HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
Check the following hardware and software requirements before installing the software.
1
Computer type
IBM PC/AT or compatible computer equipped with a USB 2.0/1.1* or
bi-directional parallel interface (IEEE 1284)
2
Operating system
Windows 95* , Windows 98, Windows Me,
*3
Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (Service Pack 5 or later) ,
*3
*3
Windows 2000 Professional , Windows XP Professional ,
*3
Windows XP Home Edition
Other hardware requirements An environment that allows any of the above operating systems to fully operate
*1 Compatible with Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Professional or
Windows XP Home Edition preinstalled models equipped with a USB interface as standard.
*2 If you are installing the PC-FAX driver, a system file must be updated before the driver can be installed. For
more information, click the "Display README" button in the select packages window of the installer. (p. 8)
*3 Administrator's rights are required to install the software using the installer.
INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT AND INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE
Follow the appropriate installation procedure for your operating system and type of cable as indicated below.
Operating system
Windows XP
Cable
Procedure to follow
USB/Parallel INSTALLATION IN WINDOWS XP (USB/PARALLEL CABLE) (p. 3)
Windows 98/Me/2000
Windows 98/Me/2000
USB
INSTALLATION IN WINDOWS 98/ME/2000 (USB CABLE) (p. 6)
Parallel
INSTALLATION IN WINDOWS 95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000 (PARALLEL
CABLE) (p. 8)
Windows 95/NT 4.0
Parallel
INSTALLATION IN WINDOWS 95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000 (PARALLEL
CABLE) (p. 8)
2
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
If an error message appears, follow the on-screen instructions to solve the problem. After the
problem is solved, the installation procedure will continue. Depending on the problem, you may
Note
have to click the "Cancel" button to exit the installer. In this case, reinstall the software from the
beginning after solving the problem.
INSTALLATION IN WINDOWS XP (USB/PARALLEL
CABLE)
The USB or parallel cable must not be
connected to the machine. Make sure
that the cable is not connected before
proceeding.
Select the checkboxes of the software
packages to be installed and then click
the "Next" button.
1
7
Click the "Display README" button to show
If the cable is connected, a Plug and Play
window will appear. If this happens, click the
"Cancel" button to close the window and
disconnect the cable.
information on packages that are selected.
The cable will be connected in step
12.
Note
Insert the CD-ROM into your computer's
CD-ROM drive.
2
3
Click the "start" button, click "My
Computer" ( ), and then double-click
the CD-ROM icon ( ).
The PC-FAX driver can only be used if
Note
the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
Double-click the "setup" icon ( ).
4
If the language selection screen
appears after you double click the
"setup" icon, select the language that
you wish to use and click the "Next"
button. (Normally the correct language
is selected automatically.)
Check the packages on the screen, and
then click the "Start" button.
The software packages to be installed will
be displayed on the screen. If an incorrect
package is displayed, click the "Back"
button and select the correct packages.
8
Note
The License Agreement window will
appear. Make sure that you understand
the contents of the license agreement,
and then click the "Yes" button.
5
6
Read the message in the "Welcome"
window and then click the "Next" button.
3
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
The files required for installation of the
Begin the installation of the PC-FAX
driver (if "PC-FAX Driver" was selected
in Step 7).
9
10
printer driver are copied (if "Printer
Driver" was selected in Step 7).
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
•
•
When the model selection window appears,
select model name of your machine.
When you are asked how the printer is
connected, select "Connected to this
computer" and click the "Next" button.
During installation of the PC-FAX driver, you
will be asked to select the port. If you are
using the USB port, select any port (such as
LPT1) and continue the installation. The port
settings are configured in the PC-FAX driver
properties after installation. (p. 12)
If the following screen appears while the
files are being copied (the message may
Caution
appear more than once), click the
"Continue Anyway" button.
Click the "Finish" button when the message
informs you that setup is successful.
When the "Finish" screen appears,
click the "Close" button.
When "After Windows system restarts,
connect the interface cable to the PC"
appears, click the "OK" button.
11
12
After the installation, a message
prompting you to restart your computer
Note
When "The installation of the SHARP
software is complete" appears, click the
"OK" button.
may appear. In this case, click the
"Yes" button to restart your computer.
Connect the interface cable to the
machine and your computer (p. 10).
• If you are using a USB cable, make
sure the machine's power is turned on
and then connect the cable.
• If you are using a parallel cable, turn
off the power of the machine and your
computer, connect the cable, turn on the
power of the machine, and then turn on
your computer.
Windows will detect the machine and the
Plug and Play screen will appear.
4
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
Begin installation of the printer driver.
13
"SHARP AR-XXXX" will appear in the
"Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box.
Select "Install the software automatically
(Recommended)" and click the "Next"
button. Follow the on-screen instructions.
If a warning window appears
regarding the "Windows logo test", be
Caution
sure to click the "Continue Anyway"
button.
This completes the installation of the
software.
• If you installed the printer driver, configure
the printer driver settings as explained in
"CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER"
(p. 11).
• If you installed the PC-FAX driver and are
using a USB connection, configure the
PC-FAX driver settings as explained in
"CONFIGURING THE PC-FAX DRIVER
WHEN USING A USB CABLE (if the PC-FAX
driver is installed)" (p. 12).
5
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
INSTALLATION IN WINDOWS 98/ME/2000 (USB CABLE)
The USB cable must not be connected
1
to the machine. Make sure that the
cable is not connected before
proceeding.
If the cable is connected, a Plug and Play
window will appear. If this happens, click the
"Cancel" button to close the window and
disconnect the cable.
The cable will be connected in step 12.
Note
The PC-FAX driver can only be used if
the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
Insert the CD-ROM into your computer's
CD-ROM drive.
Note
2
3
Double-click "My Computer" ( ), and
then double-click the CD-ROM icon
Check the packages on the screen, and
then click the "Start" button.
The software packages to be installed will
be displayed on the screen. If an incorrect
package is displayed, click the "Back"
button and select the correct packages.
8
9
(
).
Double-click the "setup" icon ( ).
4
If the language selection screen appears
after you double click the "setup" icon,
Note
The files required for installation of the
printer driver are copied (if "Printer
Driver" was selected in Step 7).
Follow the on-screen instructions.
select the language that you wish to use
and click the "Next" button. (Normally the
correct language is selected automatically.)
When you are asked how the printer is
connected, select "Connected to this
computer" and click the "Next" button.
The License Agreement window will
appear. Make sure that you understand
the contents of the license agreement,
and then click the "Yes" button.
5
Read the message in the "Welcome"
window and then click the "Next" button.
6
7
Select the checkboxes of the software
packages to be installed and then click
the "Next" button.
Click the "Display README" button to show
information on packages that are selected.
6
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
When the interface selection screen
appears, select "USB" and click the
"Next" button.
Click the "Finish" button when the
message informs you that setup is
successful.
In Windows 2000, if the following
screen appears while the files are
being copied (the message may
appear more than once), click the
"Yes" button.
When the "Finish" screen appears,
click the "Close" button.
When "After Windows system restarts,
connect the interface cable to the PC"
appears, click the "OK" button.
Caution
11
After the installation, a message
prompting you to restart your
Note
computer may appear. In this case,
click the "Yes" button to restart your
computer.
Make sure that the power of the
machine is turned on, and then
connect the USB cable. (p. 10)
Windows will detect the machine and the
Plug and Play screen will appear.
12
13
When "The installation of the SHARP
software is complete" appears, click the
"OK" button.
Follow the instructions in the Plug and
Play screen that appears in your
version of Windows to begin the
installation.
Begin the installation of the PC-FAX
driver (if "PC-FAX Driver" was selected
in Step 7).
10
Follow the on-screen instructions.
This completes the installation of the
software.
• If you installed the printer driver, configure
the printer driver settings as explained in
"CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER"
(p. 11).
• If you installed the PC-FAX driver, configure
the PC-FAX driver settings as explained in
"CONFIGURING THE PC-FAX DRIVER
WHEN USING A USB CABLE (if the PC-FAX
driver is installed)" (p. 12).
• When the model selection window
appears, select model name of your
machine.
• During installation of the PC-FAX driver,
you will be asked to select the port. If
you are using the USB port, select any
port (such as LPT1) and continue the
installation. The port settings are
configured in the PC-FAX driver
properties after installation. (p. 12)
7
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
INSTALLATION IN WINDOWS 95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000
(PARALLEL CABLE)
The USB or parallel cable must not be
1
connected to the machine. Make sure
that the cable is not connected before
proceeding.
If the cable is connected, a Plug and Play
window will appear. If this happens, click the
"Cancel" button to close the window and
disconnect the cable.
The cable will be connected in step 18.
Note
•
The PC-FAX driver can only be used if
the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
Insert the CD-ROM into your computer's
CD-ROM drive.
Note
2
3
• If you are installing the PC-FAX
driver, a system file must be
Double-click "My Computer" ( ), and
then double-click the CD-ROM icon
updated before the driver can be
installed. For more information, click
the "Display README" button.
(
).
Double-click the "setup" icon ( ).
4
Check the packages on the screen, and
then click the "Start" button.
The software packages to be installed will
be displayed on the screen. If an incorrect
package is displayed, click the "Back"
button and select the correct packages.
8
If the language selection screen appears
after you double click the "setup" icon,
Note
select the language that you wish to use
and click the "Next" button. (Normally the
correct language is selected automatically.)
Begin installation of the printer driver (if
"Printer Driver" was selected in Step 7).
Follow the on-screen instructions.
If you are using Windows 95/NT 4.0, go to
step 12.
9
The License Agreement window will
appear. Make sure that you understand
the contents of the license agreement,
and then click the "Yes" button.
5
Read the message in the "Welcome"
window and then click the "Next" button.
When you are asked how the printer is
connected, select "Connected to this
computer" and click the "Next" button.
6
7
10
Select the checkboxes of the software
packages to be installed and then click
the "Next" button.
Click the "Display README" button to show
information on packages that are selected.
8
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
When the interface selection screen
appears, select "Parallel" and click the
"Next" button.
When "The installation of the SHARP
software is complete" appears, click
the "OK" button.
11
12
15
16
Begin the installation of the PC-FAX driver
(if "PC-FAX Driver" was selected in Step 7).
Follow the on-screen instructions.
•
When the model selection window appears,
select model name of your machine.
• During installation of the PC-FAX driver,
you will be asked to select the port. If
you are using the parallel port, select
"LPT1" and continue the installation.
Select the printer port and click the
"Next" button.
Select "LPT1" for the printer port.
Click the "Finish" button when the message
informs you that setup is successful.
When the "Finish" screen appears,
click the "Close" button.
When "After Windows system restarts,
connect the interface cable to the PC"
appears, click the "OK" button.
17
18
If "LPT1" does not appear, another printer
or peripheral device is using LPT1. In this
Note
case continue the installation, and after the
installation is finished, change the port
setting so that the machine can use LPT1.
This procedure is explained in "Another
printer is using the parallel port (when
using a parallel cable)" on page 14.
After the installation, a message
prompting you to restart your computer
Note
may appear. In this case, click the "Yes"
button to restart your computer.
When the model selection window
appears, select model name of your
machine and click the "Next" button.
For the model name of your machine, see
"PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS" in the
operation manual for copier.
13
14
Turn off the power of the machine and
your computer, and connect the
machine to your computer with the
parallel cable. (p. 10)
After connecting the machine to your
computer, turn on the power of the
machine and then start up your computer.
Click the "Yes" button.
This completes the installation of the software.
•
If you installed the printer driver, configure the
printer driver settings as explained in
"CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER" (p. 11).
9
CONNECTING TO A COMPUTER
Follow the procedure below to connect the machine to your computer.
Interface cables for connecting the machine to your computer are not included with the machine.
Please purchase the appropriate cable for your computer.
Interface cable
USB cable
Shielded twisted pair cable, high-speed transmission equivalent (9 feet (3 m) max.)
If the machine will be connected using a USB 2.0 interface, please purchase a USB cable that
supports USB 2.0.
Parallel cable
IEEE 1284-Shielded type bi-directional parallel interface cable (9 feet (3 m) max.)
•
USB is available on a PC/AT compatible computer that was originally equipped with USB and had
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Professional or Windows XP
Home Edition preinstalled.
Caution
• Do not connect the interface cable before installing the printer driver. The interface cable must be
connected during installation of the printer driver.
CONNECTING A USB CABLE
Insert the cable into the USB port on
the machine.
Insert the other end of the cable into
your computer's USB port.
1
2
The cable can also be inserted into a
USB 1.1 port. However, performance
Note
will be the same as USB 1.1.
CONNECTING A PARALLEL CABLE
Ensure that your computer and the
machine are turned off.
Insert the other end of the cable into
your computer's parallel port.
1
2
3
Insert the cable into the parallel port on
the machine and fasten with the clasps.
10
CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER
After installing the printer driver, you must configure the printer driver settings appropriately for the
number of paper trays on the machine and the size of paper loaded in each tray.
Click the "start" button, click "Control
Panel", click "Printers and Other
Hardware", and then click "Printers and
Faxes".
In operating systems other than Windows XP,
click the "Start" button, select "Settings", and
then click "Printers".
Click the "Set Tray Status" button and
select the size of paper that is loaded in
each tray.
Select a tray in the "Paper source" menu,
and select the size of paper loaded in that
tray from the "Setting Paper Size" menu.
Repeat for each tray.
1
5
Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" printer
driver icon and select "Properties"
from the "File" menu.
2
If you are using Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP, go to
step 4.
In Windows 95/98/Me, click the "Setup"
tab.
3
4
Click the "Configuration" tab and set
the printer configuration based on the
options that have been installed.
Set the printer configuration properly.
Otherwise, printing may not take place
correctly.
Click the "OK" button in the "Set Tray
Status" window.
6
7
Click the "OK" button in the printer
properties window.
11
CONFIGURING THE PC-FAX DRIVER
WHEN USING A USB CABLE (if the
PC-FAX driver is installed)
When the PC-FAX function is used with a USB cable, the port used by the PC-FAX driver must be
configured. The PC-FAX driver uses the USB port that was created when the printer driver was
installed. Configure the port after installing the printer driver (pages 3 to 9).
Click the "start" button, click "Control
Panel", click "Printers and Other
Hardware", and then click "Printers and
Faxes".
In operating systems other than Windows XP,
click the "Start" button, select "Settings", and
then click "Printers".
Click the "Ports" tab and select a USB
port (for example, USB001) in the list.
In Windows 98/Me, click the "Details" tab
and select USB port in the "Print to the
following port" list box.
1
3
Click the PC-FAX driver icon and select
"Properties" from the "File" menu.
2
• The USB port name will vary
depending on the number of USB
Note
ports created on your computer. If
the port created during installation of
the printer driver is your first USB
port, the name will be "USB001".
•
Select the USB port being used by the
AR-M230/M270 series printer driver.
The port used by the printer driver is
indicated by a checkmark in the
"Ports" tab of the printer driver
properties window. (In Windows
98/Me, the port is selected in "Print to
the following port" in the "Details" tab.)
Click the "OK" button.
4
12
HOW TO USE THE ONLINE MANUAL
The online manual provides detailed instructions for operating the machine as a printer. View the
online manual when you use the printer function after the initial setup is completed.
Contents of the online manual
The contents of the online manual are as follows.
How to use the online manual: Explains how to use the online manual.
Print: Provides information on how to print a document.
Printer sharing: Explains how to configure the machine for use as a shared printer.
Troubleshooting: Provides instructions on how to solve driver or software problems.
To view the online manual, your computer must have Acrobat Reader 5.0 or later. If you do not
have Acrobat Reader, follow the instructions in "Installing Acrobat Reader" to install it.
Note
Insert the CD-ROM into your computer's
CD-ROM drive.
Double-click the "Manual" folder,
double-click the "EnglishA" folder (for
regions other than the U.S.,
double-click the "English" folder), and
then double-click the
1
2
3
Click the "start" button, click "My
Computer" ( ), and then double-click
the CD-ROM icon ( ).
In Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000,
double-click "My Computer" and then
double-click the CD-ROM icon.
"AR_M230_M270.pdf" icon.
The online manual will appear.
• If you will be viewing the online manual repeatedly, you may find it convenient to copy this online
manual file to your computer.
Note
• The online manual can be printed out using Acrobat Reader. SHARP recommends printing out
the sections which you refer to regularly.
• Refer to "Help" of Acrobat Reader for more details on how to use Acrobat Reader.
Installing Acrobat Reader
Insert the CD-ROM into your computer's
CD-ROM drive.
1
Click the "start" button, click "My
Computer" ( ), and then double-click
the CD-ROM icon ( ).
2
In Windows 95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000,
double-click "My Computer" and then
double-click the CD-ROM icon.
Double-click the "Acrobat" folder, and
then double-click the "ar500enu.exe"
icon.
3
Follow the on-screen instructions to install
Acrobat Reader.
13
TROUBLESHOOTING
If the software does not install correctly, check the following items on your computer.
To remove the software, see "Uninstalling the printer driver" in the online manual.
Troubleshooting information can also be found in the README files for each of the software programs.
To view a README file, click the "Display README" button in the "Select Packages" screen. (p.3, 6, 8)
Printer driver cannot be
installed (Windows 2000/XP)
Another printer is using the parallel
port (when using a parallel cable)
If the printer driver cannot be installed in
Windows 2000/XP, follow these steps to check
your computer's settings.
If another printer is using the parallel port and
printing is not possible using the machine, follow
the steps below to change the port setting of the
other printer driver, and make sure that the port of
the printer driver for the machine is set to LPT1.
Click the "start" button and then click
1
"Control Panel".
In Windows 2000, click the "Start" button,
select "Settings", and then click "Control
Panel".
Click the "start" button, click "Control
1
Panel", click "Printers and Other
Hardware", and then click "Printers and
Faxes".
In Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, click
the "Start" button, select "Settings", and
then click "Control Panel".
Click "Performance and Maintenance",
2
and then click "System".
In Windows 2000, double-click the
"System" icon.
Click the icon of the printer driver for which
you wish to change the port setting, and
select "Properties" from the "File" menu.
2
Click the "Hardware" tab and then click
the "Driver Signing" button.
3
Click the "Ports" tab.
In Windows 95/98/Me, click the "Details" tab.
Check "What action do you want
Windows to take?" ("File signature
verification" in Windows 2000).
3
4
Select "FILE:" in the "Print to the following
port" list box, and click the "OK" button.
4
Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" printer
driver icon and select "Properties"
from the "File" menu.
5
Click the "Ports" tab.
In Windows 95/98/Me, click the "Details" tab.
6
If the option "Block" has been selected, it
will not be possible to install the printer
driver. Select the option "Warn" and then
install the printer driver as explained in
"INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE".
Select "LPT1" in the "Print to the
following port" list box, and click the
"OK" button.
7
In the event that you need to use the
other printer, repeat the above steps
Note
to set the port of the machine to
"FILE:", and change the port setting of
the other printer back to "LPT1".
14
TROUBLESHOOTING
The printer driver cannot be
correctly installed by Plug and
Play (Windows 2000/XP)
In Windows 2000/XP, if the printer driver cannot
be correctly installed by Plug and Play (for
example, Plug and Play takes place without
copying the required files for the printer driver
installation), follow these steps to remove
unneeded devices and then install the printer
driver as explained in "INSTALLING THE
SOFTWARE" (p. 3).
Plug and play screen does not
appear (when using a USB cable)
If the Plug and Play screen does not appear
after you connect the machine to your computer
with a USB cable and turn on the machine,
follow the steps below to verify that the USB
port is available.
Click the "start" button, click "Control
Panel", and then click "Performance
and Maintenance".
1
In Windows 98/Me/2000, click the "Start"
button, select "Settings", and then click
"Control Panel".
Click the "start" button, click "Control
Panel", and then click "Performance
and Maintenance".
1
Click "System", click the "Hardware"
tab, and click the "Device Manager"
button.
In Windows 2000, click the "Start" button,
select "Settings", and then click "Control
Panel".
2
"Universal Serial Bus controllers" will
appear in the list of devices.
Click "System", click the "Hardware"
tab, and click the "Device Manager"
button.
2
• In Windows 98/Me, double-click the
Note
"System" icon and click the "Device
Manager" tab.
In Windows 2000, double-click the
• In Windows 2000, double-click the
"System" icon, click the "Hardware"
tab, and click the "Device Manager"
button.
Note
"System" icon, click the "Hardware"
tab, and click the "Device Manager"
button.
• If the "System" icon does not appear
in Windows Me, click "view all
Control Panel options".
Click the
devices".
icon beside "Other
3
4
Click the
icon beside "Universal
3
4
Serial Bus controllers".
If "SHARP AR-XXXX" appears, select and
delete it.
If "Other devices" does not appear,
Note
close the "Device Manager" window.
Two items should appear: your controller
chipset type and Root Hub. If these items
appear, you can use the USB port. If the
"Universal Serial Bus controllers" shows a
yellow exclamation point or does not
appear, you must check your computer
manual for USB troubleshooting or contact
your computer manufacturer.
Install the software as explained in
"INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE".
Once you have verified that the USB
port is enabled, install the software as
explained in "INSTALLING THE
SOFTWARE".
15
MODEL
AR-FX7
FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT
OPERATION MANUAL
Page
• BEFORE USING THE
FAX FEATURE
4
• BASIC OPERATIONS
12
•
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION
METHODS
26
51
• TRANSMISSION USING
F-CODES
• CONVENIENT METHODS
OF USE
61
65
83
• PROGRAMMING
• TROUBLESHOOTING
• KEY OPERATOR
PROGRAMS
90
• APPENDIX
106
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
WARNING:
FCC Regulations state that any unauthorized changes or modifications to this
equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user's
authority to operate this equipment.
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his
own expense.
Caution
• Use only the line cable that was provided with the machine.
• To reduce the risk of fire, use only UL-Listed No.26 AWG or larger
telecommunication line cord.
Note
• This manual (fax function) describes the AR-M237/AR-M277 model with
optional job separator tray kit (AR-TR3), and optional facsimile expansion
kit (AR-FX7) installed. Depending on the model you have and on the
options installed, some of the illustrations in this manual may be different,
however, the basic operations are the same.
• This manual (fax function) refers to the Reversing Single Pass Feeder as
the "RSPF".
INTRODUCTION
TYPE OF SERVICE
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party lines is
subject to state tariffs. Contact your state's public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation
commission for more information.
ABOUT THE TELEPHONE CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT OF 1991
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other
electronic device, including FAX machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin
at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and
an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number
of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual.
(The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or
long-distance transmission charges.)
In order to program this information into your FAX machine, you should complete the following steps:
See page 97 of this Operation manual.
Important safety information
• If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your
telephone line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network.
• The AC power outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
• Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
• Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
• Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the
network interface.
• Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
• Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of
electric shock from lightning.
• Do not use a telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
• Do not install or use the machine near water, or when you are wet. Take care not to spill any liquids on the
machine.
i
FCC Notice to users:
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA.
On this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format
US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call.
In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0).
To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the
local telephone company.
For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the
format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3).
For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, your telephone company may disconnect your service
temporarily. If possible, They will notify you in advance. If advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as soon
as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a compliant with the FCC.
Your telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect
the operation of your equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you
to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service. If the equipment is causing harm to the
telephone network, your telephone company may ask you to disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
If you have any questions or problems which cannot be solved by reading this manual, please contact
Sharp Electronics Corporation
P.O. Box 650
Mahwah, NJ 07430-2135
Telephone: 1-800-BE-SHARP
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the
applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA.
A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product.
It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for
details.
This equipment connects to the telephone network through a standard USOC RJ-11C network interface jack.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this
equipment does not disable your alarm equipment.
If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified
installer.
ii
CONTENTS
CONTENTS................................................................................................................................................ 1
TO USE THIS PRODUCT CORRECTLY AS A FACSIMILE..................................................................... 3
BEFORE USING THE FAX FEATURE
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS
1
3
SETTINGS REQUIRED FOR THE FAX
FUNCTION........................................................ 4
SENDING THE SAME DOCUMENT TO MULTIPLE
DESTINATIONS IN A SINGLE OPERATION
(BROADCAST TRANSMISSION)......................... 26
G USING BROADCAST TRANSMISSION....... 27
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS.................... 5
G OPERATION PANEL.......................................5
G PARTS OF THE MACHINE .............................6
FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES TO ANOTHER
MACHINE WHEN PRINTING IS NOT POSSIBLE ..28
G USING THE FAX FORWARD FUNCTION ... 29
G
FAX MODE (CONDITION SETTING SCREEN)......7
ORIGINALS....................................................... 9
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AT A
G ORIGINALS THAT CAN BE FAXED................9
SPECIFIED TIME (TIMER TRANSMISSION)..30
G SETTING UP A TIMER TRANSMISSION..... 30
LOADING AN ORIGINAL ............................... 10
G USING THE RSPF.........................................10
G USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS.................10
TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION USING THE
POLLING FUNCTION ........................................32
G USING THE POLLING FUNCTION .............. 33
G USING POLLING MEMORY......................... 35
CONVENIENT DIALING METHODS .............. 11
G AUTO-DIALING .............................................11
G REDIALING....................................................11
G ON-HOOK DIALING ......................................11
FAXING A THIN-SHEET DOCUMENT USING
THE RSPF........................................................39
FAXING A DIVIDED ORIGINAL (DUAL PAGE
SCAN)..............................................................40
BASIC OPERATIONS
2
PROGRAMMING FREQUENTLY USED
OPERATIONS..................................................41
G USING A PROGRAM.................................... 41
SENDING A FAX ............................................ 12
G
BASIC PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES...12
TRANSMISSION BY AUTO-DIALING (RAPID DIALING
AND GROUP DIALING) ......................................16
TRANSMITTING A TWO-SIDED DOCUMENT ..17
G
ADDING A COVER SHEET TO A FAX
TRANSMISSION..............................................42
G ADDING A COVER SHEET.......................... 42
G ADDING A MESSAGE.................................. 43
G
G FAXING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES.....18
MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE .. 20
OWN NUMBER SENDING ..............................44
SELECTING RESOLUTION AND EXPOSURE
SETTINGS....................................................... 21
G SELECTING THE RESOLUTION..................21
G SELECTING THE EXPOSURE .....................22
G
SELECTING THE SENDER INFORMATION THAT
APPEARS ON A FAX TRANSMISSION ................ 45
SENDING AND RECEIVING CONFIDENTIAL
FAXES .............................................................46
G CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION ............... 47
G PRINTING A FAX RECEIVED IN A
PRIORITY TRANSMISSION OF A STORED
JOB ................................................................. 23
CANCELING A FAX TRANSMISSION........... 24
CONFIDENTIAL BOX ................................... 48
RECEIVING FAXES........................................ 25
SENDING FAXES USING THE RELAY
REQUEST FUNCTION ....................................49
G RECEIVING A FAX........................................25
G
USING THE RELAY REQUEST FUNCTION ... 50
1
TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES
PROGRAMMING
4
6
TRANSMISSION BETWEEN MACHINES
PROGRAMMING .............................................65
SUPPORTING F-CODES................................ 51
STORING, EDITING, AND DELETING AUTO DIAL
KEYS, PROGRAMS, AND RELAY GROUPS..........65
G STORING RAPID DIAL KEYS ...................... 67
G
MEMORY BOXES AND
SUB-ADDRESSES/PASSCODES REQUIRED
FOR F-CODE TRANSMISSION.......................52
G
EDITING AND DELETING RAPID KEYS ............. 70
G ENTERING A SUB-ADDRESS AND
G PROGRAMMING A GROUP KEY ................ 71
G EDITING AND DELETING GROUP KEYS ... 72
G STORING A PROGRAM............................... 73
G EDITING AND DELETING PROGRAMS...... 74
G STORING RELAY GROUPS ........................ 75
PASSCODE FOR A MEMORY BOX IN THE
OTHER MACHINE.........................................53
G CREATING A MEMORY BOX FOR F-CODE
TRANSMISSION............................................53
F-CODE POLLING MEMORY......................... 54
G USING F-CODE POLLING MEMORY...........55
G PROCEDURE FOR F-CODE POLLING........56
G
EDITING AND DELETING A RELAY GROUP... 77
STORING A GROUP INDEX ...........................78
PRINTING PROGRAMMED INFORMATION..79
ENTERING CHARACTERS.............................80
F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION .. 57
G
F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION.....57
PRINTING A DOCUMENT RECEIVED TO AN
F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL MEMORY BOX.........58
G
TROUBLESHOOTING
7
F-CODE RELAY BROADCAST
TRANSMISSION............................................. 59
WHEN A TRANSACTION REPORT IS PRINTED ..83
G
USING THE F-CODE RELAY BROADCAST
VIEWING THE COMMUNICATION ACTIVITY
REPORT ..........................................................85
FUNCTION (your machine is the relay machine)....60
USING THE F-CODE RELAY REQUEST FUNCTION
(your machine requests a relay broadcast) ...............60
G
PRINTING REPORTS......................................85
WHEN AN ALARM SOUNDS AND A WARNING
MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED .............................86
CONVENIENT METHODS OF USE
5
TROUBLESHOOTING.....................................87
G FAX PROBLEMS .......................................... 88
CONNECTING AN EXTENSION PHONE....... 61
G CONNECTING AN EXTENSION PHONE .....61
G SENDING A FAX AFTER TALKING ON THE
PHONE (MANUAL TRANSMISSION) ...........61
G RECEIVING A FAX AFTER TALKING
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
8
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM LIST................91
(MANUAL RECEPTION)................................62
G KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM MENU........... 93
FAXING A DOCUMENT FROM A COMPUTER
(PC-FAX)......................................................... 64
G USING PC-FAX TRANSMISSION.................64
USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS..94
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS FOR THE FAX
FUNCTION.......................................................96
G FAX SETTINGS ............................................ 96
G LIST PRINT................................................. 105
APPENDIX
9
SPECIFICATIONS .........................................107
INDEX ............................................................108
2
TO USE THIS PRODUCT
CORRECTLY AS A FACSIMILE
Several points must be kept in mind when using this product as a facsimile.
Please note the following:
Connecting the telephone line cord
Use only the provided telephone line cord to connect the
machine to the wall telephone jack. As shown in the illustration,
connect the end of the cord that has the core to the LINE jack
on the side of the machine. Connect the other end (without the
core) to the wall jack.
TEL jack
Insert the plug firmly until
you hear a "click".
Power switch
Keep the machine's power switch turned on at all times.
Faxes cannot be received if the power is turned off.
ON
Lithium battery
A lithium battery inside the unit keeps settings and programmed information in memory.
• When the battery dies, settings and programmed information will be lost. Be sure to keep a written record of the
settings and programmed information. ("PRINTING PROGRAMMED INFORMATION" (p.79))
• Battery power is consumed when the machine's power switch is turned off. (Power is consumed even if no settings
or information are stored in the machine.) When the machine's power switch is turned on, almost no battery power
is consumed.
• The life of the lithium battery is approximately 5 years if the power switch are kept continually off.
• In the unlikely event that the battery expires, a message will appear in the display and the unit will not operate
correctly. If this should occurr please contact your Authorized Sharp Dealer or Service Center.
Other information
• If a thunderstorm occurs, we recommend that you unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Information will be
retained in memory even if the power cord is unplugged.
3
Chapter 1
BEFORE USING THE FAX FEATURE
1
This chapter contains basic information about using the fax function of this product. Please read this chapter before
using the unit as a fax machine.
SETTINGS REQUIRED FOR THE
FAX FUNCTION
Before using the unit as a fax machine, make sure that the following information has been programmed correctly.
Make sure the correct date and time have been set
Make sure the correct date and time have been programmed in the unit (refer to "CUSTOM SETTINGS" of
operation manual for copier). If the date and time are wrong, please correct.
It is important to set the correct date and time because they are used for such features as Timer Transmission
(p.30).
Daylight Saving Time Setting
Enable this setting to have the internal clock automatically move forward and backward at the beginning and end of
Daylight Saving Time. The clock will move forward and backward as follows:
The first Sunday in April: 2:00 A.M. 3:00 A.M.
The last Sunday in October: 2:00 A.M. 1:00 A.M.
Follow these steps to enable Daylight Saving Time.
1 Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.
2 Touch the [CLOCK] key.
3 Select the [DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME SETTING] checkbox.
4 Touch the [OK] key.
Program the sender's name and sender's number
Refer to "OWN NUMBER AND NAME SET" (p.97) to program the name and fax number of the user of this product
using the key operator programs. The programmed name and number are printed at the top of each transmitted fax
page. The sender's number is also used as an identification number when you use the Polling function to request
transmission from another fax machine ("USING THE POLLING FUNCTION" (p.33)).
You can check your programmed name and number by printing out the Sender List. ("PRINTING REPORTS"
(p.85))
Note
Important
FCC regulations require that your name, telephone/fax number, and the date and time appear on each fax message
you send. Enter your name and fax number here and set the date and time as explained in the following section to
have the fax machine include this information automatically at the top of your fax messages.
4
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
OPERATION PANEL
Operation panel keys and keys displayed on the touch panel that are used for fax are explained here.
1
2
3
4
5
COPY
1
ON LINE
DATA
PRINT
SCAN
FAX
DATA
LINE
DATA
CUSTOM SETTINGS
JOB STATUS
ACC.#-C
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
7
Touch panel (p.7)
[JOB STATUS] key (p.23)
• Messages and keys appears in the touch panel.
Use to check the status of a job.
A key can be touched to select or enter a setting.
8
DATA light
• When you touch a key, a beep sounds and the
key is highlighted to indicate that it has been
selected.
• Keys that cannot be selected in a screen are
grayed out. If a grayed out key is touched, a
double beep will sound to indicate that the key
cannot be selected.
This light blinks when a fax has been received to
memory.
The light stays on constantly when a fax is waiting
in memory for transmission.
9
[CUSTOM SETTINGS] key
Use to customize the machine settings to better
suit your needs. See "CUSTOM SETTINGS" in the
operation manual for copier. When using the fax
function, destinations can be stored (p.65) and
settings for fax reception (p.62) and fax forwarding
(p.29) can be selected.
2
3
4
5
Mode select keys
Use to select the basic modes of the machine.
LINE light
This lights while a fax is being sent or received.
10
[ACC.#-C] key (
)
Numeric keys
Use for settings that require the entry of numbers.
Press to use the fax function when auditing mode
is enabled. (See "AUDITING MODE" in operation
manual for copier.) This key can also be used to
issue tone signals when the machine is connected
to a pulse dial line.
[CLEAR] key (
)
This is used to clear a mistake when entering a
number. One digit is cleared each time the key is
pressed. The key is also used to cancel scanning
of an original.
11
12
[START] key ( ) (p.13)
Press to begin scanning an original for fax
transmission.
6
[FAX] key (p.7)
Press to switch to fax mode. The initial screen of
fax mode will appear in the touch panel display.
[CLEAR ALL] key (
)
Use to cancel a transmission or programming
operation. When the key is pressed, the operation
is canceled and you return to the initial screen
(p.7).
When sending a fax, this key is also used to cancel
an image setting, paper size setting, or special
function.
5
BEFORE USING THE FAX FEATURE
PARTS OF THE MACHINE
1
2
3
4
11
5
6
7
8
9
13
12
10
1
8
9
Exit area
Front cover
Open this cover to remove a misfeed. (See the
operation manual for copier.)
The original exits here after transmission or
scanning into memory.
2
Document feeder tray
Paper trays
Place the original face-up in this tray for
transmission.(p.10)
These hold the paper that is used for fax reception
and copying. Each tray holds approximately 500
sheets of paper. (See the operation manual for
copier.)
3
Original guides
Adjust these guides to match the width of the
original.(p.10)
10
11
Power switch
Turns the power on and off.(p.3)
4
Document glass
Books and other originals that cannot be inserted
into the RSPF can be placed here.(p.10)
Speaker
The line can be heard through the speaker during
on-hook dialing, as well as the beep that signals
the completion of a fax transmission.
5
Operation panel (p.5)
6
Job separator tray
Received faxes are delivered to this tray. Fax
function lists are also delivered here after printing.
*The job separator tray cannot be used when a
finisher is installed. Also, the output tray can be
changed using a key operator program for the
copy function. See "OUTPUT TRAYS" in the key
operator’s guide.
12
13
LINE jack
Insert the telephone line cord here.(p.3)
TEL jack
Connect an extension telephone here.(p.61)
For parts of the machine that are related to
Note
both faxing and copying (parts related to
removing misfeeds, loading paper, etc.), see
"PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS" in the
operation manual for copier.
7
Center tray
The output tray for received faxes can be changed
to the center tray using the key operator programs
for the copy function.
6
BEFORE USING THE FAX FEATURE
FAX MODE (CONDITION SETTING SCREEN)
The condition setting screen of fax mode is displayed by pressing the [FAX] key while the print mode, copy mode, or
job status screen appears in the touch panel. In the explanations that follow, it is assumed that the initial screen that
appears after pressing the [FAX] key is the condition setting screen (shown below). If you have set the display to
show the address directory (p.8) when the [FAX] key is pressed, touch the [CONDITION SETTINGS] key in the
address directory to display the condition setting screen.
A key operator program can be used to set the display to show either the condition setting screen (shown below) or
the address directory screen (p.8) when the [FAX] key is pressed ("DEFAULT DISPLAY SETTINGS" (p.96)).
Condition setting screen
The display is initially set (factory setting) to show the following screen when the [FAX] key is pressed.
1
1
2
3
4
READY TO SEND.
SPEAKER
REDIAL
14
13
FAX MEMORY:100%
AUTO RECEPTION
ADDRESS
BOOK
AUTO
5
EXPOSURE
SUB ADDRESS
ADDRESS REVIEW
MEMORY TX
6
7
STANDARD
12
11
RESOLUTION
SPECIAL MODES
DIRECT TX
AUTO
ORIGINAL
8
10
9
1
8
Message display
[DIRECT TX
MEMORY TX] key (p.14)
Messages appear here to indicate the current
status of the machine. When the machine is ready
to send, an icon appears to the left.
Touch this key to switch from memory
transmission mode to direct transmission mode.
The selected mode is highlighted.
2
3
9
Memory and reception mode display
This shows the amount of fax memory that is free
and the currently selected reception mode.
[SPECIAL MODES] key
Touch this key to select one of the following
special functions:
• Timer transmission (p.30) • Polling (p.33)
• Slow scan mode (p.39) • Dual page scan (p.40)
• Program (p.41) • Memory box (p.48)
• Cover sheet (p.42) • TX message (p.43)
• Sending options (p.47 and p.50)
[SPEAKER] key (p.11)
This key is used for dialing with the speaker.
During dialing it changes into the [PAUSE] key,
and after pressing the [SUB ADDRESS] key it
changes into the [SPACE] key.
• Own passcode select (p.45)
4
5
[REDIAL] key (p.11)
10
Original settings icon display
Touch this key to redial the most recently dialed
number. After dialing, this key changes into the
[NEXT ADDRESS] key.
When two-sided scanning (p.17) or job build mode
(p.18) is selected (touch the [ORIGINAL] key to
select these functions), an icon will appear in this
display.
[ADDRESS BOOK] key (p.16)
The icon can be touched to open the original
settings screen.
This displays the Address Directory screen (p.8).
Touch this key when you want to use an auto-dial
number (rapid dialing or group dialing).
11
12
[ORIGINAL] key (p.20)
Touch this key to manually set the original size or
select two-sided scanning.
6
7
[SUB ADDRESS] key (p.53)
Touch this key to enter a sub-address or
passcode.
[RESOLUTION] key (p.21)
[ADDRESS REVIEW] key (p.27)
Touch this key to change the resolution setting
when scanning an original. The selected resolution
setting will be highlighted above the key. The initial
factory setting is [STANDARD].
When performing a broadcast transmission, touch
this key to check your selected destinations. A list
of your selected destinations will appear, and
destinations can be deleted from the list.
7
BEFORE USING THE FAX FEATURE
13
14
[EXPOSURE] key (p.22)
Special function icon display
Touch this key to change the scanning exposure.
The selected exposure is highlighted above the
key. The initial factory setting is [AUTO].
When a special function such as polling or dual
page scan is selected, the special function icon
appears here.
Address directory screen (alphabetically ordered)
If "DEFAULT DISPLAY SETTINGS" (p.96) is set to address directory, the following screen will be the initial screen
that appears when the [FAX] key is pressed.
2
READY TO SEND.
SPEAKER
REDIAL
CONDITION
SETTINGS
A
C
E
G
B
D
F
3
1
SUB ADDRESS
ADDRESS REVIEW
H
FREQUENT USE
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQRST
UVWXYZ
ABC
GROUP
5
4
1
4
5
Rapid key display
[ABC
GROUP] key
This shows the rapid keys that have been stored
on the selected "index card". The display is initially
set to show 8 keys. This can be changed to 6 or 12
using a key operator program. ("THE NUMBER OF
DIRECT ADDRESS KEYS DISPLAYED
SETTING" (p.96))
Touch this key to switch between the alphabetical
index and the group index.
Index keys (p.78)
Destinations programmed in auto-dialing are
stored in indexes. In the alphabetical index, the
destinations appear in alphabetical order. In the
group indexes, the destinations appear in the order
of their control numbers. Touch the [ABC
2
3
Display switching keys
In cases where the rapid keys cannot all be
displayed on one screen, this shows how many
screens are left. Touch the
through the screens.
GROUP] key to switch between indexes.
keys to move
The group indexes can be used as follows:
• For storing destinations in groups. (p.67)
• A name can be assigned to each index. (p.78)
[CONDITION SETTINGS] key
This displays the condition setting screen (p.7),
which is used to set various conditions.
The screen showed above is the alphabetical address book. If desired, the initial screen can be set to the group
address book. ("DEFAULT DISPLAY SETTINGS" (p.96))
Note
8
ORIGINALS
ORIGINALS THAT CAN BE FAXED
Original sizes
Minimum original size
Maximum original size
Using the RSPF
8-1/2" (width) x 5-1/2" (length)
(210 mm (width) x 148 mm (length))
5-1/2" (width) x 8-1/2" (length)
(148 mm (width) x 210 mm (length))
11" (width) x 39.3"* (length)
(297 mm (width) x 1000 mm (length))
* Long originals can be loaded.
Using the document glass
11" (width) x 17" (length)
1
(297 mm (width) x 420 mm (length))
• Originals that are not a standard size (5-1/2" x 8-1/2", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 8-1/2" x 14",
11" x 17") can also be faxed.
Note
• There are restrictions on originals that can be scanned using the RSPF. See "POINTS TO NOTE WHEN
MAKING COPIES" in the operation manual for copier.
*Long originals
Depending on the resolution setting and the width of the original, there may not be sufficient space in memory to hold a
long original. In this case, refer to the following table and select a lower resolution setting and/or shorten the original.
11" wide
8-1/2" wide
Standard
Fine
39.3" (1000 mm)
39.3" (1000 mm)
39.3" (1000 mm)
34.6" (880 mm)
39.3" (1000 mm)
39.3" (1000 mm)
39.3" (1000 mm)
39.3" (1000 mm)
Super fine
Ultra fine
(unit : inch)
Scanning area of original
Note that the edges of an original cannot be scanned.
Far edge
Area that cannot be scanned : 0.2" (5 mm) or less at top edge
and 0.2" (5 mm) or less at bottom edge
: Near edge + far edge = 0.24" (6 mm) or
less
Top edge
Bottom edge
Area that cannot
be scanned
Near edge
Automatic reduction of faxed document
If the width of the faxed document is greater than the receiving machine's maximum receivable width, the document
will be automatically reduced.
Receiving machine's
Faxed document width
Reduced size
Ratio
paper width
8-1/2" x 14"
8-1/2" x 11"
8-1/2" x 11"
11" x 17"
11" x 17"
8-1/2" x 14"
8-1/2" x 11"R
8-1/2" x 11"R
1 : 0.70 (Area ratio)
1 : 0.5 (Area ratio)
1 : 0.64 (Area ratio)
8-1/2" x 14"
A document can also be faxed without reducing its size. In this case, the left and right edges will not be transmitted.
("AUTO RECEIVE REDUCE SETTING" (p.101))
9
LOADING AN ORIGINAL
An original can be loaded in the RSPF or placed on the document glass. Load multi-page sheet originals in the
RSPF. Place books and other originals that cannot be loaded in the RSPF on the document glass.
USING THE RSPF
Lift the RSPF and make sure an
original is not placed on the document
glass. Gently close the RSPF.
Align the edges of the original pages
and then insert the pages face up in
the document feeder tray.
1
3
Insert the stack into the
document feeder tray
until it stops. The stack
should not be higher than
the indicator line
(maximum 100 pages).
If originals are placed both in the RSPF and
on the document glass, only the original in
Note
the RSPF will be scanned.
Adjust the original guides on the
RSPF to the width of the original.
2
USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS
Regardless of the size of the original, place the original
Open the RSPF, place the original face
down on the document glass, and
close the RSPF.
in the far left corner of the document glass. (Align the
upper left-hand corner of the original with the tip of the
mark.)
1
Document glass scale
Document glass scale
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
8-1/2" x 14"
8-1/2" x 11"R
8-1/2" x 11"
11" x 17"
10
CONVENIENT DIALING METHODS
AUTO-DIALING
This product includes an auto-dialing feature to make dialing easier. By programming frequently dialed numbers,
you can call and send documents to these locations by means of a simple dialing operation (p.16). There are two
types of auto-dialing: rapid dialing and group dialing. To program auto-dial numbers, refer to pages p.67, p.71.
Rapid dialing
Group dialing
Simply press a rapid key and then press the [START]
key ( ) to dial the programmed location. When using
F-code transmission, a sub-address and passcode
can also be programmed (p.52).
Multiple destinations can be programmed into a single
rapid key. This is convenient for successively sending
a document to multiple locations.
• The destinations can be stored by specifying rapid
keys, or by directly entering full fax numbers with the
numeric keys (the destinations do not need to be
previously stored in rapid keys).
1
No.001:SHARP CORPORATION
0666211221
No.005:SHARP GROUP
GROUP :025
SHARP CORPORATION
SHARP GROUP
CORPO. TPS
CORPO. TPS
SHARP CORPORATION
SHARP GROUP
FREQUENT USE
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQR
FREQUENT USE
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQR
Touch the [ADDRESS BOOK] key in the initial screen
to display the above screen.
Touch the [ADDRESS BOOK] key in the initial screen
to display the above screen.
• A total of 500 rapid dial and group dial keys can be programmed. (p.65)
• Programmed rapid keys and group dial keys are stored on "index cards". A key can be accessed by touching
Note
its card. (p.8)
To prevent calling or sending a fax to a wrong number, look carefully at the touch panel and make
sure that you enter the correct number when programming an auto-dial number. You can also
check programmed numbers by printing out an address list or group list after programming (p.79).
Caution
REDIALING
The last number dialed can be redialled by simply pressing the [REDIAL] key.
The machine keeps the last number dialed with a rapid key or the numeric keys in
memory. However, when an F-code transmission is performed, the machine only
retains the fax number; it does not retain the sub-address or passcode.
• If numeric keys were pressed during a phone conversation, the [REDIAL] key may
not dial the correct number.
• The number is not retained when the following special operations are performed (the
last number that was dialed before the special operation is retained):
• Broadcast transmission
KER
REDIAL
100%
TION
ADDSS
BOOK
SUB ADDRESS
• Serial polling
• Timer transmission
• Group dialing
ON-HOOK DIALING
This feature allows you to dial without lifting an extension phone connected to the
machine. Touch the [SPEAKER] key, listen for the dial tone through the speaker, and
then dial.
• Faxes must be sent manually when using on-hook dialing. (p.61)
• A number that includes a sub-address or passcode cannot be dialed by on-hook
dialing.
SPEAKER
RED
X MEMORY0%
UTO RECEPTION
ADD
BO
SUB AD
11
Chapter 2
BASIC OPERATIONS
2
This chapter explains the basic procedures for sending and receiving faxes.
SENDING A FAX
BASIC PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES
The procedure for sending a fax in memory transmission mode (p.14) is explained in the following.
Make sure that the machine is in fax
mode.
Check the original size.
1
4
EXPOSURE
If the address directory
When the [FAX] key light
SCAN
FAX
DATA
screen appears, touch
the [CONDITION
SETTINGS] key to
display the condition
settings screen (p.7).
If you loaded a
is on, the machine is in
fax mode. If the light is
not on, press the [FAX]
key.
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
LINE
DATA
AUTO
8½x11R
CUSTOM SE
JOB STATUS
ORIGINAL
non-standard size
original or the original size was not correctly detected,
touch the [ORIGINAL] key and set the original size.
("MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE"
(p.20))
Make sure that memory transmission
mode is selected.
2
Memory transmission
SUB ADDRESS
mode is selected when
SPECIAL MODES
DIRECT TX
ADDRESS REVIEW
MEMORY TX
"MEMORY TX" is
highlighted in the
If needed, adjust the resolution and
5
exposure settings.
[DIRECT TX MEMORY
TX] key. If "DIRECT TX "
is highlighted, touch the
[DIRECT TX MEMORY
TX] key.
Resolution: Page 21
AUTO
Exposure: Page 22
EXPOSURE
STANDARD
If needed, select the
RESOLUTION
sender's name. (p.45)
AUTO
8½x11R
Place the original.
ORIGINAL
3
For originals that can be
sent, see "ORIGINALS"
on page 9.
Enter the fax number.
6
If you are sending
The number that you
entered appears in the
message display
multiple pages, scan the
pages in order beginning
from the first page.
("Condition Setting
1
screen" (p.7 )).
You cannot place originals in both the RSPF
and on the document glass and send them
in a single fax transmission.
Note
If it is not correct, press
the [CLEAR] key (
ACC.#-C
)
and re-enter the number.
You can also use the
REDIAL key (p.11) or an auto-dial number (p.11).
12
BASIC OPERATIONS
Entering a pause.
Using the document glass
If you need to insert a
pause between digits to
access an outside line or
dial an international
number, touch the
PAUSE
NEXT
ADD
Press the [START] key ( ).
7
AX MEMOR00%
AUTO RECEPTION
B
The original is scanned
and the [READ-END] key
appears.
[PAUSE] key in the upper
right-hand corner of the
screen.
SUB A
Each time you touch the [PAUSE] key, a hyphen ("-")
appears and a 2-second pause* is inserted.
After entering a number, you can also touch the
[PAUSE] key to enter a hyphen, and then enter
another number using the numeric keys or a rapid key.
This connects the numbers together (Chain dialing).
*The duration of each pause can be changed with the
key operator program. ("PAUSE TIME SETTING"
(p.97))
If you have another page to scan,
change pages and then press the
[START] key ( ).
Repeat this sequence until all pages have been
scanned. You can change the original size,
resolution, and exposure settings as needed for
each page.
8
2
Group keys cannot be used for chain
If no action is taken for one minute (the [START]
key ( ) is not pressed), scanning automatically
ends and the transmission job is stored.
Note
dialing.
Using the RSPF
After the final page is scanned, touch
the [READ-END] key.
9
Press the [START] key ( ).
7
A beep sounds to inform
(Pg.No.
2)
you that the transmission
job is stored and "JOB
STORED." appears in
the message display.
(The destination is
Scanning begins.
If a job is not in progress
and the telephone line is
not being used, the
destination is dialed
L.
ESS [READ-END]
READ-END
automatically called and
the document transmitted
while the original is being
scanned. (This is called
after previously stored jobs are completed.)
Open the RSPFand remove the document.
"Quick on-line"; see page
14). If there is a
previously stored job or a job is in progress, or if the
line is being used, all pages of the document are
scanned into memory and stored as a transmission
job. (This is called memory transmission: the
destination is automatically called and the document
transmitted after previously stored jobs are
completed.)
If scanning is completed normally, a beep sounds to
inform you that the transmission job is stored and
"JOB STORED." appears in the message display.
Canceling transmission
Note
To cancel transmission while "SCANNING ORIGINAL" appears in the display or before the [READ-END] key is
pressed, press the [CLEAR] key (
) or the [CLEAR ALL] key (
). To cancel a transmission job that is already
stored, press the [JOB STATUS] key and cancel the job as explained on page 24.
• If the machine sounds two beeps during or at the end of transmission and an error message
appears in the touch panel, refer to "WHEN AN ALARM SOUNDS AND A WARNING
MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED" (p.86) to fix the problem.
Caution
• If the power is turned off or there is an interruption in the power supply while an original is
being scanned using the RSPF, scanning will stop and a misfeed will occur. After the power
is restored, remove the misfed original as explained in "MISFEED REMOVAL" in the
operation manual for copier.
13
BASIC OPERATIONS
Memory transmission mode
When memory transmission mode is selected, the original is scanned into memory and then sent to the destination.
When the RSPF is used for transmission, transmission of the first scanned page begins while the remaining pages
are scanned. (See "Quick On-line transmission" below.)
If Quick On-line transmission is not enabled, or if the document glass is used for scanning, all pages of the original
are scanned into memory before the destination is dialed and transmission begins.
The number of pages that can be held in memory varies depending on the content of the pages, the transmission
settings, and the amount of memory installed (p.107).
When On-hook dialing is used, direct transmission mode is automatically selected (memory transmission mode
cannot be used).
Note
Quick On-line
When the RSPF is used for memory transmission and there are no previously stored jobs waiting or in progress (and
the line is not being used), the machine dials the destination and begins transmitting scanned pages while the
remaining pages are scanned. This transmission method is called Quick On-line. The messages "SCANNING
ORIGINAL." and "CONNECTING." both appear until scanning of the final page is completed.
If the receiving party is busy when a Quick On-line transmission is attempted, the transmission will be automatically
reattempted at a later time. (See "If the receiving party is busy" on page 15.)
• The machine is initially set (factory setting) to perform Quick On-line transmission. If desired, you can turn off
Note
this function in the key operator programs (see "QUICK ON LINE SENDING" (p.100)).
• When an original is transmitted using the following methods, the job will be stored in memory (Quick On-line
transmission will not be performed):
• Sending from the document glass • Broadcast transmission (p.26) • Timer transmission (p.30)
• F-code transmission (Chapter 4)
Direct transmission mode
When direct transmission mode is selected, the document is directly transmitted after the destination is dialed.
Direct transmission mode does not use memory, and thus transmission is possible even when the memory is full.
• A subsequent transmission cannot be stored when direct transmission mode is selected.
• When the document glass is used, only one page can be faxed in direct transmission mode.
• The following funtions cannot be used when direct transmission mode is selected:
Note
image rotation (p.15), Broadcasting (p.26) and other functions for transmission to multiple destinations, timer
transmission (p.30), two-sided original scanning (p.17), divided page transmission (p.40), and job build (p.18).
14
BASIC OPERATIONS
Storing transmission jobs (memory transmission)
If a transmission is performed in memory transmission mode while the machine is already sending or receiving a fax,
the document will be scanned into memory and then automatically transmitted after the previous job is completed
(this is called storing a transmission). Up to 50 jobs can be stored in memory at once, not including the job currently
being executed. After transmission, the scanned document data is cleared from memory.
• You can check transmission jobs stored in memory in the job status screen. (See "PART NAMES AND
FUNCTIONS" in the operation manual for copier.)
Note
• If the memory becomes full while a document is being scanned, a message will appear in the display. You can
cancel the scanning by touching the [CANCEL] key, or send only the pages already scanned by touching the
[SEND] key. The page that was being scanned when the memory became full will be cleared from memory. If
the memory becomes full while scanning the first page of a document, the transmission job is automatically
canceled.
• The number of jobs that can be stored will depend on the number of pages in each job and the transmission
conditions. The number of storable jobs will increase if the optional expansion memory (8 MB) is installed.
If the receiving party is busy
If the receiving party is busy, the transmission is temporarily canceled and then automatically re-attempted after a
brief interval (two attempts are made at an interval of 3 minutes*). If you do not want the machine to re-attempt the
transmission, touch the [JOB STATUS] key and cancel the transmission. (p.24)
2
*This setting can be changed in the key operator programs ("RECALL IN CASE OF LINE BUSY" (p.100)).
If a transmission error occurs
The machine will automatically re-attempt transmission (once at an interval of one minute* ) if transmission does not
1
end normally due to a line error or other reason, or if the other machine does not begin reception within 60
2
seconds* after the connection is established. To cancel automatic retransmission, touch the [JOB STATUS] key
and cancel the transmission.(p.24)
1
* This setting can be changed in the key operator programs. ("RECALL IN CASE OF COMMUNICATION ERROR"
(p.100))
2
* This setting can be changed in the key operator programs. ("CALL TIMER AT MEMORY SENDING" (p.100))
Image rotation
The machine is initially set to rotate a vertically-placed ( ) document 90 degrees so that it is oriented horizontally
(
) before transmission (8-1/2" x 11" originals are rotated to 8-1/2" x 11"R and A4 originals are rotated to A4R).
(8-1/2" x 11"R originals and A4R originals are not rotated.) If desired, you can turn this function off with the key
operator program as explained on page 100.
When a 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R original is faxed from the RSPF, the original size will
be automatically detected. However, when the document glass is used, the size of a 5-1/2" x
Caution
8-1/2"R original will not automatically be detected. When faxing a 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R original
from the document glass, you must manually set the original size. ("MANUALLY SETTING
THE SCANNING SIZE" (p.20))
Error Correction Mode (ECM)
Noise on the line can sometimes cause distortions in a transmitted fax image. When this happens, the ECM function
automatically resends the part of the image that was distorted.
• When this function is turned on, transmission will take slightly longer than normal.
• In order for ECM to operate, the other machine must also have the ECM function.
15
BASIC OPERATIONS
TRANSMISSION BY AUTO-DIALING (RAPID DIALING
AND GROUP DIALING)
To send a document by auto-dialing (rapid dialing or group dialing), follow the steps below. To use an auto-dial
destination, you must first program the full fax number and name of the destination. Refer to page 11 for information
on auto-dialing and pages 67 and 71 for information on programming auto-dial destinations.
Perform steps 1 through 6 of "BASIC
PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES"
(p.12).
1
Touch the [ADDRESS BOOK] key.
2
The address directory
AKER
REDIAL
screen appears.
This step is not
Y:100%
EPTION
ADDRESS
BOOK
necessary if the address
directory screen already
appears (go directly to
step 3).
SUB ADDRESS
Touch the rapid key for the desired
destination.
3
READY TO SEND.
See page 8 for
information on using the
address directory screen.
The key you touched is
highlighted. If you touch
the wrong key, touch the
key again to cancel the
selection.
SHARP CORPORATION
SHARP GROUP
CORPO. TPS
FREQUENT USE
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQ
Continue from step 7 of "BASIC
PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES"
(p.13).
4
16
BASIC OPERATIONS
TRANSMITTING A TWO-SIDED DOCUMENT
The RSPF can be used to automatically fax both sides of two-sided document by memory transmission.
Make sure that the machine is in fax
mode.
Select the [ROTATE THE IMAGE 90
DEGREES] checkbox.
1
5
MANUAL
When the [FAX] key light
This step is only
SCAN
FAX
DATA
is on, the machine is in
fax mode. If the light is
not on, press the [FAX]
key.
necessary if you placed
ED
ET
2-SIDED
TABLET
JOB
BUILD
the original so that it is
oriented horizontally (the
top of the original is on
the right or left side).
Otherwise, go directly to
step 6.
LINE
DATA
ROTATE THE IMAGE 90 DEGREES
CUSTOM SE
JOB STATUS
Place the original. (p.10)
2
3
Touch the [OK] key.
6
2
Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.
You will return to the
initial screen.
SIZE
MANUAL
OK
If the address directory
screen appears, touch
the [CONDITION
STANDARD
2-SIDED
TABLET
JOB
BUILD
RESOLUTION
SETTINGS] key to
display the condition
settings screen (p.7).
After touching the
AUTO
8½x11R
OTATE THE IMAGE 90 DEGREES
ORIGINAL
A two-sided original icon appears next to the
[ORIGINAL] key.
[ORIGINAL] key, check
the original size displayed in the key. If the original size
was not correctly detected, set the correct original
size. ("MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE"
(p.20))
Example: The icon that
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
appears when the
[2-SIDED BOOKLET]
key is touched.
AUTO
8½x11R
Touch the [2-SIDED BOOKLET] key or
4
ORIGINAL
the [2-SIDED TABLET] key as
appropriate for the original you
loaded.
Continue from step 5 of "BASIC
PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES"
(p.12).
7
ORIGINAL SIZE
AUTO
MANUAL
2-SIDED
BOOKLET
2-SIDED
TABLET
ROTATE THE IMAGE
Booklets and tablets
Two-sided originals that are bound at the side are booklets, and two-sided
originals that are bound at the top are tablets.
Booklet
Tablet
Note
Two-sided scanning turns off after the document is stored in memory. Two-sided
scanning can be canceled by pressing the [CLEAR ALL] key (
).
17
BASIC OPERATIONS
FAXING A LARGE NUMBER OF PAGES
When you have a large number of pages to fax, scan the pages in batches using the RSPF. A maximum of 100
pages can be placed in the RSPF at once; however, placing pages in batches allows you to scan in more than 100
pages and send them in a single transmission. Note that the number of pages that can be scanned may vary
depending on the content of the pages and how much memory is being used.
Make sure that the machine is in fax
mode
Touch the [OK] key.
1
5
You will return to the
initial screen.
When the [FAX] key light
OK
SIZE
SCAN
FAX
DATA
is on, the machine is in
fax mode. If the light is
not on, press the [FAX]
key.
MANUAL
LINE
DATA
2-SIDED
TABLET
JOB
BUILD
CUSTOM SE
JOB STATUS
OTATE THE IMAGE 90 DEGREES
The many originals icon appears next to the
[ORIGINAL] key.
Place the original. (p.10)
2
3
Place the first pages that
you wish to scan.
EXPOSURE
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
AUTO
8½x11R
ORIGINAL
Perform steps 4 to 6 of "BASIC
PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES"
(p.12).
6
7
Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.
If the address directory
screen appears, touch
the [CONDITION
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
Press the [START] key ( ).
SETTINGS] key to
display the condition
settings screen (p.7).
After touching the
AUTO
8½x11R
Scanning of the originals
begins. When scanning
is finished, the
ORIGINAL
[ORIGINAL] key, check
[READ-END] key
appears in the touch
panel.
the original size displayed in the key. If the original size
was not correctly detected, set the correct original
size. ("MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE"
(p.20))
Touch the [JOB BUILD] key.
4
OK
SIZE
MANUAL
2-SIDED
TABLET
JOB
BUILD
OTATE THE IMAGE 90 DEGREE
18
BASIC OPERATIONS
Place the next set of original pages
and press the [START] key ( ).
Repeat this step until all pages have been scanned.
You can change the original size, resolution, and
exposure settings as needed for each page.
If you take no action for about 1 minute (you do not
press the [START] key ( )), scanning automatically
ends and the job is stored for transmission.
When the last original page has been
scanned, touch the [READ-END] key.
A beep sounds to inform
8
9
(Pg.No.
2)
you that the job has been
stored for transmission.
[JOB STORED.] appears
in the message display.
(Dialing and transmission
begin automatically when
any previously stored
L.
ESS [READ-END]
READ-END
jobs are completed.)
If you do not touch the [READ-END] key to
complete the procedure, the screen will
automatically revert to the initial screen after
60 seconds. If desired, you can disable
automatic return to the initial screen by
changing a setting in the key operator
programs. (See "DISABLE DISPLAY
TIMEOUT" in the key operator's guide.)
When the screen reverts to the initial
screen, the scanned originals will be
transmitted.
Note
2
• If the memory becomes full while originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop.
The page that was being scanned when the memory became full will be cleared. To transmit only the originals
that have already been scanned, touch the [SEND] key. To cancel the transmission, touch the [CANCEL] key.
• Depending on the content of the originals, the memory may become full before 100 pages are scanned.
• When using job build mode, the number of originals scanned will appear in the display. When the count
reaches 256 pages, it will reset to 0 and further scanned pages will be counted from 1.
• When using job build mode, the original size can be changed between originals.
Note
• When scanning the first set of originals, the [ROTATE THE IMAGE 90 DEGREES] checkbox can be selected,
however, from the second set of originals on, the selection cannot be changed until scanning is finished (the
checkbox will be grayed out).
• Direct transmission is not possible when using job build mode. A job build transmission takes place as a
memory transmission even if Quick Online is enabled (transmission does not begin until all originals are
scanned).
19
MANUALLY SETTING THE
SCANNING SIZE
If you load an original that is not a standard size (such as an AB size), or if the size is not detected correctly, you
must touch the [ORIGINAL] key and set the original size manually. Perform the following steps after placing the
document in the RSPF or on the document glass.
*Standard sizes:
Note
Original sizes that can be correctly detected are 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
8-1/2" x 14", and 11" x 17". However, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R can only be automatically detected when the RSPF is
used.
If a non-standard size original is loaded (including special sizes), the closest standard size may be displayed, or
the original size may not appear.
If you wish to select an AB size, touch the
[AB INCH] key and then touch the desired
original size key.
Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.
1
If the address directory
screen appears, touch
the [CONDITION
SETTINGS] key to
display the condition
settings screen. (p.7)
"AB" is highlighted and
AB size keys are
displayed. To return to
the inch palette, touch
the [AB INCH] key
once again.
STANDARD
SPEAKER
REDIAL
OK
RESOLUTION
ORIGINAL SIZE
MANUAL
AUTO
OK
AUTO
8½x11R
A4
A4R
AB
ORIGINAL
INCH
Touch the [MANUAL] key.
Touch the outer [OK] key.
2
4
The sizes that can be
selected are displayed.
You will return to the
ORIGINAL SIZE
MANUAL
SIZE
MANUAL
OK
OK
initial screen. (Pressing
the inner [OK] key in the
step above returns you to
step 2.)
1
/
8
2x11R
1
1
/
/
2
R
8
2x11
DED
LET
2-SIDED
TABLET
13
11x17
AB
INCH
Touch the desired original size key.
The selected size appears in the top
3
5
half of the [ORIGINAL] key.
EXPOSURE
The [AUTO] key is no
SPEAKER
REDIAL
OK
longer highlighted. The
[MANUAL] key and the
selected original size key
are highlighted.
ORIGINAL SIZE
MANUAL
STANDARD
AUTO
RESOLUTION
1
/
1
/
2
1
1
1
OK
/
/
/
5
2x8
5
2x8
2
R
8
2x11
1
/
1
/
8
2x11R
8
2x14
11x17
AB
1
/
8
2x11R
INCH
ORIGINAL
20
SELECTING RESOLUTION AND
EXPOSURE SETTINGS
After placing an original, you can adjust the resolution and exposure settings as needed for the original, such as for
small or faint characters or for a photo. Place the original with the machine in fax mode (p.12), and then adjust the
settings as explained below.
SELECTING THE RESOLUTION
The initial resolution setting is STANDARD. To change the setting, follow these steps:
Changing the resolution
Resolution settings
Touch this key if your original
consists of normal-sized characters
(like those in this manual).
Touch the [RESOLUTION] key.
1
Standard
2
Touch this key if your original has
small characters or diagrams. The
original will be scanned at twice the
resolution of the Standard setting.
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
Fine
AUTO
8½x11
ORIGINAL
Touch this key if your original has
intricate pictures or diagrams. A
higher-quality image will be
Super fine
Ultra fine
produced than with the Fine setting.
Touch the desired resolution key.
2
Touch this key if your original has
intricate pictures or diagrams. This
setting gives the best image quality,
however, transmission will take
longer than with the other settings.
The selected key is
highlighted. If you
STANDARD
FINE
selected FINE, SUPER
FINE, or ULTRA FINE,
you can also touch the
[HALF TONE] key to
select halftone.
SUPER FINE
ULTRA FINE
HALF TONE
Touch this key if your original is a
photograph or has gradations of
color (such as a color original). This
setting will produce a clearer image
than Fine, Super fine, or Ultra fine
used alone. Half tone cannot be
selected if Standard has been
selected.
Half tone
Touch the [OK] key.
3
You will return to the
initial screen.
OK
ARD
The selected resolution
will appear in the top half
of the [RESOLUTION]
key.
E
FINE
FINE
HALF TONE
• The default resolution setting is Standard.
If desired, you can change the default
setting to a different setting in the key
operator programs. ("INITIAL
Note
RESOLUTION SETTING" (p.97))
• When using the RSPF, the resolution
setting cannot be changed once scanning
has begun.
• Even if you send a document using Fine,
Super fine, or Ultra fine resolution, some
receiving fax machines may not be able to
print the document at the same resolution.
21
BASIC OPERATIONS
SELECTING THE EXPOSURE
The initial exposure setting is AUTO. To change the setting, follow these steps:
Changing the exposure
Touch the [EXPOSURE] key.
1
AUTO
EXPOSURE
STANDARD
RESOLUTION
AUTO
8½x11R
ORIGINAL
Touch the [AUTO MANUAL] key.
2
3
"MANUAL" is highlighted.
AUTO
MANUAL
1
3
5
Touch the
key or the
key to
select the desired exposure level.
The exposure can be set
to 5 levels. For a darker
image, touch the
AUTO
MANUAL
key. For a lighter image
1
3
5
touch the
key.
Touch the [OK] key.
4
You will return to the
initial screen.
OK
The selected exposure
will appear in the top half
of the [EXPOSURE] key.
MANUAL
O
·
3
5
• When using the document glass to scan a
multi-page original, the original size,
resolution, and exposure settings can be
changed each time you change pages.
When using the RSPF, the exposure
setting cannot be changed once scanning
has begun.
Note
• The default exposure setting is AUTO. If
desired, you can change the default
setting to a different setting in the key
operator programs. ("INITIAL
EXPOSURE SETTING" (p.97))
22
PRIORITY TRANSMISSION OF A
STORED JOB
If you have an urgent transmission job and multiple transmission jobs have already been stored, you can give
priority to the urgent job so that it will be transmitted immediately after the job currently being transmitted. This is
done in the job status screen. For details on using the job status screen, refer to operation manual for copier.
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
Touch the [PRIORITY] key.
1
4
The selected job moves
to the position
ITING
ITING
ITING
X JOB
LINE
DATA
DETAIL
PRIORITY
FAX
immediately following the
job currently being
transmitted.
Transmission of the
priority job will begin
when the current job
finishes.
CUSTOM SETTING
JOB STATUS
STOP/DE
2
Touch the [FAX JOB] key.
2
3
If a job key for a broadcast-type transmission is
selected, the name or number of the destination to
which the fax is currently being transmitted appears. If
the job has not yet begun, the name or number of the
first destination to which the fax will be transmitted
appears. To return to the job status screen, touch the
The fax transmission
status and stored jobs
appear.
WAITING
WAITING
WAITING
DET
PRIOR
STOP/D
[DETAIL] key again or touch the
or
key.
FAX JOB
The [PRIORITY] key appears when there
are at least two stored jobs in addition to the
job in progress.
Note
Touch the job key of the transmission
job to which you wish to give priority.
The selected key is highlighted.
The job status is indicated as follows:
CONNECTING ...The job currently in
progress
Note
WAITING............Stored job waiting to be
executed
T XXX XX:XX .....Job stored with a timer
setting
RETRY MODE ...Job waiting to be recalled
23
CANCELING A FAX TRANSMISSION
You can cancel a transmission job that is in progress or that has been stored. This is done in the fax job status
screen.
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
1
LINE
DATA
FAX
CUSTOM SETTING
JOB STATUS
Touch the [FAX JOB] key.
2
WAITING
DET
WAITING
PRIOR
WAITING
STOP/D
FAX JOB
Touch the job key of the transmission
job that you wish to cancel.
The selected key is highlighted.
3
4
Touch the [STOP/DELETE] key.
A message appears to
ITING
ITING
ITING
confirm the cancellation.
Touch the [YES] key to
delete the selected job
key and cancel the
DETAIL
PRIORITY
STOP/DELETE
transmission.
X JOB
If a job key for a broadcast-type transmission is
selected, the name or number of the destination to
which the fax is currently being transmitted appears. If
the job has not yet begun, the name or number of the
first destination to which the fax will be transmitted
appears. To return to the job status screen, touch the
[DETAIL] key again or touch the
or
key.
If you do not wish to cancel the
transmission...
Note
touch the [NO] key.
"CANCEL" will appear by a canceled
transmission job in the transaction report.
24
RECEIVING FAXES
When another fax machine sends a fax to your machine, your machine will ring*, automatically receive the fax, and
begin printing (automatic reception).
• You can store a transmission job while fax reception is in progress. ("Storing transmission jobs (memory
transmission)" (p.15))
Note
• To print received fax pages on both sides of the paper, enable "DUPLEX RECEPTION SETTING" in the key
operator programs. (p.101)
To receive faxes, sufficient paper must be loaded in the paper tray. Refer to "LOADING
PAPER" in operation manual for copier to load appropriate paper. Incoming 8-½" x 11" and A4
size faxes will be automatically adjusted to the orientation of the printing paper, so there is no
need to load each size of paper both horizontally ( ) and vertically ( ).
However, if you receive a fax that is smaller than 8-1/2" x 11" size, the paper size used to print
the fax will depend on how the original was oriented (vertically or horizontally) in the sending
fax machine.
Caution
2
RECEIVING A FAX
The machine will ring* and reception
will automatically begin.
Reception ends.
1
2
When reception ends, a
beep sounds.
*Number of rings
The machine has been set to ring twice before beginning
automatic reception. The number of rings can be set to
any number from 0 to 9 in the key operator programs.
("NUMBER OF CALLS IN AUTO RECEPTION" (p.101))
If the number of rings is set to 0, the machine will receive
faxes without ringing.
If the machine has multiple output trays, the
output tray for fax reception can be selected
in the key operator programs. See
"OUTPUT TRAYS" in the key operator’s
guide.
Note
If received faxes cannot be printed
If the machine runs out of paper or toner, or a paper jam occurs, or if the machine is
printing a print or copy job, received faxes will be held in memory until printing becomes
possible. The received fax are automatically printed when printing becomes possible.
When received faxes are held in memory, the data light next to the [FAX] key blinks.
You can also use the transfer function to have another fax machine print the received
faxes. ("FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES TO ANOTHER MACHINE WHEN
PRINTING IS NOT POSSIBLE" (p.28))
SCAN
FAX
DATA
LINE
DATA
CUSTOM SE
JOB STATUS
If a double beep sounds during reception or at the end of reception and an error message
appears in the touch panel, clear the error as explained in "WHEN AN ALARM SOUNDS AND A
WARNING MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED" (p.86).
Caution
25
Chapter 3
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS
3
This chapter explains advanced fax features for special situations and purposes.
SENDING THE SAME DOCUMENT
TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS IN A
SINGLE OPERATION
(BROADCAST TRANSMISSION)
This feature is used to send a fax to multiple destinations in a single operation. The document to be transmitted is
scanned into memory and then successively transmitted to the selected destinations. This feature is convenient for
such purposes as distributing a report to company branches in different locations. Up to 200 destinations can be
selected. When transmission to all destinations has been completed, the document is automatically cleared from
memory.
• If you frequently use broadcasting to send faxes to the same group of destinations, it is convenient to program
those destinations into a group key. A group key is a rapid key in which multiple destinations are programmed.
The procedure for programming group keys is explained on page 71.
Note
• When using a group key to send a fax, the destinations programmed in the group key are counted as
broadcasting destinations. For example, if five destinations are programmed in a group key and the key is
touched for a broadcast transmission, the broadcast transmission will have five destinations.
Beep
Destination A
(recipient)
Successive
transmission
Sender
Reception
SE
NEXT ADDRESS
100%
PTION
Beep
ADDSS
BOOK
Destination B
(recipient)
SUB ADDRESS
Successively enter
destination numbers
The document is scanned
into memory
Reception
Beep
Destination C
(recipient)
Reception
26
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS
USING BROADCAST TRANSMISSION
Follow steps 1 through 6 of "BASIC
PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES"
(p.12).
Touch the [ADDRESS REVIEW] key to
display the destinations.
1
4
When the [ADDRESS
CONDITION
1/2
REVIEW] key is pressed,
a list of the entered and
selected destinations is
displayed.
SETTINGS
Enter the fax number of the first
destination or touch an auto-dial key
(rapid key or group key) (p.16).
If the Condition Setting
2
SUB ADDRESS
ADDRESS REVIEW
screen appears, touch
SPE
0123456789
the [ADDRESS BOOK]
key to display the
address book
Check the destinations.
CORPO.TPS
5
HARORPTI
SHARP GROUP
ACC.#-C
When you have finished
screen.(p.8)
SELECT ADDRESS TO DELETE.
checking the
When selected, an
auto-dial key is
highlighted.
ADDRESS REVIEW
0666211221
destinations, touch the
[OK] key to return to the
screen of step 4.
CORPO.TPS
SHARP GROUP
Touch the [NEXT ADDRESS] key and
then enter the fax number of the next
destination or touch an auto-dial key.
Repeat this step for each
3
3
If you wish to delete a
destination, touch the
displayed key of the
destination. A message
will appear to confirm the
deletion. Touch [YES]
key to delete the
DELETE THE ADDRESS?
0666211221
E
NEXT ADDRESS
of the remaining
destinations.
NO
YES
CONDITION
SETTINGS
1/2
destination from the
destination list. If you
wish to cancel the
SUB ADDRESS
If you enter an incorrect number
If you make a mistake while entering a
deletion, touch [NO] key.
Note
number, press the [CLEAR] key (
then re-enter the correct digit(s).
If you have already completed entry of a fax
number, you can delete the number using
steps 4 and 5.
) and
Continue from step 7 of the "BASIC
PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES"
(p.13).
6
If you select an incorrect auto-dial
key
Simply touch the incorrect key one more
time to cancel the selection.
To cancel a broadcast transmission
To cancel a broadcast transmission when
selecting destinations, press the [CLEAR
Note
ALL] key (
). To cancel transmission after
the above procedure has been completed,
follow the procedure in "CANCELING A FAX
TRANSMISSION" (p.24).
The [NEXT ADDRESS] key only needs to
be pressed when successively entering full
fax numbers with the numeric keys.
Example:
XXXX NEXT ADDRESS XXXX
Fax number
Fax number
Cannot be omitted.
XXXX NEXT ADDRESS rapid NEXT ADDRESS rapid
Fax number
Can be omitted
Can be omitted
If desired, you can change a key operator
progam to require that the [NEXT
ADDRESS] key always be pressed. ("MUST
INPUT NEXT ADDRESS KEY AT
BROADCAST SETTING" (p.96))
27
FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES
TO ANOTHER MACHINE WHEN
PRINTING IS NOT POSSIBLE
When printing is not possible because of a problem such as no paper or no toner, you can forward received faxes to
another fax machine.This function can be conveniently used in an office or other workplace where there is another
fax machine connected to a different phone line. When a fax has been received to memory, the data light to the right
of the [FAX] key blinks (see "If received faxes cannot be printed" (p.25)).
2
Printing not possible because of
paper or toner problem
1
Fax transmission
to your machine
3
"Transfer" instruction
using custom settings
4
Automatic dialing and
transmission to programmed
transfer destination
5
Printing
• When fax forwarding is performed, all faxes that were received in memory to that point are forwarded. The
page that was being printed when the problem occurred and all following pages will be forwarded.
• Faxes cannot be selected for forwarding. Faxes received to a confidential box ("SENDING AND RECEIVING
CONFIDENTIAL FAXES" (p.46)) or a confidential memory box ("F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION"
(p.57)) cannot be forwarded.
Note
• The result of forwarding is indicated in an activity report ("VIEWING THE COMMUNICATION ACTIVITY
REPORT" (p.85)).
28
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS
USING THE FAX FORWARD FUNCTION
Program the fax number of the forwarding destination
The number of the forwarding destination is programmed in the key operator programs ("SET THE TELEPHONE
NUMBER FOR DATA FORWARDING" (p.101)). Only one fax number can be programmed, and a sub-address and
passcode can be included in this number. If a forwarding number is not programmed, a fax can still be forwarded by
manually entering the forwarding number. However, in this case a sub-address and passcode cannot be included.
Forwarding received data
(When a forwarding number is programmed)
Forwarding received data
(When a forwarding number is not programmed)
Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.
Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.
1
1
LINE
DATA
Touch the [FAX DATA FORWARD]
key.
When a forwarding number is not programmed,
"THE DESTINATION IS NOT ENTERED." will
appear.
2
CUSTOM SETTINGS
B STATUS
3
Touch the [FAX No.] key.
3
Touch the [FAX DATA FORWARD]
key.
2
If there are no received
CLOCK
NT
THE DESTINATION IS NOT ENTERED.
faxes to forward, a
message will appear.
FAX No.
FAX DATA
FORWARD
ODE
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
Press the numeric keys to enter the
forwarding number.
4
Touch the [YES] key.
3
Enter the forwarding number with the numeric keys.
Up to 50 digits can be entered. A sub-address and
passcode cannot be entered.
The machine
automatically dials the
TRANSFER THE RECEIVED DATA TO ANOTHER
DEVICE?
forwarding number
programmed in the key
operator programs and
begins forwarding the fax
or faxes.
Touch the [OK] key.
5
NO
YES
The entered forwarding
number is stored.
To cancel, touch the
To cancel fowarding,
touch the [NO] key.
FAX No.
[CANCEL] key.
CANCEL
OK
To cancel forwarding after the above
procedure is finished
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
Note
Press the [JOB STATUS] key, and then
cancel forwarding in the same way as a
regular fax transmission. ("CANCELING A
FAX TRANSMISSION" (p.24))
The fax that was going to be forwarded will
return to print standby status in your
machine.
Touch the [YES] key.
6
The entered number is
automatically dialed and
forwarding begins.
To cancel, touch the [NO]
key.
TRANSFER THE RECEIVED DATA TO ANOTHER
DEVICE?
If forwarding is not possible because the line
is busy or a transmission error occurs, the
fax returns to print standby status in your
machine.
NO
YES
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
29
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AT A
SPECIFIED TIME (TIMER TRANSMISSION)
This feature enables you to set up a transmission or polling operation to be performed automatically at a specified
time. The time can be specified up to a week in advance. This allows you to take advantage of off-peak phone rates
without having to be there when the transmission is performed. A combined total of 50 timer transmission and
memory transmission jobs can be stored.
• After a timer transmission is performed, the information (resolution setting, destination, etc.) is automatically
cleared from memory.
Note
• To perform a timer transmission, the document must be scanned into memory. It is not possible to place the
document in the RSPF or on the document glass and have it scanned at the specified time of transmission.
• To set the date and time in the machine, refer to "CUSTOM SETTINGS" of operation manual for copier. You
can check the machine’s current time in the screens of steps 3 and 4.
• Only one polling timer operation can be set up at a time. If you wish to set up multiple timer polling operations,
combine the machines to be polled into a serial polling operation with a timer setting. (p.32)
SETTING UP A TIMER TRANSMISSION
In fax mode, touch the [SPECIAL
MODES] key.
Select the time. (Touch the
key or
1
4
the
key until the desired time
AUTO RECEPTION
If the address book
appears.)
BO
screen appears, touch
the [CONDITION
Select the time in
CANCEL
SUB ADD
12-hour format.
If you continue touching
the
TIME
SETTINGS] key to
display the condition
settings screen. (p.7)
SPECIAL MODES
DIREX
ADDRESS
MEMOR
01
30
HH.
mm.
keys, the
numbers will change
quickly. Touch the [AM]
or [PM] key to select AM
or PM.
Touch the [TIMER] key.
2
The current time appears at the top of the screen. If
the current time is not correct, press the [CLEAR ALL]
key ( ) to cancel the operation. Correct the date and
time setting as explained in "CUSTOM SETTINGS" in
operation manual for copier.
The timer transmission
screen appears.
SPECIAL MODES
TIMER
Touch the outer [OK] key.
5
You will return to the
screen in step 1. A timer
OK
Select the day of the week. (Touch the
9:43 AM
3
icon will appear in the
touch panel.
key or the
key until the desired
CANCEL
OK
day is selected.)
To cancel the timer
transmission, touch the
[CANCEL] key.
The initial factory setting
is "---" (no selection). If
you select this setting,
the transmission will be
performed as soon as the
specified time arrives.
DAY OF THE WEEK
30
mm.
30
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS
Perform the desired transmission
operation.
6
The steps that follow will depend on the type of
transmission. The following types of transmission
can be performed in a timer transmission:
• Normal transmission (p.12)
• Broadcast transmission (p.26)
• Confidential transmission (p.47)
• Relay request transmission (p.50)
• Polling (p.32)
• Serial polling (p.32)
• F-code polling (p.54)
• F-code confidential transmission (p.57)
• F-code relay request transmission (p.59)
• Other operations can be performed after a timer transmission is set up. If another operation is in progress
when the specified time arrives, the timer transmission will begin when the job in progress is completed.
• If a timer transmission job is given priority in the fax job status screen ("PRIORITY TRANSMISSION OF A
STORED JOB" (p.23)), the timer setting will be canceled and the job will be performed as soon as the current
job is completed.
Note
3
31
TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION
USING THE POLLING FUNCTION
This function can only be used if the other machine is a Super G3 or G3 machine and supports the polling function.
The polling function allows your machine to call a fax machine that has a document ready for transmission and
initiate reception of the document. You can also perform the reverse operation: scan a document into the memory of
your machine so that another machine can call your machine and initiate reception of the document.
Calling the sending machine and asking the sending machine to fax a document is called "polling". Scanning a
document into memory and automatically sending it when the receiving machine calls and "polls" your machine is
called "polling memory".
For information on polling and polling memory using F-codes, refer to "F-CODE POLLING MEMORY" (p.54).
This section only explains regular polling and regular polling memory.
Note
Polling
This function allows your machine to call a sending machine and initiate reception of a document in that machine. A
timer setting can also be established to have the operation take place at night or at another specified time. (p.30)
Your machine
The other machine
2
Permits polling
1
Polling (ask other machine
to send document)
3
Document data previously
scanned into memory
4
Document data is automatically
sent to your machine
Group keys and the broadcast transmission function (p.26) can be used to successively poll multiple fax machines in
a single operation (serial polling). Up to 200 machines can be polled. In this case, the sequence of operations in the
above diagram is successively repeated for each sending machine selected.
Note
The receiving machine bears the expense (phone charges) of polling transmission.
32
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS
Polling memory
This feature allows your machine to automatically send a document previously scanned into memory when another
machine calls and polls your machine.
Your machine
The other machine
1
Polling
(request transmission)
2
Permits polling
3
Document data previously
scanned into memory
4
Document data is
automatically sent to
other machine
3
USING THE POLLING FUNCTION
A document should not be loaded in the machine when the following operation is performed. When used in
conjunction with the timer transmission function, only one polling job can be stored.
• If the other machine has enabled a polling security function ("Restricting polling access (polling security)"
Note
(p.38)), make sure that your own fax number (sender's number) is programmed in the key operator programs
("OWN NUMBER AND NAME SET" (p.97)), and ask the operator of the other machine to program your fax
number (the programmed sender's number with the lowest control number) appropriately in that machine.
• If the other fax machine is a Sharp machine (excluding some models), you may also need to program a system
number in your machine ("SYSTEM NUMBER MODE" (p.102)) that matches a polling permission ID number
programmed in the other machine.
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key in
fax mode, and then touch the
[POLLING] key.
Enter the number of the other fax
machine or touch an auto-dial key
(rapid or group key) (p.16).
If the Condition Setting
1
3
SUB ADDRESS
If the address book
screen appears, touch
the [CONDITION
screen appears, touch the
SPECIAL MODES
ADDRESS REVIEW
SPE
0123456789
[ADDRESS BOOK] key to
display the address book
screen. (p.8)
The selected auto-dial
key is highlighted.
CORPO.TPS
DIRE
MEMORY TX
POLLING
SETTINGS] key to
display the condition
settings screen. (p.7)
The [POLLING] key is
highlighted and the
polling icon appears.
HARP CORPORATION
SHARP GROUP
ACC.#-C
DUAL PAGE
SCAN
PRO
If you are performing
serial polling, touch the [NEXT ADDRESS] key and
repeat this step. (p.27)
To cancel polling, touch the [POLLING] key once
again to cancel the selection.
When performing serial polling, an auto-dial
key that includes a sub-address or
Note
Touch the [OK] key.
2
passcode (p.52) cannot be selected.
You will return to the
condition settings screen,
and the polling icon will
appear in the touch
panel.
OK
/2
SCAN MODE
33
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS
When you have finished entering the
destination(s), press the [START]
key( ).
4
"JOB STORED." appears
in the screen.
Your machine prints the
document following
reception from the
sending machine.
To cancel the operation
Note
Press the [JOB STATUS] key and then cancel the operation as explained. ("CANCELING A FAX
TRANSMISSION" (p.24))
34
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS
USING POLLING MEMORY
This function sends a document previously scanned into memory to a receiving machine when the receiving
machine calls and polls your machine. The machine has "memory boxes", which are memory used for the regular
polling memory function, F-code polling memory, F-code confidential transmission, and F-code relay transmission
("SENDING OPTIONS" (p.102)). The polling memory function explained here uses a memory box called the
"PUBLIC BOX". If desired, you can restrict polling to fax machines whose fax number you have programmed in your
machine, or use ID numbers to restrict polling ("MEMORY BOXES AND SUB-ADDRESSES/PASSCODES
REQUIRED FOR F-CODE TRANSMISSION" (p.52)).
Caution When using the polling memory function, do not set the reception mode to MANUAL. (p.62)
Scanning a document into polling memory (the Public Box)
Follow this procedure to scan a document into the Public Box. If other documents have already been stored in the
Public Box, the new document will be added to those documents. If the previously stored documents are no longer
needed, delete them ("Deleting documents from the Public Box" (p.37)) before scanning in the new document.
Make sure that the machine is in fax
mode.
Touch the [PUBLIC BOX] key.
1
6
This specifies that the
When the [FAX] key light
3
SCAN
FAX
DATA
document will be
scanned into the Public
Box.
is on, the machine is in
fax mode. If the light is
not on, press the [FAX]
key.
LINE
DATA
CUSTOM SE
JOB STATUS
PUBLIC BOX
Select the number of transmissions.
Place the document in the RSPF or on
the document glass. (p.10)
7
2
3
Touch the [ONCE] key or
TA STORE
the [UNLIMITED] key.
When you scan the
document into the
Select the original size, resolution,
exposure, and other settings as
needed ("MANUALLY SETTING THE
SCANNING SIZE" (p.20)).
ONCE
UNLIMITED
memory box, you can
select whether to have
the scanned document
automatically deleted
after polling or left in the
box to allow repeated
polling.
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key and
then the [MEMORY BOX] key.
4
SUB ADDRESS
If the address book
screen appears, touch
the [CONDITION
SPECIAL MODES
ADDRESS REVIEW
W SCAN MODE
DIRE
M
Touch the [OK] key.
MEMORY TX
MEMORY BOX
SETTINGS] key to
display the condition
settings screen. (p.7)
To cancel the operation,
touch the [CLEAR ALL]
key ( ).
8
Touch the [DATA STORE] key.
5
POLLI
DATA STORE
PRIN
35
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS
To cancel scanning
To cancel scanning of a document while
scanning is in progress, press the [CLEAR]
Press the [START] key ( ).
9
Note
The document is
scanned. If other
documents have
key (
). To erase the documents in the
Public Box, see "Deleting documents from
the Public Box" on page 37.
previously been stored,
the new document will be
added to the previous
documents.
If you used the document glass and have another
page to scan, change pages and then press the
[START] key ( ) again. Repeat this procedure until
all pages have been scanned, and then press the
[READ-END] key in the touch panel. "JOB STORED."
will appear briefly in the touch panel and then you will
return to the condition settings screen.
Printing documents in the Public Box
When documents are stored in the Public Box, an
To check the stored data, you can print it out.
icon will appear to the right of the [PUBLIC BOX] key.
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key in
Press the [START] key ( ).
1
4
fax mode and then touch the
[MEMORY BOX] key.
"PRINT JOB IN
MEMORY. PLEASE
WAIT UNTIL PRINT
OUT." will appear and
the documents will be
printed.
SUB ADDRESS
If the address book
screen appears, touch
the [CONDITION
SPECIAL MODES
ADDRESS REVIEW
W SCAN MODE
DIRE
M
MEMORY TX
MEMORY BOX
SETTINGS] key to
display the condition
settings screen. (p.7)
Touch the [PRINT DATA] key.
2
3
POLLING MEMORY
PRINT DATA
E
Touch the [PUBLIC BOX] key.
Touching the [CANCEL]
key will return you to the
screen of step 2.
PUBLIC BOX
36
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS
Deleting documents from the Public Box
This procedure is used to delete documents from the Public Box when they are no longer needed.
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key in
1
fax mode and then touch the
[MEMORY BOX] key.
SUB ADDRESS
If the address book
screen appears, touch
the [CONDITION
SPECIAL MODES
ADDRESS REVIEW
W SCAN MODE
DIRE
M
MEMORY TX
MEMORY BOX
SETTINGS] key to
display the condition
settings screen. (p.7)
Touch the [DELETE DATA] key.
2
MEMORY
DATA
DELETE DATA
3
Touch the [PUBLIC BOX] key.
3
A message screen
appears.
PUBLIC BOX
Touch the [YES] key.
4
All documents in the
Public Box are deleted
and you return to the
screen of step 2.
DELETE THE DATA IN THE MEMORY BOX?
PUBLIC BOX
YES
NO
If you touch the [NO] key,
you will return to the
screen of step 3 without
deleting the documents.
37
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS
Restricting polling access (polling security)
If you wish to prevent unauthorized fax machines from polling your machine, enable the polling security function.
When this function is enabled, polling permission will only be granted if the fax number of the polling machine (as
programmed in that machine) matches one of the fax numbers that you have programmed in your machine as
passcode numbers. Up to 10 fax numbers can be programmed as passcode numbers.
To turn on the polling security function and program passcode numbers, see "PASSCODE NUMBER SETTING" on
page 102.
There are two types of polling security functions. Polling is permitted when the numbers of either type match.
Checking the receiving machine's programmed sender's number against
the transmitting machine's passcode numbers
[Preparations]
[During polling]
Your
(receiving)
machine
Beep
Program own
Select polling or serial polling
(sender's) fax number
Reception
Polling
Transmission
Receiving
machine
Transmitting
machine
Numbers
match
Own
Passcode
number
(sender's)
number
Program passcode
numbers
Check sender's number
against passcode numbers
Transmitting
machine
Polling is permitted
[Preparations]
Checking the receiving machine's system number against the transmitting
machine's ID numbers (Sharp machines only*)
*Excluding some models
[Preparations]
[During polling]
Your
(receiving)
machine
Beep
Program
a system number
Select polling or serial polling
Reception
Polling
Transmission
Receiving
machine
Transmitting
machine
Numbers
match
System
number
ID numbers
Program ID numbers
Check system number
against ID numbers
Transmitting
machine
Polling is permitted
[Preparations]
• If you do not use the polling security function, the document will be sent to any fax machine that polls you.
• When using the polling memory function with polling security enabled, the fax number of the polling
machine(s) must be programmed in your machine. The polling machine must also have its sender's number
programmed.
Note
38
FAXING A THIN-SHEET
DOCUMENT USING THE RSPF
Thin-sheet documents can be faxed using the RSPF.
When the thin-sheet scanning function is used, the RSPF scans the document at a slower speed.
Follow these steps to enable or disable the thin-sheet scanning function.
A document that is extremely thin or which has folds or wrinkles may misfeed in the RSPF. In
this case, scan the document from the document glass.
Caution
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key in
Fax the document. (p.12)
1
2
5
fax mode.
AUTO RECEPTION
If the address book
screen appears, touch
the [CONDITION
SETTINGS] key to
display the condition
settings screen. (p.7)
BO
SUB ADD
ADDRESS
MEMOR
• The two-sided scanning function cannot
be used.
Note
• When using the thin-sheet scanning
function, the resolution cannot be set to
STANDARD.
• The thin-sheet scanning function can be
enabled permanently. ("SLOW SCAN
MODE" (p.100))
SPECIAL MODES
DIREX
3
Touch the [SLOW SCAN MODE] key.
The [SLOW SCAN
MODE] key is
highlighted. If the [SLOW
SLOW SCAN MODE
SCAN MODE] key is
already highlighted, the
MEMORY BOX
function has already
been enabled.
To disable the function,
touch the [SLOW SCAN MODE] key so that the key is
no longer highlighted.
Touch the [OK] key.
3
You will return to the
condition settings screen.
OK
1/2
SCAN MODE
Place the document in the RSPF.
(p.10)
4
39
FAXING A DIVIDED ORIGINAL
(DUAL PAGE SCAN)
When faxing a book or other bound document, you can use this function to divide the two open pages of the book
into two separate fax pages.
This function can only be used when the original is scanned using the document glass.
The original on the right side of the document glass is scanned first as page 1, and then the original on the left side
as page 2.
Dual page scan is only possible when the original size is 11" x 17" or 8-1/2" x 11R".
Your machine
Book or sheet original
The other machine
Printed out as
two separate pages
Transmission to
other machine
When page division is set,
[Example]
Scanned original size Transmitted document
Two 8½" x 11" pages
11" x 17"
the original is divided
into two pages when
scanned into memory
Selecting Dual Page Scan
Follow the steps below to select Dual Page Scan and then perform the transmission operation.
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key in
fax mode and then touch the [DUAL
PAGE SCAN] key.
Place the original on the document
glass (p.10), and perform the
transmission operation.
If you have more originals to scan after pressing
the [START] key ( ) and scanning the first
original, change originals and repeat scanning
until all originals have been scanned. When
finished, touch the [READ-END] key in the touch
panel. ("Using the document glass" (p.13))
1
3
SUB ADDRESS
If the address book
screen appears, touch
the [CONDITION
SETTINGS] key to
display the condition
settings screen. (p.7)
SPECIAL MODES
DIRE
ADDRESS REVIEW
MEMORY TX
POLLING
DUAL PAGE
SCAN
PROGRAM
To cancel Dual Page Scan...
Note
Press the [CLEAR ALL] key (
).
Touch the [OK] key.
2
You will return to the
main screen and the dual
page scan icon will
appear.
OK
1/2
SCAN MODE
40
PROGRAMMING FREQUENTLY
USED OPERATIONS
This function allows you to store the steps of an operation, including the destination and scanning settings, into a
program. When you want to send a document to that destination, you can simply press the appropriate program key
and the steps will be performed automatically. This function is convenient when you frequently send documents
such as a daily report to the same destination. Up to eight programs can be stored.
• A program differs from a timer transmission (p.30) in that it is not cleared from memory after transmission
takes place. A program thus allows you to repeatedly perform the same type of transmission. Note, however,
that programs do not allow you to establish a timer setting for transmission.
Note
• With the exception of polling, reception operations cannot be stored in a program.
Programs can be stored using the custom settings, and a name up to 36 characters long can be assigned.
For information on storing, editing, and deleting programs, see "STORING A PROGRAM" on page 73.
The following settings can be stored in a program:
• Destination fax number • POLLING • SLOW SCAN MODE • DUAL PAGE SCAN • COVER SHEET
• TX MESSAGE • OWN PASSCODE SELECT • CONFIDENTIAL TX • RELAY BROADCAST
• RESOLUTION and EXPOSURE
Auto-dial keys (rapid or group keys) can be used to store the destination fax number, or a full number can be
entered using the numeric keys. When storing a broadcast transmission or serial polling operation in a program, up
to 200 destination fax numbers can be stored.
3
USING A PROGRAM
In fax mode, load the document. (p.10)
Touch the program key that you wish
to execute. Make sure that the key is
highlighted and then touch the [OK]
key.
1
3
Do not load a document
if you are performing a
polling operation.
If you are going to use
Dual Page Scan (p.40),
place the document on
the document glass.
SCAN
DATA
The program key you
LINE
DATA
FAX
OK
touched is selected and you
return to the screen of step 2.
The [PROGRAM] key
and the keys of the
functions stored in the
program are highlighted.
CUSTOM SE
JOB STATUS
R SHARP
ORMAT A
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key and
then the [PROGRAM] key.
2
SUB ADDRESS
If the address book
Touch the [OK] key.
4
5
screen appears, touch
SPECIAL MODES
ADDRESS REVIEW
the [CONDITION
You will return to the condition settings screen.
DIRE
MEMORY
POLLINGTX
SETTINGS] key to
display the condition
settings screen. (p.7)
The program selection
screen appears.
DUAL PAGE
SCAN
If needed, select the original size and
other settings, and then press the
[START] key ( ).
PROGRAM
Transmission takes place according to the program.
The following settings, which cannot be
stored in a program, can be selected before
Note
pressing the [START] key (
• Original size setting (p.21)
• Two-sided scanning (p.17)
• Job build mode (p.18)
• Timer setting (p.30)
) in step 5.
Note that if the dual page function is stored in
the program to be executed, two-sided scanning
and the job build mode cannot be selected.
41
ADDING A COVER SHEET TO A
FAX TRANSMISSION
An 8-1/2" x 11" cover sheet can be attached to a fax transmission. The cover sheet is generated automatically and shows the
date, time, recipient, fax number, sender, sender’s fax number, and number of pages transmitted (cover sheet function).
A message can also be added to the top of the first page of a transmitted fax (message function). When used together with
the cover sheet function, the message is added to the top of the cover sheet.
Your (transmitting)
machine
Automatically prints
Select cover sheet
cover page
AUTOMATIC COVER SHEET
IMPORTANT
If the message function
is selected, a message
is printed.
and message
functions
DATE : MAY-11-200X FRI 07:30 PM
Transmission
T
O
: SERVICE CENTER
FAX # : 0333829161
FROM : SHARP
Beep
FAX # : 0666211221
PAGES : 02PAGES WERE SENT
(INCLUDING THIS PAGE)
If the cover sheet function is not
selected, the message is printed at
the top of the first page received.
Reception
Receiving machine
ADDING A COVER SHEET
The cover sheet selection is effective for one transmission. The number of transmitted pages indicated on the cover
sheet includes the cover sheet.
• To appear on the cover sheet, your sender’s name and number must be programmed. ("OWN NUMBER AND
NAME SET" (p.97))
Note
• A key operator program can be enabled to have a cover sheet added to every fax transmission. ("AUTO COVER
SHEET" (p.100))
• The cover sheet function cannot be used with F-code polling memory (p.54), relay request transmission (p.50),
or polling memory (p.35).
In fax mode, place the original. (p.10)
Touch the [OK] key.
1
3
You will return to the
condition settings screen.
SCAN
DATA
OK
LINE
DATA
FAX
/2
PASSCODE
SELECT
CUSTOM SE
JOB STATUS
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key, the
key, and then the [COVER SHEET] key.
Perform the fax transmission. (p.12)
2
4
SUB ADDRESS
If the address book
screen appears, touch
SPECIAL MODES
ADDRESS REVIEW
MODES
the [CONDITION
DIRE
MEMORY TX
COVER SHEET
SETTINGS] key to
display the condition
settings screen. (p.7)
The [COVER SHEET]
key is highlighted.
SE
OPTIONS
42
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS
ADDING A MESSAGE
This function adds a message to the top of the first received fax page. Message selection is only effective for one
transmission.
One the following messages can be selected: CONFIDENTIAL, URGENT, IMPORTANT, PLEASE DISTRIBUTE,
PLEASE CALL BACK
In fax mode, place the original. (p.10)
1
SCAN
DATA
LINE
DATA
FAX
CUSTOM SE
JOB STATUS
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key, the
key, and then the [TX MESSAGE]
key.
2
SUB ADDRESS
If the address book
3
screen appears, touch
the [CONDITION
SETTINGS] key to
display the condition
settings screen. (p.7)
SPECIAL MODES
P
ADDRESS REVIEW
DIRE
EET
MEMORY TX
TX MESSAGE
SENDING
OPTIONS
Touch the key of the message that
you wish to add.
3
4
5
The selected key is
highlighted.
CANCEL
OK
IMPORTANT
Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the
condition settings screen.
OK
CANCEL
OK
IMPORTANT
Perform the fax transmission. (p.12)
43
OWN NUMBER SENDING
This function prints the date, time, your programmed sender’s name, your programmed sender’s fax number, and
the page number at the top center of each page that you fax.
You can program multiple senders to enable the use of different sender names (maximum of 20).
To program a sender, see "OWN NUMBER AND NAME SET" on page 97.
Example of fax page printed out by the receiving machine
MAY-11-200X-FRI 03:00 PM SHARP PLANNING DIV.
(1) (2)
FAX No.0666211221
(3)
P.001/001
(4)
(1) Date and time: programmed in the custom settings (See "CUSTOM SETTINGS" in operation manual for copier).
(2) Sender’s name: programmed in the key operator programs. ("OWN NUMBER AND NAME SET" (p.97))
(3) Sender’s fax number: programmed in the key operator programs. ("OWN NUMBER AND NAME SET" (p.97))
(4) Page number: 3-digit number appearing in the format, "page number/total pages" (only the page number
appears if you use manual transmission or Quick On-Line transmission). If desired, you can use a
key operator program to have the page number omitted. ("PRINTING PAGE NUMBER AT
RECEIVER" (p.99))
Position of sender's information
You can select whether the sender's information is added outside the printed fax image or inside the image in the
key operator programs ("DATE/OWN NUMBER PRINT POSITION SETTING" (p.99)). The initial factory setting is
outside the image.
None of the transmitted
image is cut off; however,
the transmitted image is
longer than the scanned
image, and thus when
both the sender and the
receiver use the same size
of paper, the printed fax
may either be reduced or
split up and printed on two
pages.
The top edge of the
scanned image will be cut
off by the sender's
information; however,
when both the sender and
the receiver use the same
size of paper, the printed
fax will neither be reduced
nor split up and printed on
two pages.
Direction of
Direction of
transmission
transmission
Inside scanned data
Outside scanned data
44
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS
SELECTING THE SENDER INFORMATION THAT
APPEARS ON A FAX TRANSMISSION
Follow the steps below to select a sender from among the programmed senders.
This function is convenient when you wish to use a different sender’s name for different destinations.
In fax mode, touch the [SPECIAL
MODES] key.
Toch the [OK] key.
1
5
6
AUTO RECEPTION
You will return to the condition settings screen.
Perform the fax transmission. (p.12)
If the address book
screen appears, touch
the [CONDITION
SETTINGS] key to
display the condition
settings screen. (p.7)
BO
SUB ADD
ADDRESS
MEMOR
SPECIAL MODES
DIREX
Touch the
PASSCODE SELECT] key.
key and then the [OWN
2
The list of programmed
senders appears.
3
OWN PASSCODE
SELECT
E
Touch the desired sender key in the
list.
3
SENDER LIST
SHARP CORPORATION
02
04
06
SHARP GROUP
XX GROUP
If multiple senders have been programmed
Note
and a sender is not selected, the sender
with the lowest control number is
automatically selected.
Touch the [OK] key.
4
You will return to the
screen of step 2.
OK
1/2
45
SENDING AND RECEIVING
CONFIDENTIAL FAXES
The confidential function allows you to send and receive confidential faxes. When a fax is sent by confidential
transmission, it is held in the memory (confidential box) of the receiving machine instead of being printed out. The
fax can only be printed out when the recipient enters a confidential ID code.
This function is convenient when you need to send or receive sensitive documents, or when several departments
share the same fax machine.
To receive confidential faxes, a confidential box number and an ID code must be programmed. ("CONFIDENTIAL
CODE SET" (p.102))
The other machine
Your machine
Printing the document
1
The document is sent
3
-1
Enter the ID code
(4-digit number)
Confidential box
number
Select confidential
transmission
MARK
MARK
2
The document is stored
in the confidential box
3
-2
If the entered ID code is valid,
the received fax is printed
As shown above, receiving a fax in a confidential box is called confidential reception, and sending a fax to a
confidential box in the receiving machine is called confidential transmission.
• The confidential function can only be used when the other fax machine is a Sharp model that has the
confidential fax function. For more information, consult your dealer.
Note
• To use the confidential function, the sender's number must be programmed in the sending machine and a
confidential box number and an ID code must be programmed in the receiving machine.
Take care not to forget your confidential ID code. In the event that you forget it, print out the
confidential ID list. ("LIST PRINT" (p.105))
Caution
46
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS
CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION
Before sending a confidential fax, make sure that the receiving machine has the confidential reception function and
that it is programmed appropriately to receive confidential faxes.
If the receiving machine has more than one box for confidential reception, you will need to contact the receiving
party in advance for the appropriate box number.
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key, the
1
key, and then the [SENDING
OPTIONS] key.
SUB ADDRESS
f the address book
screen appears, touch
the [CONDITION
SPECIAL MODES
DIRE
ADDRESS REVIEW
OVER SHEET
MEMORY TX
SENDING
OPTIONS
SETTINGS] key to
display the condition
settings screen. (p.7)
Touch the [CONFIDENTIAL TX] key.
2
3
CONFIDEN-
TIAL TX
B
Touch the
confidential box number of the
recipient.
or
key to specify the
3
A number from "00" to
"99" can be selected.
CONFIDENTIAL BOX NUMBER
00
Touch the inner [OK] key.
4
You will return to the
sending options screen.
The [CONFIDENTIAL
TX] key is highlighted
and the confidential
transmission icon
appears.
OK
OK
CANCEL
Touch the outer [OK] key.
5
6
You will return to the condition settings screen.
Perform the fax transmission. (p.12)
47
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS
PRINTING A FAX RECEIVED IN A CONFIDENTIAL BOX
To print a fax received in a confidential box, you must enter the ID code (a 4-digit number from 0000 to 9999) that
was programmed when the confidential box was created.
• When a fax is received in a confidential box, a transaction report is printed to inform you. To set print
Note
conditions for transaction reports, see "TRANSACTION REPORT PRINT SELECT SETTING" on page 98.
• Faxes are automatically erased from the confidential box after being printed.
• Multiple faxes can be received in a confidential box.
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key and
then the [MEMORY BOX] key.
Press the numeric keys to enter your
ID code (4 digits).
1
5
SUB ADDRESS
If the address book
As you enter each digit,
the hyphen "-" that marks
the digit changes to an
screen appears, touch
SPECIAL MODES
ADDRESS REVIEW
W SCAN MODE
DIRE
M
the [CONDITION
SETTINGS] key to
display the condition
settings screen. (p.7)
The memory box menu
appears.
ENTER ID CODE VIA THE 10-KEY.
MEMORY TX
MEMORY BOX
asterisk " ".
If the ID code you
entered is correct,
"PRESS [START] TO
PRINT DATA." will
appear.
CANCEL
To cancel, touch the [CANCEL] key.
If the ID code is not correct, the message "ID CODE IS
NOT VERIFIED." appears and you will return to the
screen of step 4.
To return to the screen of step 4, touch the [CANCEL]
key .
Touch the [PRINT DATA] key.
2
CONFIDENTIAL
RECEPTION
Press the [START] key ( ).
6
DATA
PRINT DATA
Printing begins. If other
jobs are waiting to be
printed, the confidential
fax(es) will be printed
ahead of the other jobs,
after the current job is
finished.
Touch the [ORIGINAL CONF. BOX]
key.
3
1/2
ORIGINAL
CONF. BOX
Touch the appropriate memory box
key.
4
"
" appears next to
memory boxes that have
received faxes.
MEMORY BOX - CONFIDENTIAL BOX
SHARP GROUP
CORPO.TPS
• A confidential box cannot be deleted if it is holding a received fax.
• A received confidential fax cannot be forwarded. (p.28)
Note
48
SENDING FAXES USING THE
RELAY REQUEST FUNCTION
The relay request function is used to send a fax to a relay fax machine, and then have the relay fax machine send
the fax to mulitple end receiving machines.
Relay request machine
Relay machine
(original sender of document)
1
The document is sent from
the relay request machine
2
The document is
S.F.
stored in memory
3
3
Document is successively
transmitted to end receiving
machines programmed
in the relay machine
End receiving machine A
End receiving machine B
End receiving machine C
The fax machine that originally sends the fax is called the relay request machine, and then relays it to the
programmed end machines is called the relay machine.
The fax is printed out by the relay machine as well as by the end receiving machines.
The relay request function is useful when the relay machine is sufficiently close to the end receiving machines that
the overall cost of transmission is less than if you sent the fax directly to the end receiving machines using the
broadcast function. If used together with a timer setting to take advantage of off-peak rates, the cost of transmission
can be reduced even more.
Sending a fax to a relay machine and requesting relay transmission is called the relay request function. Receiving a
fax and broadcasting it to a group of end receiving machines is called the relay broadcast function.
• This function can only be used when the relay machine is a Sharp model that has the relay broadcast function.
For more information, consult your SHARP service center.
Note
• To allow a relay request to take place, the fax number of the relay request machine (the programmed sender’s
number) must be programmed in the relay machine as a relay ID code ("ID NUMBER MODE" (p.102)).
• To make a relay request, the relay group (the number of the relay machine and the numbers of the end
receiving machines) must be programmed. ("STORING RELAY GROUPS" (p.75))
• The relay request machine only bears the cost of sending the fax to the relay machine. The relay machine
bears the cost of sending the fax to each of the end receiving machines.
49
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS
USING THE RELAY REQUEST FUNCTION
A relay request transmission is performed by specifying the relay group and then performing a regular fax
transmission.
Only one relay group can be specified.
A relay request will be refused if an end receiving machine is specified that is not stored in the relay machine.
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key , the
1
key, and then the [SENDING
OPTIONS] key.
SUB ADDRESS
If the address book
screen appears, touch
the [CONDITION
SPECIAL MODES
DIRE
ADDRESS REVIEW
OVER SHEET
MEMORY TX
SENDING
OPTIONS
SETTINGS] key to
display the condition
settings screen. (p.7)
Touch the [RELAY BROADCAST] key.
2
RELAY
BROADCAST
DENTIAL
Touch the key of the relay group that
you wish to use.
3
The selected relay group
G OPTIONS / RELAY BROADCAST
key is highlighted.
SHARP CORPORATION
SHARP GROUP
Touch the inner [OK] key.
4
You will return to the
special transmission
screen.
The [RELAY
OK
OK
CANCEL
BROADCAST] key is
highlighted and a relay
request icon appears.
/1
Touch the outer [OK] key.
5
6
You will return to the condition settings screen.
Perform the fax transmission. (p.12)
50
Chapter 4
TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES
4
This chapter explains F-code transmission, which gives you a convenient means of performing advanced operations
such as relay broadcast transmission and confidential transmission. Normally these functions require that the other
fax machine be a similar Sharp machine; however, F-code transmission enables these functions to be performed
with any other machine that supports F-code transmission.
TRANSMISSION BETWEEN
MACHINES SUPPORTING F-CODES
This machine supports the "F-code" standard as established by the ITU-T*.
The F-code standard makes it possible to perform special operations such as relay broadcast and confidential
transmission, which previously could only be performed with another similar Sharp machine, with any other machine
that also supports F-codes.
Before using any of the functions explained in this chapter, verify that the other fax machine supports F-codes and
the function that you wish to use (the other machine may use a different name for the function).
* The ITU-T is a United Nations organization that establishes communications standards. It is a department of the International
Telecommunication Union (ITU), which coordinates global telecommunications networks and services.
51
TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES
MEMORY BOXES AND
SUB-ADDRESSES/PASSCODES REQUIRED FOR
F-CODE TRANSMISSION
Fax machines that support F-code transmission enable the creation of a "memory box" in the unit's memory. The
memory box is used to store documents received from another fax machine or documents to be sent when another
machine polls that machine. Up to 10 memory boxes can be created for each operation type, and a name can be
assigned to each box. A "sub-address" that indicates the box's location in memory must be programmed, and if
desired, a passcode can also be programmed to control access to the box.
MEMORY
7732123 Sub-address (location in memory)
Select any number up to 20 digits.
0001
SHARP
11245
Document
Group 2
7732123
Product Planning
Dept.
7732123
Box name (used to manage
boxes in your machine)
Select a name of up to 36
characters.
Product
Planning
Dept.
Product Planning
Dept.
3321
1115
1115
3333
Department
Manager
4444
Reports
010
Section
Manager
Passcode (key)
Select any number up to 20 digits.
(Not required)
11111111
123456
1115
Public Box*
*The Public Box is used for normal serial polling. ("USING POLLING MEMORY" (p.35))
When communication occurs involving a memory box, the communication will only take place if the sub-address and
passcode that the other machine sends match the sub-address and passcode programmed in your machine for that
box. Therefore, to allow communication, you must inform the other party of the sub-address and passcode of the
memory box. Likewise, to send a document to a memory box in another machine or use polling to retrieve a
document from that memory box, you must know the sub-address and passcode of that memory box.
Memory boxes are managed in this machine not only by sub-addresses and passcodes (which are number
sequences), but also by names. For example, for the memory box with the sub-address, "7732123", and the
passcode, "1115", you could assign the name "Product Planning". Assigning names makes it easier to manage
memory boxes. (Note that you do not need to inform the other party of a memory box name; the other party only
needs to know the sub-address and passcode.)
This machine uses the term "sub-address" for the location of the memory box and the term "passcode" for the
password that allows communication; however, other fax machines of other manufacturers may use different terms.
When asking the other party for a sub-address and passcode, you may find it useful to refer to the 3-character
alphabetical terminology used by the ITU-T.
This machine
ITU-T
F-code polling memory box
F-code Confidential box
F-code Relay Broadcast Function
Sub-address
Passcode
SEP
SUB
SID
SUB
SID
PWD
52
TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES
ENTERING A SUB-ADDRESS AND PASSCODE FOR A
MEMORY BOX IN THE OTHER MACHINE
When transmitting to a memory box in another fax machine, the sub-address and passcode must be entered after
the other machine's fax number. Enter the other machine's fax number as explained for a normal transmission (p.12)
or for a polling operation (p.33), and then enter the sub-address and passcode as follows:
Dial the fax number of the other
machine, or touch a rapid key.
Use the numeric keys to enter the
sub-address of the other machine's
memory box (max. 20 digits)
1
3
If the condition settings
screen appears, touch
the [ADDRESS BOOK]
key to display the
address book screen.
(p.8)
If you make a mistake,
press the [CLEAR] key
P
CORPO. TPS
SHARP GROUP
(
) and re-enter the
HARP CORPORATION
ACC.#-C
correct digit(s).
If the sub-address and
passcode have been
ACC.#-C
programmed into the rapid key, the following steps are
not needed.
Touch the [SUB ADDRESS] key once
again.
4
5
A slash "/" appears at the end of the sub-address.
Touch the [SUB ADDRESS] key.
2
Use the numeric keys to enter the
passcode of the other machine's
memory box (max. 20 digits)
A slash "/" appears at the
CONDITION
end of the fax number. If
SETTINGS
4
you make a mistake,
If a passcode has not been established for the
other box, this step is not necessary.
press the [CLEAR] key
SUB ADDRESS
(
) to clear the mistake.
ADDRESS EVIEW
• You can program a sub-address and passcode into a rapid dial key along with the fax number. (p.67)
• Manual transmission (p.61) using a sub-address and passcode is not possible.
Note
CREATING A MEMORY BOX FOR F-CODE
TRANSMISSION
F-code operations that use memory boxes include F-code polling memory (p.54), F-code confidential transmission
(p.57), and F-code relay broadcast (p.59). Memory boxes must be created to perform any of these operations.
A memory box can be created using the key operator programs. Memory boxes are created in the key operator
programs. Up to 10 boxes for each operation type can be created. The method of creating up the box varies
depending on the operation. To create, edit, or delete a memory box, see "F-CODE MEMORY BOX" on page 103.
After you have created a box, be sure to inform the other party of the sub-address and passcode.
If you attempt to create a memory box when 10 memory boxes have already been created for that operation
type, a message will appear to inform you that no more boxes can be created. Delete any unneeded memory
Note
boxes and then create the new box.
53
F-CODE POLLING MEMORY
F-code polling memory allows one fax machine to call another fax machine and initiate reception of a document that has
been scanned into the other machine's F-code polling memory box. Calling another machine and initiating reception is
called F-code polling, and scanning a document into a memory box for another machine to retrieve by polling is called
F-code polling memory. This function is approximately the same as normal polling explained on page 32; however, the
use of the F-code polling memory box means that security is provided by means of the sub-address and passcode.
How F-code polling memory works
Your machine
The other machine
Sub-address
1
F-code polling
(transmission request)
Sub-address and passcode
2
Check sub-address
and passcode
are transmitted to your machine
Passcode
Prodact Planning
3
Polling memory
box opens
4
Automatic transmission
of document data
to other machine
F-code polling is when your machine calls another machine and retrieves a document that was scanned into the
polling memory box of that machine (the reverse of the above diagram).
• To perform polling or polling memory without using an F-code, refer to page 32.
Note
• To create an F-code memory box for polling memory, refer to page 103.
• Unlike normal polling, the other machine's fax number or system number is not programmed as a passcode for
F-code polling memory. The sub-address and passcode of the polling memory box are used for polling
security.
• The receiving machine bears the expense (phone charges) of the transmission.
54
TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES
USING F-CODE POLLING MEMORY
In order for another machine to retrieve a document from your machine, you must first scan the document into the
F-code polling memory box.
You can check the document in the memory polling box by printing it out.
When using F-code polling memory, do not set the reception mode to manual reception.
Caution
Scanning a document into an F-code polling memory box
The procedure for scanning a document into an F-code polling memory box (p.103) is almost the same as the
procedure for scanning a document into the PUBLIC BOX for normal polling memory. Instead of touching the
[PUBLIC BOX] key in Step 6 of Scanning a document into polling memory (the Public Box) on page 35, touch the
key of the memory box into which you wish to scan the document. If a document has already been stored in that box,
the new document will be stored along with the existing document. If you no longer need the existing document,
delete it as explained in "Checking and deleting a document in a memory box" below.
When you touch the memory box into which you wish to scan the document, the key is
highlighted and selected as the scanning destination.
CA
MARKETING GROUP
SHARP BRANCH EX
1/1
PUBLIC
When you scan the document into the memory box, you can select whether to have the scanned document
automatically deleted after polling or left in the box to allow repeated polling.
Note
4
Checking and deleting a document in a memory box
The procedure for checking a document in an F-code polling memory box by printing it and the procedure for
deleting a document from a box are almost the same as the procedures for printing and clearing document data from
the Public Box. Instead of touching the [PUBLIC BOX] key in Step 3 of "Printing documents in the Public Box" on
page 36 or "Deleting documents from the Public Box" on page 37, touch the memory box key that contains the
document that you wish to print or clear.
If a document icon ( ) appears to the right of a memory box key, a document has
been stored in that box and you can print it out.
Note that you cannot check or clear the contents of a memory box while it is being
MARKETING GROUP
1/1
SHARP BRANCH EX
used for transmission.
PUB
55
TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES
PROCEDURE FOR F-CODE POLLING
Make sure that a document has not been placed in the RSPF or on the document glass, and then follow the steps
below.
• You must know the sub-address (SEP) and passcode (PWD) of the other machine's F-code polling memory
box.
Note
• Serial polling (selecting multiple fax machines to be polled using a group key or by touching the [NEXT
ADDRESS] key) is not possible with F-code polling.
In fax mode, touch the [SPECIAL
MODES] key and then the [POLLING]
key.
Enter the fax number, sub-address,
and passcode of the other fax
machine.
1
3
SUB ADDRESS
If the address book
To use a rapid key, touch
screen appears, touch
the [CONDITION
the [ADDRESS BOOK]
key to display the
address book screen.
See "ENTERING A
SUB-ADDRESS AND
PASSCODE FOR A
MEMORY BOX IN THE
OTHER MACHINE" on
SPECIAL MODES
DIRE
ADDRESS REVIEW
POLLING
P
CORPO. TPS
SETTINGS] key to
display the condition
settings screen. (p.7)
The [POLLING] key is
highlighted and the
HARP CORPORATION
SHARP GROUP
ACC.#-C
DUAL PAGE
SCAN
PRO
polling icon is displayed.
To cancel the polling selection, press the [POLLING]
key once again so that it is no longer highlighted.
page 53 for the procedure for entering sub-addresses
and passcodes.
Touch the [OK] key.
Press the [START] key ( ).
2
4
You will return to the
"JOB STORED." appears
on the screen.
condition settings screen.
OK
After communicating with
the other machine, your
machine prints the
1/2
SCAN MODE
received document.
To cancel the operation
Press the [JOB STATUS] key and then cancel the operation as explained on page 24.
Note
Only one F-code polling operation with a timer setting (p.30) can be stored.
56
F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION
This function is used to fax confidential documents. The sub-address and passcode programmed for a memory box
restricts access to the box, and received data can only be printed by someone who knows the print PIN. (Personal
Identification Number).
This function is convenient when faxing sensitive documents, or when multiple departments share a single fax machine.
The other machine
Your machine
When data is printed
1
Document data, together
with a sub-address and passcode,
are sent to your machine.
4
-1
Enter print PIN.
(4-digit number)
Sub-address
Passcode
2
Check sub-address
and passcode
4
-2
MARK
Data is only
printed if correct
passcode is entered.
MARK
3
Data is read into the confidential
memory box (reception is permitted)
4
As the above diagram shows, receiving a document to the machine's F-code confidential memory box is called
F-code confidential reception, and sending a document to another machine's F-code confidential memory box is
called F-code confidential transmission.
• For Sharp's regular confidential transmission function, which uses the programmed sender's fax number and
Note
ID code, see "SENDING AND RECEIVING CONFIDENTIAL FAXES" on page 46.
• See "F-CODE MEMORY BOX" on page 103 for the procedures for creating, editing, and deleting F-code
confidential memory boxes.
Take care not to forget the print PIN that is programmed in the F-code confidential memory box.
If you forget the passcode, print it out in the key operator programs. ("LIST PRINT" (p.105))
Caution
F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION
F-code confidential transmission is performed in the same way as a normal transmission (see chapter 2); however,
you must enter the sub-address (SUB) and passcode (SID) after the fax number of the other machine. (Omit the
passcode if the other machine does not use a passcode.)
For the procedure for entering sub-addresses and passcodes, see "ENTERING A SUB-ADDRESS AND
PASSCODE FOR A MEMORY BOX IN THE OTHER MACHINE" on page 53.
F-code confidential reception is performed in the same way as normal reception (see chapter 2); however, you must
inform the other party of the sub-address (SUB) and passcode (SID) of your confidential memory box. (Omit the
passcode if a passcode is not programmed in the box.)
• An F-code confidential transmission can be used in combination with the broadcast transmission function*
(p.27) or the timer transmission function (p.30), and can be stored as a program (p.73).
*Only when the destinations are stored in rapid keys.
Note
• F-code confidential transmission is not possible if the other machine does not support F-code transmission or
does not have an F-code memory box programmed.
• Before performing an F-code confidential transmission, you will need to ask the operator of the other machine
for the sub-address and passcode programmed in that machine. You can omit entry of the passcode if a
passcode is not programmed in the other machine.
• A sub-address and passcode can be stored in a rapid key together with a fax number. To store rapid keys, see
page 67.
57
TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES
PRINTING A DOCUMENT RECEIVED TO AN F-CODE
CONFIDENTIAL MEMORY BOX
A document received to an F-code confidential memory box can be printed by entering the print PIN (0000 to 9999)
that was programmed when the memory box was created. Printing of the confidential document will take priority over
any other jobs waiting to be printed.
• Make sure that a Transaction Report is set to to print out in the key operator programs so that you will be
informed when a confidential document is received. ("TRANSACTION REPORT PRINT SELECT SETTING"
(p.98))
Note
• A document received to an F-code confidential memory box is automatically cleared after printing.
• Multiple faxes can be received to an F-code confidential memory box.
In fax mode, touch the [SPECIAL
MODES] key and then touch the
[MEMORY BOX] key.
Press the numeric keys to enter the
4-digit print PIN.
1
4
As each digit is entered,
"-" changes to " ".
If the print PIN you
SUB ADDRESS
If the address book
screen appears, touch
ENTER PIN VIA THE 10-KEY.
SPECIAL MODES
ADDRESS REVIEW
W SCAN MODE
entered is correct, the
message "PRESS
[START] TO PRINT
DATA" appears.
the [CONDITION
SETTINGS] key to
display the condition
settings screen. (p.7)
The memory box menu
appears.
DIRE
M
CANCEL
MEMORY BOX
If the passcode is not correct, the message "PIN
IS NOT VERIFIED." appears and you will return
to the screen of step 3.
To cancel the operation, touch the [CANCEL] key.
To return to the screen of step 3, touch the
[CANCEL] key.
Touch the [PRINT DATA] key.
2
Press the [START] key ( ).
5
CONFIDENTIAL
RECEPTION
Printing begins. If
DATA
PRINT DATA
another print job is
already is progress, the
confidential document is
printed after that job is
completed.
Touch the memory box key containing
the document that you wish to print.
3
A ( ) mark appears to
the right of memory
boxes that have received
documents.
MEMORY BOX - SUB ADDRESS CONFIDENTIAL BOX
SHARP GROUP CORPO. TPS
A memory box cannot be
selected while it is being
used for transmission.
If a received document remains in an F-code confidential memory box, the memory box cannot be deleted.
Note
58
F-CODE RELAY BROADCAST
TRANSMISSION
The F-code relay broadcast function is used to have a relay request fax machine send a fax to a relay fax machine,
and then have the relay fax machine send the fax to mulitple end receiving machines. To use this function, the fax
numbers of the end receiving machines must be stored in the relay machine.
The relay machine and the relay request machine (original sender of the fax) must both support F-codes; however,
the end receiving machines do not need to support F-codes.
Relay request machine (sends document)
Relay machine (your machine)
2
1
Check sub-address
and passcode
Document is sent from
machine requesting
Sub-address
relay transmission
Passcode
3
Document data is
S.F.
read into relay broadcast
memory box
(reception is permitted).
4
Document is successively transmitted
to end receiving machines programmed
in the relay broadcast memory box.
4
Receiving machine A
Receiving machine B
Receiving machine C
The machine that originally sends the document is called the relay request machine, and the machine that has a
memory box containing the end receiving machines and which relays the received document to those machines is
called the relay machine.
The document sent by the relay request machine is also printed by the relay machine.
For example, corporate headquarters in Seattle wants to send the same document to branch offices in San
Francisco, Oakland, Berkeley, and San Jose. If the San Francisco office creates a relay broadcast memory box and
programs the Oakland, Berkeley, and San Jose offices as end receiving destinations, the overall phone charges will
be lower than if the Seattle office uses the regular broadcast transmission function (p.26). This function can also be
combined with a timer setting (p.30) to take advantage of off-peak rates, allowing a further reduction in phone
charges.
Transmission by the relay machine is called "F-code relay broadcast transmission", and transmission from the relay
request machine to the relay machine is called "F-code relay request transmission".
• For information on Sharp's reqular relay broadcast function, which uses the programmed sender's number and
Note
relay ID code, see "SENDING FAXES USING THE RELAY REQUEST FUNCTION" on page 49.
• To create an F-code relay broadcast memory box and program, edit, and delete end receiving machines, see
"F-CODE MEMORY BOX" on page 103. When creating a box, a passcode (SID) can be omitted.
• The relay request machine only bears the expense of sending the document to the relay machine. The relay
machine bears the expense of sending the document to each of the end receiving machines.
59
TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES
USING THE F-CODE RELAY BROADCAST FUNCTION
(your machine is the relay machine)
When a document is received from a relay request machine, the F-code relay broadcast function transmits the
document to the end receiving machines using a memory box only if the sub-address and passcode sent by the
relay request machine are correct.
Refer to "F-CODE MEMORY BOX" on page 103 for the procedures for creating, editing, and deleting memory
boxes.
Up to 120 end receiving machines (rapid keys or group keys, and full fax numbers entered with the numeric keys)
can be programmed in an F-code relay broadcast memory box.
A document received from a relay request machine is initially stored in the memory box of your machine. Your
machine (the relay machine) also prints the document, thus the document is first stored as a print job and then as
transmission jobs to each of the programmed end receiving machines. The document data is automatically cleared
after transmission to all end receiving machines is finished.
USING THE F-CODE RELAY REQUEST FUNCTION
(your machine requests a relay broadcast)
First ask the operator of the other F-code machine to create an F-code relay broadcast memory box and program
the end receiving machines in that box. Ask the operator of the other machine for the sub-address (SUB) and
passcode (SID) of the memory box.
When you send the document to the relay machine, enter the sub-address and passcode after the fax number. The
document will be stored in the memory box of the relay machine, and then transmitted from the relay machine to
each of the programmed end receiving machines. A passcode (SID) need not be entered when dialing if a passcode
was not programmed for the memory box.
Aside from the method of dialing the relay machine, the transmission procedure is the same as for a normal
transmission (see chapter 2).
See "ENTERING A SUB-ADDRESS AND PASSCODE FOR A MEMORY BOX IN THE OTHER MACHINE" on
page 53 for the procedure for entering a sub-address and passcode after the fax number of the other
machine.
60
Chapter 5
CONVENIENT METHODS OF USE
5
This chapter explains convenient features that can be used to send a document, as well as features that expand the
range of use of the fax machine such as connecting an extension phone.
CONNECTING AN EXTENSION PHONE
You can connect a telephone to the machine and use it as an extension phone to place and receive calls like any
normal phone. You can also activate fax reception from the phone (remote operation).
• If you connect a combination telephone/answering machine to the machine, you will not be able to use the
answering machine function.
Note
• The extension phone must be directly connected to the machine's extension phone jack as explained below.
CONNECTING AN EXTENSION PHONE
Make sure you hear a
"click" sound indicating
that the cord is securely
connected.
Insert the end of the extension phone
1
cord into the extension phone jack on
the rear of the machine.
Extension
phone jack
SENDING A FAX AFTER TALKING ON THE PHONE
(MANUAL TRANSMISSION)
If the other fax machine is set to manual reception, you can talk to the other party and then send a fax without
breaking the connection. This procedure is called manual transmission.
Automatic redialing ("If the receiving party is busy" (p.15)) will not take place if the line is busy.
Note
Make sure that the machine is in fax
mode.
Select the original size, resolution,
exposure, and other settings as
needed.
• Manually setting the original size (p.20)
• Selecting the resolution (p.21)
• Selecting the exposure (p.22)
1
3
4
When the [FAX] key light
SCAN
FAX
DATA
is on, the machine is in
fax mode. If the light is
not on, press the [FAX]
key.
LINE
DATA
CUSTOM SE
JOB STATUS
Lift the extension phone.
Or, you can press the [SPEAKER] key.
("ON-HOOK DIALING" (p.11))
Place the original. (p.10)
2
If you have loaded the original on the
document glass, you can only send one
page by manual transmission.
Note
61
CONVENIENT METHODS OF USE
Dial the number of the other party or
After the other party switches to fax
reception, press your [START] key
5
7
8
touch a rapid key.
You can also dial using
(
).
the keypad on the
Transmission begins.
SPE
extension phone.
You cannot use a group
key or a rapid key that
includes a sub-address
and passcode.
CORPO. TPS
HARP CORPORATION
SHARP GROUP
ACC.#-C
Speak to the other party when they
answer.
If you used the [SPEAKER] key to dial, lift the
extension phone to talk.
6
Replace the extension phone.
RECEIVING A FAX AFTER TALKING (MANUAL RECEPTION)
When an extension phone is connected to the machine and you have set the reception mode to MANUAL, you can
talk to a person who wishes to send a fax manually and then begin fax reception without breaking the connection.
Changing the reception mode to MANUAL.
Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.
Touch the [MANUAL RECEPTION]
key.
1
3
The [MANUAL
LINE
DATA
RECEPTION] key is
highlighted.
AUTO RECEPTION
CUSTOM SETTINGS
B STATUS
MANUAL RECEPTION
Touch the [RECEIVE MODE] key.
Touch the [OK] key.
2
4
The reception mode is
set to MANUAL.
OK
LIST PRINT
CEPTION
RECEIVE MODE
ECEPTION
To return the reception mode to AUTO, touch the [AUTO RECEPTION] key in step 3 above.
Note
62
CONVENIENT METHODS OF USE
Activating fax reception from an extension phone (remote reception)
After speaking on the extension phone, you can activate fax reception from the extension phone. This is called
"remote reception". After speaking, or when you hear a fax tone through the extension phone, perform the following
procedure with the extension phone still lifted.
This function cannot be used if you are on a pulse dial line and the extension phone cannot issue tone signals.
To find out whether or not the extension telephone can issue tone signals, see the phone’s manual.
Note
If you are on a pulse dial line, set your
phone to issue tone signals.
Refer to your phone's manual to set the phone to
issue tone signals.
If your phone is already set to issue tone signals,
proceed to the next step.
Press the "5" key on the extension
phone's keypad, and then press the
1
2
3
"
" key twice.
Fax reception is activated.
Replace the extension phone.
The one-digit number that is used to activate fax reception from an extension phone (initially set to "5") is called
the "remote reception number". You can change this number to any number from 0 to 9 in the key operator
programs. ("REMOTE RECEPTION NUMBER SETTING" (p.99))
Note
When the machine is in Fax mode
A fax can be received manually even when transmission is in progress.
When the machine rings, lift the
extension phone and speak.
If you hear a fax tone through the extension
phone, do not speak and proceed to the next
step.
Replace the extension phone.
1
3
When reception is finished, you will hear a "beep"
sound and the fax will be printed.
5
• If there are previously stored print jobs,
Note
the received fax will be printed after the
previously stored jobs are finished.
• You can talk on the extension phone and
manually receive a fax while the machine
is copying.
With the extension phone still lifted,
touch the [FAX RECEIVE] key.
Reception begins when
2
FAX MEMORY:100%
SPECIAL MODES
ADDRESS
BOOK
the other party begins
transmission.
To adjust the receiver
volume, touch the
[VOLUME
• If the machine rings during copying, lift the
extension phone and speak. To receive a
fax, press the [FAX] key with the
extension phone still lifted. When you
hear a fax tone through the extension
phone, touch the [FAX RECEIVE] key.
FAX RECEIVE
VOLUME ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT] key. You
will switch through 3
levels (low, medium, and high).
63
FAXING A DOCUMENT FROM A
COMPUTER (PC-FAX)
If a computer is connected to the machine and the PC-FAX driver installed in the computer, a document created on
the computer can be sent directly to a fax machine. There is no need to print the document and then scan it on the
machine.
• This function can only be used for transmission. Faxes sent to the machine cannot be received by the
computer.
Note
• After sending a fax from your computer, check with the recipient to see if the fax was received. You can also
check the result of transmission on a Activity report. (p.85)
• Regardless of the fax settings, this function only rotates 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) length (11" x 17" (A3) width) originals
before transmission.
• Originals less than 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) width are transmitted as 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) width documents.
• This function can only be used in a Windows environment.
Your machine
The other machine
Select the PC-FAX driver and
follow the same procedure as
when printing the document.
Transmission
to the receiving
fax machine.
The computer
cannot be used
to receive faxes.
USING PC-FAX TRANSMISSION
To fax a document using the PC-FAX function, use the same procedure as when you print the document from the
application. First switch to the installed PC-FAX driver and then execute printing. Image data for fax transmission will
be generated and the image sent as a fax.
For more information on using the PC-FAX function, see the "Operation manual" that is installed along with the
PC-FAX driver. To open the manual, click the Windows Start button, select "All Programs" ("Programs" in operating
systems other than Windows XP), "SHARP PC-FAX Driver", and then "Operation manual".
64
Chapter 6
PROGRAMMING
6
This chapter explains how to program auto dial keys (rapid and group keys), programs, relay groups, and user
indexes. It also explains how to print out lists of stored settings.
PROGRAMMING
Auto dial keys (rapid and group keys), programs, relay groups, and user indexes are stored and edited using the
operation panel of the machine.
STORING, EDITING, AND DELETING
AUTO DIAL KEYS, PROGRAMS,
AND RELAY GROUPS
This section explains the procedures for storing, editing, and deleting auto-dial keys (rapid keys and group keys),
programs, and relay groups. (The procedure for using rapid keys and group keys is explained in "TRANSMISSION
BY AUTO-DIALING (RAPID DIALING AND GROUP DIALING)" on page 16, the procedure for using programs is
explained "PROGRAMMING FREQUENTLY USED OPERATIONS" on page 41, and the procedure for using relay
groups is explained in "SENDING FAXES USING THE RELAY REQUEST FUNCTION" on page 49.)
A combined total of 500 rapid keys and group keys can be stored. Eight programs and ten relay groups can also be
stored. If you attempt to store more than these, a warning message will appear. In this case, delete any auto-dial
keys, programs, or relay groups that are no longer needed (rapid keys: page 70, group keys: page 72, programs:
page 74, relay groups: page 77), and then store the new auto-dial key, program, or relay group.
To cancel a storing, editing, or deleting procedure, press the [CLEAR ALL] key (
condition settings screen.
). You will return to the
Note
To store, edit, or delete an auto-dial key, program, or group, first follow steps 1 through 4 below.
Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.
Touch the [ADDRESS CONTROL] key.
1
2
LINE
DATA
ADDRESS
CONTROL
RE
CUSTOM SETTINGS
B STATUS
KEY OPERATOR PRO
65
PROGRAMMING
Touch the [DIRECT ADDRESS /
PROGRAM] key.
3
The DIRECT ADDRESS
/ PROGRAM menu
appears.
ESS CONTROL
DIRECT ADDRESS / PROGRAM
Touch the desired key and perform
the programming operation.
See the pages indicated below for the
operation you wish to perform.
4
5
CUSTOM SETTINGS
DIRECT ADDRESS / PROGRAM
OK
STORE
RAPID
GROUP
AMEND/DELETE
PROGRAM
RELAY GROUP
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
[RAPID] key
Storing a rapid dial key (p.67)
[PROGRAM] key
Storing a program key (p.73)
[RELAY GROUP] key
Storing a relay group (p.75)
[GROUP] key
Storing a group key (p.71)
[AMEND/DELETE] key
• Rapid key (p.70)
• Group key (p.72)
• Program (p.74)
• Relay group (p.77)
If no auto dial numbers (rapid keys or group keys), programs, or relay groups are stored, the [AMEND/DELETE]
key will be grayed out.
Note
66
PROGRAMMING
STORING RAPID DIAL KEYS
To store a rapid key, follow steps 1 to 4 on pages 65 to 66 (touch the [RAPID] key in step 4), and then follow the
steps below.
Touch the [NAME] key.
Touch the [INDEX] key.
1
5
The "No." that
DIRECT ADDRESS / RAPID
automatically appears is
the lowest number from
001 to 500 that has not
yet been programmed.
When the key is touched,
the letter-entry screen
appears. Enter up to 36
characters for the name.
NAME
INDEX
SHARP CORPORATION
NAME
INDEX
FAX
F
KEY NAME
KEY NAME
69
Touch the desired index key.
6
Refer to page 80 for the procedure for entering
letters.
NEXT
EXIT
OK
DIRECT ADDRESS / RAPID
Touch the [INITIAL] key.
INDEX
2
SELECT THE CUSTOM INDEX WHERE YOU REGISTER THIS ADDRESS.
USER 1
USER 2
USER 3
USER 4
USER 5
USER 6
DO YOU REGISTER THIS ADDRESS AT THE [NT USE], TOO?
YES NO
INITIAL
• Select one of the upper row of keys (USER 1
through USER 6) to determine the location of the
rapid key when the GROUP index is displayed
instead of the ABC index (p.78).
MODE
• The lower keys are for selecting whether or not to
include the rapid key in the [FREQUENT USE]
index.
• If you touch the wrong key, simply touch the correct
key.
Touch the desired letter key.
3
If the name entered in
step 1 is in alphabetical
letters, the first letter will
be highlighted.
INITIAL
S
Touch the [OK] key.
6
7
The selected letter key is
highlighted. If you select
the wrong key, touch the
SPACE
Touch the [FAX No.] key.
8
correct key.
The fax number entry
The initial you enter here determines the
position of the rapid key in the ABC index.
Note
screen appears.
ORPORATION
For information on the ABC index, see page
8.
FAX No.
ODE
Touch the [OK] key.
4
CANCEL
OK
ABC
abc
12#$%
PACE
AB/ab
ÃÄÂ/ãäâ
67
PROGRAMMING
Use the numeric keys to enter the fax
number.
Touch the [OK] key.
9
12
13
You will return to the rapid key programming
screen.
"REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED." will appear
highlighted to the right of "No.".
EXIT
OK
DIRECT ADDRESS / RAPID
NEXT
001
CANCEL
FAX No.
ENTER THE FAX No. VIA THE 10-KEY PAD, THEN PRESS [OK].
0666211221
PAUSE
SUB ADDRESS
The "FAX No." line only shows 32 digits,
regardless of the number of digits stored in
Note
the number.
•
To insert a pause between digits of the number, touch
the [PAUSE] key. The pause appears as a hyphen "-".
See page 97 to set the duration of the pause.
Check the key name.
• If you make a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key (
)
The characters appearing next to the [KEY
NAME] key will be displayed in the key. Only the
first 18 characters of the name entered in step 1
will be displayed.
If you need to change the name that will be
displayed in the key, touch the [KEY NAME] key
to clear one digit at a time, and then enter the correct
digit(s).
• If you are not going to enter a sub-address and
password after the fax number, go to step 12.
• For information on sub-addresses and
Note
passwords, see "TRANSMISSION
BETWEEN MACHINES SUPPORTING
F-CODES" on page 51.
(If you do not wish to
REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED.
change the name, this
NAME
SHARP CORPORATION
step is not necessary).
See page 80 for the
procedure for entering
characters.
INDEX
USER 3
FAX No
• The maximum number of digits that can
be entered is as follows:
When the destination does not include a
sub-address and passcode, 50 digits
including the fax number and any pauses
(hyphens).
KEY NAME
SHARP CORPORATION
When the destination includes a
sub-address and passcode, 92 digits
including the fax number, any pauses
(hyphens), and slashes "/" (to separate
the sub-address and passcode).
Check the transmission settings
14
The initial transmission settings are
"TRANSMISSION SPEED: 33.6 kbps" and
"INTERNATIONAL CORRESPONDENCE
MODE: NONE". To change either of the settings,
touch the [MODE] key.
If you need to enter a sub-address, touch
the [SUB ADDRESS] key and then enter
the sub-address with the numeric keys.
When you touch the [SUB
10
If you do not wish to
change the settings, this
INITIAL
step is not necessary.
After touching the
[MODE] key, you can
change either of the two
settings. When finished,
touch the [OK] key.
FAX No.
0666211221/3456/987654
PRESS [OK].
ADDRESS] key, a slash is
entered after the fax
33.6 kbps/NONE
MODE
PAUSE
number. Enter the
sub-address after the
slash (max. 20 digits).
If you do not wish to enter
a passcode, go to step 12.
SUB ADDRESS
Transmission speed
Speed selections are 33.6 kbps, 14.4 kbps, 9.6 kbps,
and 4.8 bps. The higher the number, the faster the
transmission speed.
If you wish to enter a passcode, touch the
[SUB ADDRESS] key once again and enter
the passcode with the numeric keys.
11
Set the transmission speed only when you
Note
know what speed is most suitable, such as
when you are sending a fax to a foreign
country and telephone line conditions are
bad. If you do not know the line condition, do
not change this setting.
When you touch the
[SUB ADDRESS] key, a
o. VIA THE 10-KEY PAD, THEN PRESS [O
0666211221/3456/
slash is entered after the
sub-address. Enter the
passcode after the slash
(max. 20 digits).
68
PROGRAMMING
International correspondence mode
Selections are NONE, MODE 1, MODE 2, and MODE 3.
• When sending a fax to a foreign country,
telephone line conditions can sometimes
distort the fax or interrupt the
Note
transmission. Selecting the right
international correspondence mode can
help alleviate these problems.
• If errors frequently occur when sending a
fax to a foreign country, try each of modes
1 to 3 and select the mode that enables
the best transmission.
If you have finished programming
rapid keys, touch the [EXIT] key.
If you wish to program another rapid
key, touch the [NEXT] key.
15
If you touch the [EXIT]
NEXT
EXIT
key, you will return to the
screen of step 4 on page
66.
INITI
S
0666211221/3456/987654
If you touch the [NEXT]
key, you will return to the
screen of step 1 on page
67.
MODE
33.6 kbps/NONE
6
69
PROGRAMMING
EDITING AND DELETING RAPID KEYS
If you wish to delete a rapid key or change the fax number, name, or other information programmed in a rapid key,
follow steps 1 through 3 on pages 65 to 66 and then perform the following procedure.
Touch the [AMEND/DELETE] key.
Make sure that your changes are
correct, and then touch the [EXIT] key.
You will return to the
1
4
EXIT
DELETE
screen of step 2. If you
wish to change another
rapid key, repeat steps 2
through 4.
AMEND/DELETE
INITIAL
S
Touch the rapid key you wish to edit
or delete.
2
Touch the [DELETE] key.
5
6
EXIT
DIRECT ADDRESS / AMEND/DELETE
SELECT ADDRESS TO AMEND/DELETE.
1/1
SHARP CORPORATION
CORPO. TPS
PROGRAM
DELETE
EXIT
SHARP GROUP
D
F
H
RELAY GROUP
E
G
INITIAL
S
FREQUENT USE
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC
GROUP
• To edit a rapid key, follow steps 3 and 4.
• To delete a rapid key, follow steps 5 and 6.
• When you have finished editing or deleting, touch
the [EXIT] key.
Touch the [YES] key.
You will return to the
Touch the key of the item that you
3
screen of step 2. If you
wish to delete another
rapid key, repeat steps 2,
5, and 6.
DELETE THE ADDRESS?
SHARP CORPORATION
wish to change (change the
information in the same way as you
stored the information on pages 67 to
69).
NO
YES
DELETE
EXIT
DIRECT ADDRESS / AMEND/DELETE
NAME
INDEX
INITIAL
SHARP CORPORATION
S
USER 3
FAX No.
0666211221/3456/987654
KEY NAME
MODE
SHARP CORPORATION
33.6 kbps/NONE
If you cannot edit or delete a rapid key
If you attempt to edit or delete a rapid key in the following situations, a warning message will appear and
editing/deletion will not be possible.
Note
• The rapid key you wish to edit or delete is currently being used for transmission or is used in a currently stored
transmission job (including a timer transmission). ("CANCELING A FAX TRANSMISSION" (p.24))
• The rapid key is included in a group key. ("EDITING AND DELETING GROUP KEYS" (p.72))
• The rapid key is included in a group of end receiving machines for an F-code relay broadcast operation.
("Editing or deleting a memory box" (p.105))
• The rapid key is included in a program. ("EDITING AND DELETING PROGRAMS" (p.74))
If the key is being used for a current transmission or currently stored transmission, cancel the transmission or
wait until it is completed and then change or delete the key. If the key is included in one of the above groups,
delete the key from the group and then change or delete the key.
70
PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING A GROUP KEY
Up to 200 destinations can be stored in a group key. To program a group key, follow steps 1 through 4 on pages 65
and 66 (touch the [GROUP] key in step 4), and then perform the following procedure.
Follow steps 1 through 7 of "STORING
RAPID DIAL KEYS" (p.67) to enter a
GROUP NAME, INITIAL, and INDEX.
To check the destinations that you
have stored in the group, touch the
[ADDRESS REVIEW] key.
1
4
A list of your selected
destinations is displayed.
You can delete a
destination by touching it.
When a message
Touch the [ADDRESS] key.
2
1/1
10-KEY PAD
ADDRESS REVIEW
ME
SHARP DIGITAL DOCUMENT SYSTEMS
appears asking if you
USER 2
ADDRESS
OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC
ROUP
want to delete the
destination, touch the
[YES] key.
ME
Touch the outer [OK] key.
5
6
7
Touch index keys and the
keys
3
The number of
as needed, and touch rapid keys of
the destinations that you wish to store
in the group.
destinations in the group
appears to the right of
the [ADDRESS] key.
OK
1/1
DIRECT ADDRESS / GROUP
SELECT ADDRESS.
OK
B
A
1/1
SHARP CORPORATION
C GROUP
10-KEY PAD
ADDRESS REVIEW
CORPO. TPS
Check the name of the key (see step
13 on page 68).
The characters appearing next to the [KEY
NAME] key will be displayed in the group key. To
change these characters, touch the [KEY NAME]
key (this step is not necessary if you do not wish
to change the characters).
FREQUENT USE
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC
GROUP
• Rapid keys that have been touched are highlighted.
• If you touch the wrong key, simply touch it again to
cancel the highlighting and remove the destination
from the group.
• You can also touch the [10-KEY PAD] key and enter
a full fax number with the numeric keys. See steps 9
to 12 of "STORING RAPID DIAL KEYS" (p.68).
6
The procedure for entering characters is
explained on page 80.
If you have finished programming
group keys, touch the [EXIT] key.
If you wish to program another group
key, touch the [NEXT] key.
One group key cannot be stored in another
group key. Group keys are grayed out and
Note
cannot be selected.
If you touch the [EXIT] key, you will return to the
screen of step 4 on page 66.
If you touch the [NEXT] key, the screen for
programming a new group key will appear.
71
PROGRAMMING
EDITING AND DELETING GROUP KEYS
If you need to edit or delete a group key, follow steps 1 through 3 on pages 65 and 66 and then perform the following
procedure.
• The rapid keys stored in the group are highlighted.
To add another rapid key to the group, touch the key
to highlight it.
Touch the [AMEND/DELETE] key.
1
• To delete a rapid key from the group, touch the key
so that it is no longer highlighted.
• To delete a destination that was entered with the
numeric keys after touching the [10-KEY PAD] key,
delete the destination from the list that appears when
the [ADDRESS REVIEW] key is touched. See step 4
on page 71. Rapid dial keys can also be deleted
from the broadcast list.
AMEND/DELETE
• When finished, touch the [OK] key.
Touch the group key that you wish to
edit or delete.
2
Make sure that the edited information
is correct, and then touch the [EXIT]
4
EXIT
DIRECT ADDRESS / AMEND/DELETE
SELECT ADDRESS TO AMEND/DELETE.
1/1
SHARP CORPORATION
CORPO. TPS
key.
PROGRAM
SHARP GROUP
D
F
H
If you wish to edit
another group key,
repeat steps 2 through 4.
RELAY GROUP
DELETE
EXIT
S
E
G
FREQUENT USE
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC
GROUP
INITIAL
• To edit a group key, follow steps 3 and 4.
• To delete a group key, follow steps 5 and 6.
• When you have finished editing or deleting, touch
the [EXIT] key.
S
Touch the [DELETE] key.
5
6
Touch the key of the item you wish to
3
DELETE
EXIT
S
change (to edit the item, follow the
same steps as for rapid keys on pages
67 to 69).
INITIAL
DIRECT ADDRESS / AMEND/DELETE
DELETE
EXIT
No.002
S
GROUP NAME
INDEX
SHARP GROUP
USER 2
INITIAL
S
ADDRESS
2 ADDRESSES
Touch the [YES] key.
KEY NAME
SHARP GROUP
If you wish to delete
another group key,
repeat steps 2 and 5
through 6.
DELETE THE ADDRESS?
SHARP CORPORATION
• To edit a destination stored in a group key, touch the
[ADDRESS] key. The following screen appears.
NO
YES
DIRECT ADDRESS / AMEND/DELETE
OK
SELECT ADDRESS.
A
B
1/1
SHARP CORPORATION
C GROUP
10-KEY PAD
ADDRESS REVIEW
CORPO. TPS
FREQUENT USE
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC
GROUP
72
PROGRAMMING
If you cannot edit or delete a group key
If you attempt to edit or delete a group key in the following situations, a warning message will appear and
editing/deletion will not be possible.
Note
• The rapid key you wish to change or delete is currently being used for transmission or is used in a currently
stored transmission job (including a timer transmission). ("CANCELING A FAX TRANSMISSION" (p.24))
• The group key is included in the end receiving machines for an F-code relay broadcast operation. ("Editing or
deleting a memory box" (p.105))
• The group key is included in a program. ("EDITING AND DELETING PROGRAMS" (p.74))
If the key is being used for a current transmission or currently stored transmission, cancel the transmission or
wait until it is completed and then edit or delete the key. If the key is included in a program or in the end receiving
machines for an F-code relay broadcast operation, delete the key from the program or operation and then edit or
delete the key.
STORING A PROGRAM
You can store the following numbers and functions in a program to enable easy transmission by simply executing
the program.
• Destination fax number • RESOLUTION and EXPOSURE settings • POLLING • SLOW SCAN MODE
• DUAL PAGE SCAN* • COVER SHEET • TX MESSAGE • OWN PASSCODE SELECT
• SENDING OPTIONS (CONFIDENTIAL TX, RELAY BROADCAST)
*The only settings that can be selected at the time of execution of a program that includes dual page scanning are
an original size setting and a timer transmission setting.
To store a program, follow steps 1 through 4 on pages 65 to 66 (touch the [PROGRAM] key in step 4), and then
perform the following procedure.
Timer transmission, original size, two-sided copying, and job build mode settings cannot be stored in a program.
However, these settings can be selected when a program is used for transmission.
Note
Touch the [PROGRAM NAME] key.
Touch the keys for the settings that
you wish to store.
1
3
The "No." that automatically
PROGRAM
ENTER PROGRAM YOU REQUIRE.
OK
CANCEL
appears is the lowest
No.1
AUTO
ADDRESS
BOOK
number from 1 to 8 that has
not yet been programmed.
When the PROGRAM
NAME key is touched, the
letter-entry screen appears.
Enter up to 36 characters
for the name.
EXPOSURE
PROGRAM NAME
STANDARD
10-KEY PAD
RESOLUTION
ADDRESS
ETTINGS
SPECIAL MODES
ADDRESS REVIEW
6
RESOLUTION
DIRECT TX
MEMORY TX
SPECIAL
MODES
• The [10-KEY PAD] key can be touched to enter a
number with the numeric keys.
• For more information on selecting the settings, see
the following pages:
Exposure (p.22), Resolution (p.21),
Address Book (p.16),
Direct TX (p.7), Memory TX (p.7)
Special modes
• Polling (p.33)
See page 80 for the procedure for entering letters.
Touch the [SETTINGS] key.
2
No.1
PROGRAM FOR SHARP
ADDRESS
PROGRAM NAME
SETTINGS
•
Thin-page scanning (p.39)
Cover sheet (p.42)
• Dual page scanning (p.40)
•
RESOLUTION
• Transmission message (p.43)
• Sender (p.45)
SPECIAL
MODES
• Confidential transmission (p.47)
• Relay request transmission (p.50)
Touch the [OK] key.
4
73
PROGRAMMING
Your settings are displayed. Make
sure that they are correct.
If you are finished storing programs,
touch the [EXIT] key.
5
6
If you wish to store another program,
touch the [NEXT] key.
PROGRAM
NEXT
EXIT
REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED.
No.1
PROGRAM FOR SHARP
PROGRAM NAME
If you touch the [EXIT] key, you will return to the
screen of step 4 on page 66.
If you touch the [NEXT] key, you will return to the
screen of step 1.
ADDRESS
2 ADDRESSES
SETTINGS
RESOLUTION
STANDARD
POLLING
EXPOSURE
AUTO
SPECIAL
MODES
EDITING AND DELETING PROGRAMS
If you need to edit or delete a previously stored program, perform steps 1 through 3 on pages 65 and 66 and then
perform the following procedure:
Touch the [AMEND/DELETE] key.
Touch the program that you wish to
edit or delete.
1
3
EXIT
DIRECT ADDRESS / AMEND/DELETE
SELECT ADDRESS TO AMEND/DELETE.
PROGRAM
ADDRESS
BOOK
AMEND/DELETE
PROGRAM FOR SHARP
ABYS FAX FOREMAT A
EMAIL NEWS GROUP
RELAY GROUP
• When you touch the program name, the edit/delete
screen for the selected program appears.
• Touching the [ADDRESS BOOK] key returns you to
the screen of step 2.
Touch the [PROGRAM] key.
2
EXIT
DELETE
EXIT
DIRECT ADDRESS / AMEND/DELETE
1/1
PROGRAM
No.1
PROGRAM NAME
PROGRAM FOR SHARP
RELAY UP
ADDRESS
2 ADDRESSES
STANDARD
SETTINGS
RESOLUTION
EXPOSURE
AUTO
SPECIAL
MODES
POLLING
To edit the program, follow the same
procedure as for storing the program.
To delete the program, touch the
[DELETE] key and then touch the
[YES] key in the confirmation screen
that appears.
4
74
PROGRAMMING
STORING RELAY GROUPS
Use this procedure to store a relay group (relay machine and end receiving machines) for a relay request
transmission (p.50). Up to 10 relay groups can be stored.
One relay machine is stored per group. The relay machine is specified by entering the fax number with the numeric
keys.
Each end receiving machine is specified by entering the full fax number with the numeric keys, or by specifying a
rapid number, speed dial number, or group number stored in the relay machine.
To store a relay group, follow steps 1 to 4 on pages 65 to 66 (touch the [RELAY GROUP] key in step 4), and then
follow the steps below.
Touch the [GROUP NAME] key.
Touch the [OK] key.
1
4
5
The "No." that
You will return to the relay group storing screen.
Touch the [RECIPIENT] key.
The screen for entering
automatically appears is
GROUP NAME
the lowest number from
01 to 10 that has not yet
been programmed.
RELAY TION
GROUP NAME
RELAY STATION
RECIPIENT
SHARP CORPO
0666211221
When the [GROUP
RECIPIENT
the numbers of the end
receiving machines
appears.
NAME] key is touched,
the letter-entry screen
appears. Enter up to 36
characters for the name.
See page 80 for the procedure for entering letters.
Touch the [RELAY STATION] key.
2
The number entry screen
for the relay machine
appears.
GROUP NAME
SHARP CORPO
RELAY STATION
RECIT
6
Press the numeric keys to enter the
fax number of the relay machine.
3
NEXT
EXIT
DIRECT ADDRESS / RELAY GROUP
01
CANCEL
OK
RELAY STATION
ENTER THE RELAY STATION FAX No. VIA THE 10-KEY PAD, THEN PRESS [OK].
PAUSE
• To insert a pause between digits of the number,
touch the [PAUSE] key. The pause appears as a
hyphen "-". See page 97 to set the duration of the
pause.
• If you make a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key (
)
to clear one digit at a time, and then enter the correct
digit(s).
75
PROGRAMMING
Enter the numbers of the end
receiving machines.
Touch a key and then enter the number of an end
receiving machine as explained below.
After entering a number, touch the [NEXT
ADDRESS] key to enter the number of the next
end receiving machine.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 until all end
receiving machines are entered.
6
8
9
To check the entered numbers of the
end receiving machines, touch the
[ADDRESS REVIEW] key.
A list of the entered end
NEXT
EXIT
REC.
DIRECT ADDRESS / RELAY GROUP
receiving machines is
displayed.
You can delete a
machine by touching it.
OK
RECIPIENT
REC.
DIAL
REC.
RAPID
GROUP
REC.
REC.
ADDRESS REVIEW
SPEED
REC.
When a message
appears asking if you
want to delete the
destination, touch the
[YES] key.
ADDRESS REVIEW
[DIAL] key
Enter the fax number of the receiving machine with the
numeric keys.
Touch each tab at the bottom of the list to show the
numbers on that tab.
[RAPID] key
Touch this key to enter a rapid number from 01 to 99
that is stored in the relay machine. You can also enter
a 3-digit rapid number from 001 to 099 (enter the lower
two digits of the number).*
Touch the [OK] key.
10
The destination/relay group storing screen
appears.
Touch the
or
key to enter the number.
Continuing to touch the key makes the number change
quickly.
If you are finished storing relay
11
[SPEED] key
groups, touch the [EXIT] key.
If you wish to store another relay
group, touch the [NEXT] key.
Touch this key to enter a speed dial number from 00 to
99 that is stored in the relay machine. You can also
enter a 3-digit rapid number from 100 to 199 (enter the
lower two digits of the number).*
If you touch the [EXIT] key, you will return to the
screen of step 4 on page 66.
If you touch the [NEXT] key, the screen for
storing a new relay group appears.
Touch the
or
key to enter the number.
Continuing to touch the key makes the number change
quickly.
[GROUP] key
Touch this key to enter a group key number from 01 to
99 that is stored in the relay machine.
You can also enter a 3-digit rapid number from 201 to
299 (enter the lower two digits of the number).*
Touch the
or
key to enter the number.
Continuing to touch the key makes the number change
quickly.
* The numbers entered will vary depending on the
model used for the relay machine. For more
information, consult your SHARP service center.
(Also see the operation manual for copier.)
Touch the [OK] key.
7
The screen for entering
OK
CANCEL
the numbers of the end
receiving machines
appears.
76
PROGRAMMING
EDITING AND DELETING A RELAY GROUP
If you need to edit or delete a previously stored relay group, perform steps 1 through 3 on pages 65 and 66 and then
perform the following procedure:
Touch the [AMEND/DELETE] key.
Make sure that your changes are
correct, and then touch the [EXIT] key.
If you need to edit
1
5
6
7
DELETE
EXIT
another relay group,
repeat steps 3 through 5.
AMEND/DELETE
Touch the [RELAY GROUP] key.
Touch the [DELETE] key.
2
DELETE
EXIT
1/1
PROGRAM
RELAY GROUP
Touch the relay group that you wish to
edit or delete.
Touch the [YES] key.
3
EXIT
DIRECT ADDRESS / AMEND/DELETE
DELETE
EXIT
DIRECT ADDRESS / RELAY GROUP
SELECT ADDRESS TO AMEND/DELETE.
RELAY GROUP
ADDRESS
BOOK
GROUP NAME
DELETE THE ADDRESS?
XX
1/1
SHARP CORPORATION
CORPO. TPS
RELAY STATION
RECIPIENT
PROGRAM
SHARP GROUP
D
F
H
YES
NO
E
G
6
• If you need to return to the screen of step 2, touch
the [ADDRESS BOOK] key.
• When the relay group is touched, the edit/delete
screen for the group appears.
• To edit the relay group, follow steps 4 and 5.
• To delete the relay group, follow steps 6 and 7.
To delete another relay group, repeat steps 3, 6, and
7.
If you cannot edit or delete a relay
group
Note
If you attempt to edit or delete a relay group
in the following situations, a warning
message will appear and you will not be
able to edit or delete the group.
The relay group is being used in a current
transmission or currently stored
transmission. Cancel the transmission or
wait until it is completed and then edit or
delete the relay group ("CANCELING A FAX
TRANSMISSION" (p.24)).
DELETE
EXIT
DIRECT ADDRESS / AMEND/DELETE
GROUP NAME
RELAY STATION
RECIPIENT
SHARP CORPORATION
01234556879
5
2
RECIPIENT
The relay group is included in a program.
Delete the relay group from the program and
then edit or delete the relay group
("EDITING AND DELETING PROGRAMS"
(p.74)).
Touch the key of the item that you
wish to edit (follow the same
procedure (p.75) as for storing the
relay group).
4
• To change the relay machine, first delete the
current relay machine and then enter the new
relay machine.
77
STORING A GROUP INDEX
Auto dial keys (rapid keys and group keys) are normally stored in the ABC index. To make auto dial keys more
convenient to use, you can store a group of auto dial keys in a group index and assign a name to that index. When
you switch to the group indexes, USER 1, USER 2, USER 3, USER 4, USER 5, and USER 6 appear. You can
assign any name up to 6 characters long to each of the USER indexes.
The procedure for storing auto dial numbers in a group index is explained on page 67, and the procedure for
switching between the ABC index and the group indexes is explained on page 8.
Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key,
and then touch the [ADDRESS
CONTROL] key (see steps 1 and 2 on
page 65).
Enter a maximum of 6 characters for
the index name.
1
2
4
Use the
key to clear the displayed name and
then enter the desired name. See page 80 for the
procedure for entering characters.
When finished, touch the [OK] key. The new
name appears in the screen of step 3.
Touch the [CUSTOM INDEX] key.
O
If you wish to program another index
name, repeat steps 3 and 4.
When finished, touch the [OK] key.
To change a user index name, re-enter the name
as explained in steps 3 and 4.
5
6
CUSTOM INDEX
Touch an index key ([USER 1] to
[USER 6]).
3
You can enter a name for the selected index.
CUSTOM SETTINGS
CUSTOM INDEX
OK
SELECT THE KEY TO BE CUSTOM NAMED.
USER 1
USER 2
USER 3
GROUP 4
USER 5
USER 6
When the index key is touched, the letter entry screen
appears.
CUSTOM INDEX NAME
CANCEL
OK
USER 1
ABC
abc
12#$%
SPACE
AB/ab
ÃÄÂ/ãäâ
78
PRINTING PROGRAMMED
INFORMATION
You can print out lists of the rapid keys, group keys, programs, and relay groups that have been stored in the
machine.
Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.
Touch the SENDING ADDRESS LIST
key.
1
3
LINE
DATA
FAX REPORT
CUSTOM SETTINGS
B STATUS
SENDING ADDRESS LIST
Touch the [LIST PRINT] key.
Touch the key of the list you wish to
print.
2
4
"PRINT JOB IN
GS
SS LIST
Y
MEMORY. PLEASE
WAIT UNTIL PRINT
OUT." appears in the
message display and
printing begins.
LIST PRINT
T
RAPID DIAL
LIST
GROUP LIST
PROGRAM LIST
S
RECEIVE MODE
TELEPHONE
NUMBER LIST
RELAY GROUP
LIST
• The list is printed before other print jobs are printed.
• If you attempt to print a list when no data exists, a warning message will appear.
Note
6
79
ENTERING CHARACTERS
To enter or edit characters in setting screens such as auto dial key programming screens, follow the steps below.
Characters that can be entered are alphabetical characters, special characters, numbers, and symbols.
Entering alphabetical characters
(Example: Sharp äÄ)
Touch the [S] key.
Touch the [SPACE] key.
1
4
Characters cannot be
NAME
CANCEL
OK
entered beyond the " " mark.
Sharp
NAME
CANCEL
OK
ABC
abc
12#$%
SPACE
AB/ab
ÃÄÂ/ãäâ
ABC
abc
12#$%
SPACE
AB/ab
ÃÄÂ/ãäâ
The cursor ( ) moves forward and a space is
entered.
To switch between upper case and lower case,
touch the [ABC abc] key. When ABC is
highlighted, upper case letters are entered.
Touch the [ ÃÄÂ/ãäâ] key.
5
6
Touch the [ABC abc] key.
NAME
CANCEL
OK
2
3
Sharp
NAME
S
CANCEL
OK
ABC
abc
SPACE
AB/ab
ÃÄÂ/ãäâ
ABC
abc
12#$%
SPACE
AB/ab
ÃÄÂ/ãäâ
Touch the [ä] key.
Touch the [h] key, [a] key, [r] key, and
[p] key.
NAME
CANCEL
OK
Sharp
NAME
CANCEL
OK
Shar
ÃÄÂ
ãäâ
SPACE
ABC/abc
ABC
abc
To switch between upper case and lower case,
touch the [ÃÄÂ ãäâ] key. When ãäâ is
12#$%
SPACE
AB/ab
ÃÄÂ/ãäâ
highlighted, lower case letters are entered.
If you make a mistake, touch the
key to move
the cursor ( ) back one space and then enter the
correct character. You can also press the [AB/ab
12#$%] key during entry to enter a number or
symbol.
Touch the [ÃÄÂ ãäâ] key.
7
NAME
CANCEL
OK
Sharp ä
ÃÄÂ
ãäâ
SPACE
ABC/abc
80
PROGRAMMING
Touch the [Ä] key.
8
9
NAME
CANCEL
OK
Sharp ä
ÃÄÂ
ãäâ
SPACE
ABC/abc
You can press the [ABC/abc] key during entry to
return to alphabetical character entry. You can
also enter numbers and symbols.
When finished, touch the [OK] key.
NAME
CANCEL
OK
Sharp äÄ
ÃÄÂ
ãäâ
SPACE
ABC/abc
You will exit the character entry screen and return
to the programming screen. If you touch the
[CANCEL] key, you will return to the
programming screen without storing the entered
characters.
The layout of the letter keys can be changed in the custom settings. See "Keyboard select" in the operation
manual for copier. (The above explanation assumes that "KEYBOARD 1" is selected.)
Note
6
81
PROGRAMMING
Entering numbers and symbols
When you have finished entering
characters, touch the [OK] key.
3
Touch the [AB/ab
12#$%] key.
1
NAME
CANCEL
OK
1&1
NAME
CANCEL
OK
SPACE
AB/ab
12#$%
ÃÄÂ/ãäâ
ABC
abc
12#$%
SPACE
AB/ab
ÃÄÂ/ãäâ
You will exit the character entry screen and return
to the programming screen. If you touch the
[CANCEL] key, you will return to the
programming screen without storing the entered
characters.
When the characters "12#$%" are highlighted,
number/symbol entry mode is selected.
Enter the desired number or symbol.
2
If you are going to use the Web page to edit
Note
or delete the stored name at a later time, do
not use the characters ", <, or >. These
characters cannot be displayed in the Web
page.
Numbers and symbols that can be entered are as
follows:
Screen 1/2
NAME
CANCEL
OK
SPACE
AB/ab
12#$%
ÃÄÂ/ãäâ
Screen 2/2
NAME
CANCEL
OK
SPACE
AB/ab
12#$%
ÃÄÂ/ãäâ
* Change screens by touching the
key or
key displayed in the screen. If you make a
mistake, touch the key to move the cursor
( ) back one space and then enter the correct
character.
You can continue touching keys to enter
characters. You can also touch another
character type selection key ([ ÃÄÂ/ãäâ] key
or [AB/ab
12#$%] key) to enter characters
other than numbers and symbols.
82
Chapter 7
TROUBLESHOOTING
7
This chapter contains information to help you make efficient use of the fax features of the machine, including
solutions to common problems.
WHEN A TRANSACTION REPORT
IS PRINTED
The machine has been set to automatically print a Transaction Report when a transmission is not successful or
when the Broadcast transmission function is used. The Transaction Report informs you of the result of the operation.
When the machine prints a Transaction Report, be sure to check the contents.
The initial settings (factory settings) for printing Transaction Reports are indicated by shading
below. The
settings can be changed in the key operator programs. ("TRANSACTION REPORT PRINT SELECT SETTING"
(p.98))
PRINT OUT ERROR REPORT ONLY
G Single sending: PRINT OUT ALL REPORT /
G Receiving: PRINT OUT ALL REPORT / PRINT OUT ERROR REPORT ONLY / NO PRINTED REPORT
PRINT OUT ALL REPORT
/ NO PRINTED REPORT
G Broadcasting:
/PRINT OUT ERROR REPORT ONLY /NO PRINTED REPORT
G Confidential reception: PRINT OUT NOTICE PAGE / NO PRINTED REPORT
The Transaction Report shows the date of transmission, the time transmission began, the other party's name, the
duration of the operation, the number of pages, and the result.
• The list count appears in the "#" column of the Transaction Report and a serial number appears in the FILE
column. (These numbers are not related to the transaction.)
Note
• When a Transaction Report is printed for a regular transmission or broadcast transmission, a portion of the
original document is printed along with the Transaction Report. You can set the machine to not print the
original in the key operator programs. ("IMAGE MEMORY PRINT SELECT SETTING" (p.99))
83
TROUBLESHOOTING
Information appearing in the TYPE/NOTE column
Information such as the type of transmission and type of error appears in the TYPE/NOTE column of the Transaction
Report. The following notes may appear.
Note
Explanation
The transaction was completed normally.
OK
G3
Communication took place in G3 mode.
Communication took place in G3 ECM mode.
Communication took place in Super G3 mode.
The received data was forwarded.
ECM
SG3
FW.
NO RESPONSE
BUSY
No response from the receiving party.
Transmission was not possible because the other party was already using the
line.
CANCEL
A transmission was canceled while in progress, or a stored transmission job
was canceled.
P. FAIL
A power failure occurred during the transaction.
The memory became full during reception.
MEMORY. FULL
LENGTH OVER
The transmitted document was over 59" long and therefore could not be
received.
ORIG ERROR
PASSCODE# E
RX NO POLL
NO RX POLL
Manual transmission was not successful because a jam occurred.
The connection was broken because the polling passcode was not correct.
The machine that was polled does not have a polling function.
The other machine refused the polling operation, or your machine broke the
connection when polled because no data was in polling memory.
SA POL TX ERR
SA POLL ERR
The other machine refused an F-code polling operation.
Your machine broke the connection because the other machine specified an
F-code polling sub-address that does not exist in your machine.
NO SA POLLING
NO S ADD FUNC
S ADD TX FAIL
ERROR xx xxxx
F-code polling was attempted, however, the other machine did not have an
F-code polling memory box.
F-code transmission was attempted, however, the other machine does not
support F-code communication.
An F-code transmission was refused by the other machine because of an
incorrect sub-address or other reason.
The communication handshake signals or image signals were distorted due to
line conditions or other reasons, and communication was not successful.
Codes for use by service technicians. For more infomation, consult your
SHARP service center.
84
VIEWING THE COMMUNICATION
ACTIVITY REPORT
Your machine keeps a record of the most recent 50 transactions (both transmissions and receptions) that were
performed. The record includes the date of the transaction, the other party's name, the duration, and result. You can
have the report automatically printed when the number of transactions exceeds 50, or at a specified time. This
allows you to check the machine's activity at regular intervals.
The machine is initially set (factory setting) to never print the report. If you wish to print the report every 50
transactions or have it printed at a specified time, change the setting in the key operator programs. ("ACTIVITY
REPORT PRINT SELECT SETTING" (p.98))
• The report can be printed repeatedly.
• Refer to the table in "When a Transaction Report is printed" on page 84 for the notes that appear in the
Note
TYPE/NOTE column.
PRINTING REPORTS
Communication reports and settings can be printed as lists.
The following reports can be printed:
G ACTIVITY REPORT PRINT.................. Communication times and sending/receiving parties.
G TIMER LIST.......................................... Timer settings, stored transmission jobs, and recall jobs.
G MEM.POLLING LIST............................ Documents scanned into polling memory and F-code polling memory.
G PASSCODE LIST................................. Programmed sender information, relay request settings, and polling
settings.
G CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTION LIST..... Confidential box numbers (Sharp mode and F-code boxes) that have
received faxes and the number of pages.
Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.
Touch the [FAX REPORT] key.
1
3
4
LINE
DATA
PRINTER TEST PAGE
FAX REPORT
CUSTOM SETTINGS
B STATUS
SENDING AS LIST
7
Touch the [LIST PRINT] key.
Touch the key of the report that you
wish to print.
2
Y
T
LIST PRINT
"PRINT JOB IN
MEMORY.PLEASE
WAIT UNTIL PRINT
OUT." appears and
printing begins.
S
RECEIVE MODE
ACTIVITY
REPORT PRINT
MEM.POLLING
LIST
TIMER LIST
CONFIDENTIAL
RECEPTION LIST
PASSCODE LIST
Note
• The report is printed before other print jobs are printed.
85
WHEN AN ALARM SOUNDS AND A
WARNING MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED
Alarms and display messages alert you to the condition of the machine during operation. If one of the following
messages appears, respond as indicated in the table.
Message screen (Alarm)
Cause and solution
Page
(MAINTENANCE REQUIRED.) Maintenance is required.
-
→ Contact your dealer.
PLEASE RETURN XX
ORIGINALS TO THE
DOCUMENT FEEDER, THEN
PRESS [START].
A misfeed occurred in the RSPF while the original was
being scanned.
→ Reload the indicated original pages.
-
OPEN TRAY X AND ADD XXX Printing cannot take place because the machine is out
operation manual for
copier
PAPER.
of suitable paper.
→ Add the indicated paper.
(TYPE: XXXXX)
REMOVE PAPER FROM THE The job separator tray is full.
-
-
→ Remove the printed pages.
UPPER TRAY.
REMOVE PAPER FROM THE The top tray is full (when a finisher is installed).
→ Remove the printed pages.
TOP TRAY.
(TONER SUPPLY IS LOW.)
Little toner remains in the toner cartridge.
→ Replace the toner cartridge.
operation manual for
copier
CHANGE THE TONER
CARTRIDGE.
The toner cartridge is out of toner and the received
document cannot be printed.
→ Replace the toner cartridge.
THE MEMORY BECOMES
FULL. (Pg.No.XX)
SEND SCANNED DATA? OR
CANCEL THE JOB?
The memory became full while the original was being
scanned.
→ Send only the pages that were already scanned, or cancel
the entire transmission.
15
POLLING IS NOT POSSIBLE
WITH THE AVAILABLE
MEMORY.
Polling is not possible because there is not enough
space in memory.
→ Try polling again after currently stored jobs are completed.
33
-
MANUAL RECEIVE IS
DISABLED.
Manual reception was not possible because there was
not enough free space in memory.
→ Try manual reception again after currently stored jobs have
been completed.
DUE TO OUT OF MEMORY.
CLOSE THE XXXXX COVER.
The indicated cover is open.
→ Close the indicated cover.
-
-
CLOSE THE DOCUMENT
FEEDER.
CALL FOR SERVICE.
CODE:XX XX.
The self-diagnosis function has activated and
automatically stopped operation. An error code appears
in xx-xx.
→ Turn off the power and then turn it back on. If the same
message still appears, contact your SHARP service center.
86
TROUBLESHOOTING
If the fax features do not operate normally, please check the following. If you are unable to solve the problem, see
"TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE" in the operation manual for copier.
Fax problems
Trouble
Page
The machine does not operate correctly
The machine does not operate.
Transmission problems
88
Dialing is not possible.
Transmission is not possible.
The transmitted image prints out blank at the receiving side.
The transmitted image is distorted.
88
Transmission does not take place at the specified time.
White or black lines appear in the transmitted image.
Reception problems
Reception does not take place at the specified time.
Printing does not take place after reception.
A received image prints out blank.
89
The received image is faint.
The received image is distorted.
A ringing sound is not made.
7
87
TROUBLESHOOTING
FAX PROBLEMS
Problems that are related to the fax function are explained in the following.
For paper misfeeds, see "MISFEED REMOVAL" in the operation manual for copier. For general machine problems,
copier problems, printer problems, and network scanner problems, see the corresponding manual for the function.
The machine does not operate correctly
Problem
Cause and solution
Page
The machine does not
operate.
3
The power switch is turned off.
→ Turn on the power switch.
Transmission problems
Problem
Cause and solution
Page
-
The correct dial mode is not set for your line.
→ Check your line and set the correct dial mode.
The telephone line is not connected.
→ Check the connections.
The power switch is turned off.
→ Turn on the power switch.
3
3
Dialing is not possible.
The machine is not in fax mode.
→ Press the [FAX] key to set the machine to fax mode.
12
The receiving fax machine does not have paper.
→ Check with the operator of the receiving machine.
The sub-address or passcode is not correct.
→ Check with the operator of the receiving machine.
The receiving machine is using the line.
→ Check with the operator of the receiving machine.
The size of the original was not correctly detected.
→ Check the original size.
Transmission is not
possible.
-
The original was placed so that the wrong side was
scanned.
10
→ Make sure the original is placed so that the correct side is
scanned.
The transmitted image prints
out blank at the receiving
side.
The receiving machine is using thermal paper and
the thermal paper was loaded with the wrong side
facing out.
-
→ Check with the operator of the other machine.
The line conditions were poor due to thunder or
other reason.
-
The transmitted image is
distorted.
→ Try the transmission again.
The resolution and exposure settings were not
suitable.
→ Check the resolution and exposure settings.
21
Transmission does not take
place at the specified time.
operation manual for
copier
The machine's clock is not set to the correct time.
→ Set the clock to the correct time.
White or black lines appear
in the transmitted image.
operation manual for
copier
The document glass is dirty.
→ Clean the document glass.
88
TROUBLESHOOTING
Reception problems
Problem
Cause and solution
Page
Reception does not take
place at the specified time.
operation manual for
copier
The machine's clock is not set to the correct time.
→ Set the clock to the correct time.
A message appears in the display instructing you to
add toner or paper.
86
→ Restore printing capability as instructed by the display
message. Printing will begin.
A paper tray is not selected for fax mode in the
paper tray settings.
Printing does not take place
after reception.
operation manual for
copier
→ Select a paper tray for fax mode in the paper tray settings
in the user settings.
The wrong side of the original was scanned in the
transmitting machine.
A received image prints out
blank.
-
-
→ Check with the operator of the transmitting machine.
The original is faint.
→ Ask the other party to resend the document using a
suitable exposure setting.
The received image is faint.
The line conditions were poor due to thunder or
other reason.
→ Ask the other party to send the document again.
The received image is
distorted.
-
The ringer volume has been turned off.
→ Set the ringer volume to low, medium, or high.
98
A ringing sound is not made.
7
89
Chapter 8
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
8
The key operator programs are used by the administrator of the machine to enable and disable certain functions of
the machine.
This section explains key operator programs for the fax features of the machine. For key operator programs that are
related to general operation, the copy function, the printer function, and the network scanner function, see the key
operator's guide.
To access the key operator programs, the key operator code must be entered.
The key operator code is initially set to "00000" at the factory.
90
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM LIST
You may not be able to use all of the programs in the key operator program list. Programs that you can use
depend on what peripheral devices are installed on the machine.
Note
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS FOR THE FAX FUNCTION
Factory default
settings
Factory default
settings
Program name
Page
Program name
Page
FAX DEFAULT SETTINGS
FAX SETTINGS
TRANSACTION
REPORT PRINT
SELECT SETTING
• SINGLE SENDING:
PRINT OUT ERROR
REPORT ONLY
98
FAX DEFAULT SETTINGS
DEFAULT DISPLAY
SETTINGS
CONDITION
SETTINGS
96
96
• BROADCASTING:
PRINT OUT ALL
REPORT
MUST INPUT NEXT
ADDRESS KEY AT
BROADCAST SETTING
Disabled
• RECEIVING:
NO PRINTED
REPORT
THE NUMBER OF
8 (keys)
96
DIRECT ADDRESS KEYS
DISPLAYED SETTING
• CONFIDENTIAL
RECEPTION:
PRINT OUT
INITIAL RESOLUTION STANDARD
SETTING
97
97
97
NOTICE PAGE
IMAGE MEMORY PRINT PRINT OUT ERROR
99
99
99
99
INITIAL EXPOSURE
SETTING
AUTO
SELECT SETTING
REPORT ONLY
REMOTE RECEPTION
NUMBER SETTING
5
OWN NUMBER AND
NAME SET
Un-registering
EXTERNAL
TELEPHONE SETTING
Enabled
Disabled
DIAL MODE SETTING TONE
97
97
PAUSE TIME
SETTING
2 (sec.)
DISTINCTIVE RING
DETECTION
SPEAKER VOLUME
SETTING
• SPEAKER: Medium
98
• RINGER VOLUME:
Medium
• LINE MONITOR :
Medium
• TRANSMISSION
COMPLETE
SOUND: Medium
TRANSMISSION
COMPLETE SOUND
SETTING
PATTERN 2
98
98
98
TRANSMISSION
COMPLETE SOUND
TIME SETTING
3.0 (sec.)
8
ACTIVITY REPORT
PRINT SELECT
SETTING
• AUTO PRINT AT
MEMORY FULL:
Disabled
•
PRINT DAILY AT
DESIGNATED TIME:
Disabled
91
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
Factory default
settings
Factory default
settings
Program name
Page
Program name
Page
FAX SEND SETTINGS
SENDING OPTIONS
AUTO REDUCTION
SENDING SETTING
Enabled
Enabled
99
99
99
PASSCODE NUMBER Un-registering
SETTING
102
102
PRINTING PAGE
NUMBER AT RECEIVER
POLLING SECURITY
SETTING
Enabled
DATE/OWN NUMBER OUTSIDE THE
PRINT POSITION
SETTING
ID NUMBER MODE
Un-registering
Un-registering
102
102
ORIGINAL IMAGE
SYSTEM NUMBER
MODE
ROTATION SENDING Enabled
SETTING
100
100
100
RELAY PASSCODE
Un-registering
Un-registering
102
102
CONFIDENTIAL
CODE SET
CALL TIMER AT
45 (sec.)
MEMORY SENDING
F-CODE MEMORY BOX
• POLLING MEMORY
• CONFIDENTIAL
RECALL IN CASE OF
LINE BUSY
• NUMBER OF
TIMES: 2 (times)
Un-registering
Un-registering
103
103
103
• INTERVAL: 3 (min.)
RECALL IN CASE OF
COMMUNICATION
ERROR
• NUMBER OF
TIMES: 1 (times)
100
• RELAY BROADCAST Un-registering
LIST PRINT
• INTERVAL: 1 (min.)
QUICK ON LINE
SENDING
Enabled
100
100
DEFAULT SENDING
MODE
MEMORY TX
AUTO COVER SHEET Disabled
100
100
SLOW SCAN MODE
Disabled
FAX RECEIVE SETTINGS
AUTO RECEIVE
REDUCE SETTING
Enabled
101
101
101
101
101
DUPLEX RECEPTION Disabled
SETTING
PRINT STYLE
SETTING
AUTO SIZE SELECT
NUMBER OF CALLS
IN AUTO RECEPTION
2 (times)
SET THE TELEPHONE Un-registering
NUMBER FOR DATA
FORWARDING
INDEX PRINT
Disabled
Enabled
101
101
RECEIVED DATA
PRINT CONDITION
A3 RX REDUCE
Disabled
101
101
ENTER JUNK FAX
NUMBER
Un-registering
ANTI JUNK FAX
Disabled
101
92
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM MENU
The key operator programs are arranged in the following menu.
Use this menu as a guide for accessing each of the programs.
*Some programs may contain an additional level (setting screen).
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
FAX SETTINGS
FAX DEFAULT SETTINGS
DEFAULT DISPLAY SETTINGS
MUST INPUT NEXT ADDRESS KEY AT BROADCAST SETTING
THE NUMBER OF DIRECT ADDRESS KEYS DISPLAYED SETTING
INITIAL RESOLUTION SETTING
INITIAL EXPOSURE SETTING
OWN NUMBER AND NAME SET
DIAL MODE SETTING
PAUSE TIME SETTING
SPEAKER VOLUME SETTING
TRANSMISSION COMPLETE SOUND SETTING
TRANSMISSION COMPLETE SOUND TIME SETTING
ACTIVITY REPORT PRINT SELECT SETTING
TRANSACTION REPORT PRINT SELECT SETTING
IMAGE MEMORY PRINT SELECT SETTING
REMOTE RECEPTION NUMBER SETTING
EXTERNAL TELEPHONE SETTING
DISTINCTIVE RING DETECTION
FAX SEND SETTINGS
AUTO REDUCTION SENDING SETTING
PRINTING PAGE NUMBER AT RECEIVER
DATE/OWN NUMBER PRINT POSITION SETTING
ROTATION SENDING SETTING
CALL TIMER AT MEMORY SENDING
RECALL IN CASE OF LINE BUSY
RECALL IN CASE OF COMMUNICATION ERROR
QUICK ON LINE SENDING
DEFAULT SENDING MODE
AUTO COVER SHEET
SLOW SCAN MODE
FAX RECEIVE SETTINGS
AUTO RECEIVE REDUCE SETTING
DUPLEX RECEPTION SETTING
PRINT STYLE SETTING
NUMBER OF CALLS IN AUTO RECEPTION
SET THE TELEPHONE NUMBER FOR DATA FORWARDING
INDEX PRINT
8
RECEIVED DATA PRINT CONDITION
A3 RX REDUCE
ENTER JUNK FAX NUMBER
ANTI JUNK FAX
SENDING OPTIONS
PASSCODE NUMBER SETTING
POLLING SECURITY SETTING
ID NUMBER MODE
SYSTEM NUMBER MODE
RELAY PASSCODE
CONFIDENTIAL CODE SET
F-CODE MEMORY BOX
LIST PRINT
93
USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
When using the key operator programs for the first time, change the factory default key operator code to a new
code. (Step 3 to step 6)
Note
Press the [CUSTOM SETTINGS] key.
Use the numeric keys to enter the new
5-digit key operator code.
1
5
Use a number for the key
operator code that has not
been programmed as an
account number for
auditing mode (a number
that has been
LINE
DATA
CUSTOM SETTINGS
B STATUS
-----
00000
programmed as an
account number cannot
be used). The entered number will be the new key
operator code. Be sure to remember this number.
Touch the [KEY OPERATOR
PROGRAMS] key.
2
CUSTOM SETTINGS
EXIT
Touch the [OK] key. You will return to
the screen of step 4.
6
DISPLAY
CONTRAST
LIST PRINT
TOTAL COUNT
CLOCK
This completes the
procedure for changing
ADDRESS
CONTROL
FAX DATA
FORWARD
RECEIVE MODE
TRAY SETTINGS
KEYBOARD
SELECT
the key operator code. If
you wish to configure
another program, touch
the key of the desired
program in the screen of
step 4.
OK
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
Use the numeric keys to enter the
five-digit key operater code.
3
4
Each time a digit is
entered, the dash (-) that
indicates the digit will
change to an asterisk ( ).
The factory default setting
for the key operator code
is 00000.
Press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) to
exit the program.
7
KEY OPERATOR CODE
Touch a key to select the desired
category of key operator programs.
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
EXIT
ACCOUNT
CONTROL
OPERATION
SETTINGS
ENERGY SAVE
DEVICE CONTROL
SCANNER
SETTINGS
COPY SETTINGS
LIST PRINT
PRINT SETTINGS
FAX SETTINGS
KEY OPERATOR
CODE CHANGE
PRODUCT KEY
Example:
To change the key operator code, touch the [KEY
OPERATOR CODE CHANGE] key.
• Each time you need to configure a program, use this
procedure to select the program.
• In the following steps, the setting screen for the
selected program appears. Refer to the explanation
of the program to select the desired setting (the
explanations of the programs begin on page 96).
94
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
KEYS USED IN KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
Example: Auditing mode
The following keys appear in screens that
require the entry of numerical values.
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
(1 999)
20
OK
ACCOUNT CONTROL
1/3
AUDITING MODE
1
2
TOTAL PAGES PER ACCOUNT
3
RESETTING ACCOUNT
4
5
1
When a checkbox ( ) appears in front of a setting, a checkmark ( ) will appear when the checkbox is touched.
This indicates that the setting is enabled. If a checkbox with a checkmark ( ) is touched, the checkmark is
cleared ( ) and the setting is disabled.
2
3
When a key that appears in the form
is touched, the setting screen of that key will appear.
X X X
If the settings continue on the following screen(s), touch the
and
keys to move back and forth through the
screens. To return to the category selection screen, touch the [OK] key.
The currently set numerical value is displayed.
4
5
Numerical values can be set by touching the
and
keys.
8
95
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS FOR THE
FAX FUNCTION
This section explains key operator programs for the fax function of the machine. For key operator programs that are
related to general operation, the copy function, the printer function, and the network scanner function, see the key
operator's guide.
You can check key operator program settings for the fax function by printing them out. ("LIST PRINT" (p.105))
Note
MUST INPUT NEXT ADDRESS KEY AT
BROADCAST SETTING
You can select whether or not the [NEXT ADDRESS]
FAX SETTINGS
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
FAX SETTINGS
OK
key must always be pressed before entering the next
destination when performing a broadcast transmission
(p.27). If this program is disabled, the [NEXT
ADDRESS] key can be omitted except when the
numeric keys are used to enter one full fax number
after another full fax number.
FAX DEFAULT SETTINGS
FAX RECEIVE SETTINGS
FAX SEND SETTINGS
SENDING OPTIONS
Example: When invalid (factory setting)
FAX DEFAULT SETTINGS
The default fax settings can be changed as necessary
to meet your faxing needs.
The default fax settings are as follows:
G DEFAULT DISPLAY SETTINGS
G MUST INPUT NEXT ADDRESS KEY AT
BROADCAST SETTING
G THE NUMBER OF DIRECT ADDRESS KEYS
DISPLAYED SETTING
XXXX NEXT ADDRESS rapid NEXT ADDRESS rapid
Fax number
Can be omitted.
Can be omitted.
XXXX NEXT ADDRESS XXXX
Fax number
Fax number
Cannot be omitted.
When this program is enabled, it will no longer be
possible to omit the [NEXT ADDRESS] key as shown
in the above example. Even when the next destination
is a rapid key, the [NEXT ADDRESS] key must be
touched before the rapid key can be touched. If the
operator attempts to enter the next destination without
touching the [NEXT ADDRESS] key, a double-beep
will sound and the entry will be refused.
G INITIAL RESOLUTION SETTING
G INITIAL EXPOSURE SETTING
G OWN NUMBER AND NAME SET
G DIAL MODE SETTING
G PAUSE TIME SETTING
G SPEAKER VOLUME SETTING
G TRANSMISSION COMPLETE SOUND SETTING
G TRANSMISSION COMPLETE SOUND TIME
SETTING
G ACTIVITY REPORT PRINT SELECT SETTING
G TRANSACTION REPORT PRINT SELECT
SETTING
G IMAGE MEMORY PRINT SELECT SETTING
G REMOTE RECEPTION NUMBER SETTING
G EXTERNAL TELEPHONE SETTING
G DISTINCTIVE RING DETECTION
This program is initially disabled (factory default
setting).
THE NUMBER OF DIRECT ADDRESS
KEYS DISPLAYED SETTING
The number of rapid keys displayed in each address
directory screen can be changed from 8 (the normal
setting) to 6 or 12.
Touch 6, 8, or 12 to select the desired number.
The factory default setting is "8" (keys).
DEFAULT DISPLAY SETTINGS
You can select the initial display that appears when you
press the [FAX] key to change to fax mode or when you
press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) in fax mode.
The following three selections are available:
• CONDITION SETTINGS
For the name that appears in each rapid
Note
key, a maximum of 18 characters can
appear when the number of rapid keys
displayed is set to 6 or 8. A maximum of 10
characters can appear when the number of
rapid keys displayed is set to 12.
• ADDRESS BOOK (ABC)
• ADDRESS BOOK (GROUP)
When an address directory (ABC or Group) is
selected, the address directory screen of the selected
index is set as the initial screen.
The factory default setting is "CONDITION SETTINGS".
96
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
Touch the [FAX No.] key and enter the fax
number.
Enter up to 20 digits for the number using the numeric
keys.
To enter a "+", press the " " key.
To enter a hyphen, touch the [PAUSE] key. To enter a
space, press the [SPACE] key.
INITIAL RESOLUTION SETTING
3
This setting is used to select the default resolution
setting for fax mode. Selections are [STANDARD],
[FINE], [SUPER FINE], and [ULTRA FINE]. When the
resolution is set to [FINE], [SUPER FINE], or [ULTRA
FINE], [HALF TONE] can also be selected. To select
HALF TONE for the selected resolution setting, touch
the [HALF TONE] key so that it is highlighted.
The factory default setting is "STANDARD".
If you make a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key (
re-enter the correct digit.
) and
Touch the [OK] key.
• HALF TONE cannot be selected for
STANDARD resolution.
• For information on each of the resolution
settings, see page 21.
4
5
Note
To exit, touch the [EXIT] key.
• To enter another sender, touch the [NEXT] key.
INITIAL EXPOSURE SETTING
This program is used to set the default exposure for
scanning in fax mode.
[AUTO] or [MANUAL] can be selected for the
exposure. When [MANUAL] is selected, the exposure
can be adjusted to one of five levels. [1] is the lightest
level and [5] is the darkest level.
Editing or deleting a sender
Touch the [AMEND/DELETE] key.
1
2
Touch the sender key that you wish to edit
or delete.
The factory default setting is "AUTO".
Touch the keys that wish to edit or delete.
• To edit sender information, follow the same steps as
when storing the sender.
• To delete a sender, touch the [DELETE] key in the
upper right corner of the screen and then touch the
[YES] key in the message screen that appears. (To
cancel the deletion, touch the [NO] key.)
3
OWN NUMBER AND NAME SET
Use this program to enter, edit, or delete the fax
number of the machine and the sender's name. The
entered name and number are printed at the top of
each fax page that is sent. The number is also used as
a passcode when performing polling reception.
You can check your entries by printing out the Sender
List in the custom settings. (p.85)
DIAL MODE SETTING
(Setting your line type)
Select the type of telephone line you are on.
Touch [TONE] or [PULSE].
The factory default setting is "TONE".
If multiple senders have been programmed
Note
and a sender is not selected, the sender
with the lowest control number is
automatically selected.
PAUSE TIME SETTING
This setting is used to select the duration of the pause
that is inserted in a destination fax number when the
[PAUSE] key is pressed while dialing or storing the
number.
Any number of seconds from 1 to 15 can be selected.
The factory default setting is "2" (sec.).
Entering the sender's name and number
Touch the [ENTER] key.
The new entry screen appears.
1
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
OWN NUMBER AND NAME SET
OK
8
ENTER
AMEND/DELETE
Touch the [NAME] key and enter the
sender's name.
2
The sender's name entry screen appears.
Up to 20 sender's names can be entered.
A maximum of 22 characters can be entered for a
sender's name.
To enter characters, see "ENTERING CHARACTERS"
on page 80.
You can also program only a name or only a
number as a sender.
Note
97
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
[AUTO PRINT AT MEMORY FULL] and [PRINT
DAILY AT DESIGNATED TIME] can be
simultaneously selected.
The factory default settings are as follows:
• AUTO PRINT AT MEMORY FULL: Disabled
• PRINT DAILY AT DESIGNATED TIME: Disabled
SPEAKER VOLUME SETTING
This setting is used to adjust the volume of the
following four types of sounds heard through the
speaker.
• SPEAKER
• LINE MONITOR
•
RINGER VOLUME
•
TRANSMISSION COMPLETE SOUND
• If you only select the PRINT DAILY AT
DESIGNATED TIME setting and the
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
VOLUME ADJUSTMENT
Note
OK
number of recorded transactions exceeds
50 before the specified time, each new
transaction will delete the oldest
transaction (the oldest transaction will not
be printed).
SPEAKER
RINGER VOLUME
LINE MONITOR
• The activity report can also be printed out
on demand. ("PRINTING REPORTS"
(p.85))
Low Medium High
Off
To change a volume setting, touch the desired volume
key.
The factory default setting is "Medium".
TRANSACTION REPORT PRINT
SELECT SETTING
This setting is used to select the conditions for printing
out Transaction Reports. Conditions can be selected
for regular transmissions, broadcast transmissions,
receptions, and confidential receptions.
TRANSMISSION COMPLETE SOUND
SETTING
This program is used to select the beep pattern that
signals the end of transmission or reception. Touch
[PATTERN 1], [PATTERN 2], or [PATTERN 3].
To listen to beep pattern, touch the [CHECK] key.
The factory default setting is "PATTERN 2".
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
TRANSACTION REPORT PRINT SELECT SETTING
OK
SINGLE SENDING
BROADCASTING
1/2
PRINT OUT ALL REPORT
PRINT OUT ALL REPORT
PRINT OUT ERROR REPORT ONLY
NO PRINTED REPORT
PRINT OUT ERROR REPORT ONLY
NO PRINTED REPORT
TRANSMISSION COMPLETE SOUND
TIME SETTING
This program is used to select the length of the beep
that signals the end of transmission or reception.
Selections are [2.0 sec], [2.5 sec], [3.0 sec], [3.5 sec],
and [4.0 sec].
Touch the
key to display the next setting. Select the
print conditions for receptions and confidential receptions.
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
TRANSACTION REPORT PRINT SELECT SETTING
OK
The factory default setting is "3.0 sec".
RECEIVING
CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTION
PRINT OUT NOTICE PAGE
2/2
PRINT OUT ALL REPORT
ACTIVITY REPORT PRINT SELECT
SETTING
This setting is used to have an activity report
automatically printed at regular intervals.
To have the report automatically printed every 50
transactions (transmissions and receptions), select the
[AUTO PRINT AT MEMORY FULL] checkbox. To have
the report automatically printed at a specified time each
day (only once a day), check the [PRINT DAILY AT
DESIGNATED TIME] box and then select the time with
the [HOUR] and [MINUTE] keys that appear.
PRINT OUT ERROR REPORT ONLY
NO PRINTED REPORT
NO PRINTED REPORT
The factory default settings are as follows:
• SINGLE SENDING: PRINT OUT ERROR REPORT
ONLY
• BROADCASTING: PRINT OUT ALL REPORT
• RECEIVING: NO PRINTED REPORT
CONFIDENTIAL RECEPTION: PRINT OUT NOTICE
PAGE
•
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
OK
ACTIVITY REPORT PRINT SELECT SETTING
AUTO PRINT AT MEMORY FULL
HOUR
13
MINUTE
01
PRINT DAILY AT DESIGNATED TIME
AM
PM
Touch the [HOUR] key and then set the hour by touching
the and keys. Set the minute in the same way.
Touch [AM] or [PM] and then touch the [OK] key.
98
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
IMAGE MEMORY PRINT SELECT
SETTING
FAX SEND SETTINGS
The fax transmission settings allow you to adjust
certain parameters for sending faxes to better suit your
needs.
The fax send settings are as follows:
G AUTO REDUCTION SENDING SETTING
G PRINTING PAGE NUMBER AT RECEIVER
G DATE/OWN NUMBER PRINT POSITION
SETTING
G ROTATION SENDING SETTING
G CALL TIMER AT MEMORY SENDING
G RECALL IN CASE OF LINE BUSY
G RECALL IN CASE OF COMMUNICATION
ERROR
This program is used to select the conditions for
including a copy of part of the first page of the
transmitted document on transaction reports.
Selections are [PRINT OUT ALL REPORT], [PRINT
OUT ERROR REPORT ONLY], and [NO PRINTED
REPORT]. This program is used in combination with
the "TRANSACTION REPORT PRINT SELECT
SETTING", and is not effective if transaction reports
are set to never print out.
The factory default setting is "PRINT OUT ERROR
REPORT ONLY".
G QUICK ON LINE SENDING
G DEFAULT SENDING MODE
G AUTO COVER SHEET
REMOTE RECEPTION NUMBER
SETTING
(only when an extension phone is connected)
G SLOW SCAN MODE
Fax reception can be activated from an extension
phone connected to the machine by entering a 1-digit
number and pressing [ ] twice on the phone's
keypad. This number is called the remote reception
number, and you can set it to any number from "0" to
"9".
AUTO REDUCTION SENDING SETTING
This program is used to have transmitted documents
automatically reduced to match the size of the other
machine's printing paper. When this program is
disabled, documents are sent in their original size, and
because the size is not adjusted to match the size of
the printing paper, part of the received document may
be cut off.
The factory default setting is "5".
EXTERNAL TELEPHONE SETTING
(only when an extension phone is connected)
This program is initially enabled (factory default
setting).
Enable this setting when an extension phone is
connected to the machine. If this setting is not
enabled, it will not be possible to use an extension
phone connected to the machine to manually receive
faxes or place/receive phone calls.
PRINTING PAGE NUMBER AT
RECEIVER
Enable this setting to have page numbers appear at
the top of fax pages that you transmit.
This program is initially enabled (factory default
setting).
This program is initially enabled (factory default
setting).
DISTINCTIVE RING DETECTION
If multiple telephone numbers have been assigned to
your telephone line, the number called can be
identified by its ringing pattern. By using one number
for voice calls and another number for faxes, you can
tell which type of call you are receiving by the ringing
pattern. You can set your machine to automatically
receive faxes when your fax number is called by
setting the pattern that corresponds to your fax
number. Six selections are available.
DATE/OWN NUMBER PRINT POSITION
SETTING
This setting lets you select the position (inside or
outside the original image) of the sender's name and
number that are printed at the top of each fax page you
send. Select [OUTSIDE THE ORIGINAL IMAGE] or
[INSIDE THE ORIGINAL IMAGE].
For more information these settings, see page 44.
The factory default setting is "OUTSIDE THE
ORIGINAL IMAGE".
8
This program is initially disabled (factory default
setting).
99
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
ROTATION SENDING SETTING
RECALL IN CASE OF
COMMUNICATION ERROR
When transmitting a document, this setting allows you
to rotate a vertically oriented 8-1/2" x 11" document to
a horizontal orientation (8-1/2" x 11"R), or rotate an A4
document to A4R. The document is rotated clockwise.
(8-1/2" x 11"R and A4R documents are not rotated.)
When sending a document, this setting is used to
select whether your machine will automatically
re-attempt the call if the transmission fails due to a line
error. One recall attempt or no recall attempts can be
selected, and the interval until the attempt can be set
from 0 to 15 minutes in increments of 1 minute.
The factory default settings are as follows:
• NUMBER OF TIMES: 1 (times)
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
OK
ROTATION SENDING SETTING
ORIGINAL
SET
SENDING
DIRECTION
81/x11
2
81/x11R
2
• INTERVAL: 1 (min.)
A4
A4R
QUICK ON LINE SENDING
When this program is enabled and memory
transmission is selected, the machine will call the
receiving machine while the original pages are being
scanned and begin transmission from pages that have
finished scanning.
Rotation settings can be established separately for
different document sizes. To disable a rotation setting,
touch the checkbox of the appropriate setting to
remove the checkmark.
This program is initially enabled for all paper sizes
(factory default settings).
When the program is disabled, transmission will not
begin until all pages have been scanned (with the
exception of manual transmission and direct
transmission). ("Quick On-line" (p.14))
This program is initially enabled (factory default
setting).
CALL TIMER AT MEMORY SENDING
When sending a fax by automatic transmission
("Storing transmission jobs (memory transmission)"
(p.15)), this setting lets you select the amount of time
that the machine waits before breaking the connection
when the other machine does not respond to your
machine's calling tone. If the other machine does not
respond within this set time, your machine will
automatically break the connection.
DEFAULT SENDING MODE
This program is used to select [MEMORY TX] or
[DIRECT TX] for the default transmission mode. For
more information on these modes, see page 14.
The factory default setting is "MEMORY TX".
Time selections are [30 sec.], [45 sec.], and [60 sec.].
The factory default setting is "45 sec.".
AUTO COVER SHEET
When this program is enabled, a cover page is
automatically generated and added to each fax
transmission. The cover page shows the date, time,
destination name, destination fax number, sender's
name, sender's fax number, number of pages, and a
message if the message function is selected. A cover
sheet cannot be added when scanning a document
into polling memory or F-code polling memory, or
when performing polling, direct transmission, relay
broadcast transmission, F-code relay broadcast
transmission, or manual transmission.
RECALL IN CASE OF LINE BUSY
When sending a document, this setting is used to
select whether your machine will automatically
re-attempt the call when the other machine fails to
answer or the line is busy. The number of recall
attempts can be set from 1 to 14, and the interval
between attempts can be set from 1 to 15 minutes in
increments of 1 minute. To disable automatic recalling,
select the [NO RECALL] checkbox.
The factory default settings are as follows:
• NUMBER OF TIMES: 2 (times)
• INTERVAL: 3 (min.)
This program is initially disabled (factory default
setting).
SLOW SCAN MODE
When this program is enabled, thin-sheet scanning is
selected by default when an original is scanned using
the RSPF.
Thin-sheet scanning uses a slower scanning speed to
prevent thin originals from misfeeding.
This program is initially disabled (factory default
setting).
100
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
NUMBER OF CALLS IN AUTO RECEPTION
When the reception mode is set to auto, this program
is used to select the number of rings on which the
machine automatically receives a call and begins fax
reception. ("RECEIVING A FAX" (p.25))
FAX RECEIVE SETTINGS
The fax reception settings allow you to adjust certain
parameters for receiving faxes to better suit your
needs.
Settings that can be adjusted depend on the peripheral
devices installed.
The fax receive settings are as follows:
G AUTO RECEIVE REDUCE SETTING
G DUPLEX RECEPTION SETTING
G PRINT STYLE SETTING
G NUMBER OF CALLS IN AUTO RECEPTION
G SET THE TELEPHONE NUMBER FOR DATA
FORWARDING
G INDEX PRINT
G RECEIVED DATA PRINT CONDITION
G A3 RX REDUCE
A number of rings from 0 to 9 can be selected.
The factory default setting is "2" (times).
If you select "0" for the number of rings, the
machine will immediately answer and begin
Note
fax reception without ringing in auto
reception mode.
SET THE TELEPHONE NUMBER FOR
DATA FORWARDING
When a problem prevents the machine from printing a
received fax, the fax forwarding function (p.28) can be
used to forward the received fax to another fax machine.
Use this setting to program the fax number of the
destination fax machine. Only one fax number can be
programmed (maximum of 50 digits).
If you wish to specify an F-code confidential memory box
or an F-code relay broadcast memory box in the
destination machine, touch the [SUB ADDRESS] key
after entering the fax number to enter a slash "/", and then
enter the sub-address and the passcode. ("STORING
RAPID DIAL KEYS" (p.67))
G ENTER JUNK FAX NUMBER
G ANTI JUNK FAX
AUTO RECEIVE REDUCE SETTING
When you receive a fax that includes the sender's
name and number, the received image is slightly larger
than the standard sizes*. This setting can be enabled
to have the received image automatically reduced
before printing to fit the standard paper sizes.
This program is initially enabled (factory default
setting).
INDEX PRINT
If you turn automatic reduction off, the
overall printed image may be larger than the
original and the excess portion may be cut
off. However, the printed image will be the
same size as the original and thus clearer.
Note
This program is used to have an index (black mark)
printed at the top of received fax pages. The mark
moves from left to right as pages are printed.
This program is initially disabled (factory default setting).
* Standard paper sizes are sizes such as 8-1/2" x 11"
and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2".
RECEIVED DATA PRINT CONDITION
When this program is enabled and a received fax is held in
memory because there is a problem that prevents printing
such as no suitable paper, any faxes received after that
fax which can be printed will be given priority and printed.
This program is initially enabled (factory default setting).
DUPLEX RECEPTION SETTING
When the duplex module is installed, this setting can be
enabled to have received documents printed on both
sides of the paper. When enabled, received faxes will be
printed on both sides of the paper whenever the fax
consists of two or more pages of the same size of paper.
This program is initially disabled (factory default
setting).
A3 RX REDUCE
When this program is enabled and an A3 size fax is
received, the fax is reduced to letter width before printing.
When the program is enabled, W letter is considered to
be the same size as A3, thus W letter faxes are also
reduced before printing.
PRINT STYLE SETTING
8
This setting determines the condition for selecting
paper when printing received faxes. Select [PRINT
ACTUAL SIZE CUT OFF ENABLED] or [AUTO SIZE
SELECT].
The factory default setting is "AUTO SIZE SELECT".
• PRINT ACTUAL SIZE CUT OFF ENABLED
Each received image is printed at actual size. If
necessary, the image is split onto multiple sheets of
paper.
This program is initially disabled (factory default setting).
ENTER JUNK FAX NUMBER
This program is used to store fax numbers from which
you wish to block reception. Up to 50 fax numbers can
be stored (maximum of 20 digits each). To block
reception from the stored numbers, you must also
enable the "ANTI JUNK FAX" program.
• AUTO SIZE SELECT
ANTI JUNK FAX
Enable this program to block reception of faxes from
fax numbers stored in the "ENTER JUNK FAX
NUMBER" program.
Each received image is printed at actual size when
possible. When not possible, the image is
automatically reduced before printing.
This program is initially disabled (factory default setting).
101
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
POLLING SECURITY SETTING
When performing polling memory, enable this program
to restrict polling to machines that have permission
(p.38). To allow any machine to poll your machine,
disable the program.This program is initially enabled
(factory default setting).
SENDING OPTIONS
The following settings are contained in "SENDING
OPTIONS":
G PASSCODE NUMBER SETTING
G POLLING SECURITY SETTING
G ID NUMBER MODE
G SYSTEM NUMBER MODE
G RELAY PASSCODE
G CONFIDENTIAL CODE SET
G F-CODE MEMORY BOX
When polling security is enabled, store the
fax numbers of machines to be granted
polling permission in "PASSCODE
NUMBER SETTING".
Note
ID NUMBER MODE
PASSCODE NUMBER SETTING
When polling security is enabled, use this program to
program (or delete) the fax numbers of the machines
that are allowed to poll your machine. Programmed fax
numbers are called passcodes. Up to 10 fax numbers
can be programmed.
This program is used to store ID numbers. ID numbers
provide another means of granting polling permission
when polling security is enabled. Polling will be
allowed if the system number programmed in the
polling machine matches one of your machine's
programmed ID numbers. This method can only be
used if the other machine is also a Sharp machine
(excluding certain models). Up to 10 ID numbers can
be programmed. To check the programmed ID
numbers, print out the Passcode list in the custom
settings. (p.85)
Programming passcode numbers
Touch the [ENTER] key.
The passcode entry screen appears.
1
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
OK
PASSCODE NUMBER SETTING
SYSTEM NUMBER MODE
This program is used to store a system number. Your
system number provides another means of receiving
permission to poll a machine. Polling will take place if
your system number matches one of the other
machine's ID numbers. This method can only be used if
the other machine is also a Sharp machine (excluding
certain models). Enter a system number from 0000 to
9999. To check the stored system number, print the
passcode list in the user settings (p.85).
ENTER
DELETE
Press the numeric keys to store the fax
number.
Up to 20 digits can be entered.
To enter a hyphen, touch the [PAUSE] key at the top of
the screen.
To enter a space, touch the [SPACE] key. To enter a
"+", press the " " key.
If you make a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key (
enter the correct number.
2
3
To check the programmed system number, print out the
Passcode list in the custom settings.
) and
RELAY PASSCODE
This program is used to enter the fax number (the
programmed sender's number) of a machine that is to
be allowed to perform relay request transmissions
using your machine as a relay machine. The entered
fax number is called a relay ID code. The other
machine must be a Sharp machine (excluding certain
models). Up to 10 relay ID codes can be programmed
(maximum of 20 digits each).
Touch the [NEXT] key or the [OK] key.
• To enter another passcode number, touch the [NEXT]
key.
• To exit, touch the [OK] key.
Deleting a passcode number
To check the programmed numbers, print the
Passcode list (p.85).
Touch the [DELETE] key.
The passcode delete screen appears.
1
2
CONFIDENTIAL CODE SET
Touch the key of the number you wish to
delete.
Touch the [YES] key in the message that appears to
delete the number. If you touch the [NO] key, you will
return to the passcode delete screen without deleting
the number.
This program is used to program a confidential box for
the reception of confidential faxes. The other machine
must be a Sharp machine (excluding certain models).
Enter a name for the box (up to 36 characters), a box
number (00 to 99), and an ID code (0000 to 9999). Up
to 10 boxes can be programmed. To check the
programmed boxes, print the Confidential code list
(p.105).
102
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
To enter a passcode, touch the [PASS
CODE] key.
A slash (/) appears after the sub-address.
If you make a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key (
then enter the correct number.
F-CODE MEMORY BOX
6
7
This program is used to program memory boxes for
F-code communication. Three types of memory boxes
can be programmed: F-code memory polling boxes,
F-code confidential boxes, and F-code relay broadcast
boxes. Follow the procedure below to program, edit, or
delete a memory box.
) and
Use the numeric keys to enter a passcode
(maximum of 20 digits).
• Numbers and " " and "#" can be used in a
passcode.
• If you make a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key (
and then enter the correct number.
Programming an F-code memory box
A box name, sub-address, password, and specific
functions are programmed in a memory box.
)
•
When programming a memory box, the
same sub-address as a previously
programmed memory box cannot be used.
However, the same passcode can be used.
A passcode can be omitted.
Up to 10 F-code memory boxes can be
programmed. If you attempt to program a
memory box when 10 boxes have already
been programmed, a warning message will
appear and programming will not be
possible. Delete any unneeded F-code
memory boxes (p.105) and then program
the new box.
Touch the [OK] key.
Note
8
9
You will return to the memory box programming screen.
The entered sub-address and passcode will appear.
"REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED." will appear next to
the box "No.".
•
•
Touch the [NEXT] key or the [EXIT] key.
• To program another memory box, touch the [NEXT]
key.
• To exit, touch the [EXIT] key.
Next, program specific functions of the memory
box as indicated below:
Touch the desired type of memory box
([POLLING MEMORY], [CONFIDENTIAL],
or [RELAY BROADCAST]) in the upper row
of keys.
• F-code confidential box (print passcode: page 104)
• F-code relay broadcast box
(end receiving machines: page 104)
1
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
F-CODE MEMORY BOX
OK
RELAY
BROADCAST
STORE
POLLING MEMORY
POLLING MEMORY
CONFIDENTIAL
CONFIDENTIAL
RELAY
BROADCAST
AMEND/DELETE
(The following uses [POLLING MEMORY] as an example.)
The F-code memory box programming screen appears.
Touch the [BOX NAME] key.
2
• The lowest box number that has not yet been
programmed will automatically appear in "No.".
• The character entry screen appears. Enter a name for
the box (maximum of 36 characters).
• To enter characters, see "ENTERING
CHARACTERS" on page 80.
8
Touch the [OK] key.
3
4
Touch the [SUB ADDRESS] key.
The sub-address/passcode entry screen appears.
Use the numeric keys to enter a
sub-address (maximum of 20 digits).
5
• The characters
and # cannot be used in a
sub-address.
• If you make a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key (
)
and then enter the correct number.
• If you do not wish to enter a passcode after entering
the sub-address, go directly to step 8.
103
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
G F-code confidential box (print passcode)
G F-code relay broadcast memory box (end
receiving machines)
A print passcode must be programmed to permit
printing of faxes received in the F-code confidential
box.
Store the end receiving machines for a relay
broadcast transmission when your machine is the
relay machine and receives a fax in its F-code relay
broadcast memory box.
• Enter a 4-digit number for the print
passcode. The characters " " and "#"
cannot be used.
Note
• A total of 120 end receiving machines can
be stored in up to 10 groups. If you attempt
Note
• The print passcode cannot be omitted.
to store more that this, a message will
appear and storing will not be possible.
• Speed dial numbers and rapid numbers
that include a sub-address cannot be
stored.
Take care not to forget the
programmed print passcode. In the
event that you forget it, print out the
confidential ID list. ("LIST PRINT"
(p.105))
Caution
• The same number cannot be stored twice
in a group.
Touch [CONFIDENTIAL] and program a
box name and sub-address/passcode as
explained in step 1 of "Programming an
F-code memory box" (p.103).
Touch [RELAY BROADCAST] and
program a box name and
sub-address/passcode as explained in
step 1 of "Programming an F-code
memory box" (p.103).
1
1
Touch the [PRINT PIN] key.
2
3
Touch the [RECIPIENT] key.
The address selection screen appears.
2
Use the numeric keys to enter a 4-digit
number.
• If you make a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key (
and then enter the correct number.
• To cancel before completing entry of the number,
touch the [CANCEL] key. You will return to the screen
of step 2.
)
Select indexes as needed and touch rapid
keys to select the end receiving machines.
3
If needed, touch the
through screens.
or
key to move
F-CODE MEMORY BOX / RELAY BROADCAST
SELECT ADDRESS.
OK
Touch the [OK] key.
4
5
A
B
You will return to the programming screen for F-code
confidential boxes. The entered print passcode will
appear, and "REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED." will
appear next to the box number.
C
TOKYO
10-KEY PAD
S.F.
ADDRESS REVIEW
FREQUENT USE
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN
OPQRST UVWXYZ
ABC
GROUP
Touch the [NEXT] key or the [EXIT] key.
• To program another memory box, touch the [NEXT]
key.
• The selected rapid keys are highlighted and stored as end
receiving machines.
• If you touch an incorrect rapid key, touch it again so that it
is not highlighted.
• To exit, touch the [EXIT] key.
• You can also touch the [10-KEY PAD] key to enter full fax
numbers with the numeric keys.
To check the stored end receiving machines,
touch the [ADDRESS REVIEW] key.
4
A list of the selected destinations appears.
If you need to delete a destination from the list, touch it and
then touch the [YES] key in the message that appears.
Touch the outer [OK] key.
5
6
You will return to the programming screen for F-code relay
broadcast memory boxes. The number of stored end
receiving machines will appear, and "REGISTRATION IS
COMPLETED." will appear next to the box number.
Touch the [NEXT] key or the [EXIT] key.
•
To program another memory box, touch the [NEXT] key.
• To exit, touch the [EXIT] key.
104
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
Editing or deleting a memory box
LIST PRINT
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
Touch the desired type of memory box
([POLLING MEMORY], [CONFIDENTIAL],
or [RELAY BROADCAST]) in the
Edit/Delete row (lower row). (See step 1 on
page 103.)
1
2
OK
LIST PRINT
FAX KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS LIST
F-CODE MEMORY BOX LIST
JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
FAX ACCOUNT USAGE LIST
CONFIDENTIAL CODE LIST
Touch the key of the memory box that you
wish to edit or delete.
This program is used to print lists of key operator
programs related to the fax function.
The following five lists can be printed:
G FAX KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS LIST
G FAX ACCOUNT USAGE LIST*
KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS
EXIT
SELECT MEMORY BOX TO AMEND/DELETE.
POLLING MEMORY
Report
New product catalog
G CONFIDENTIAL CODE LIST
G F-CODE MEMORY BOX LIST
G JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
* Only appears when AUDITING MODE is enabled in the
key operator programs. The factory default setting for
AUDITING MODE is disabled. (See the key operator's
guide.)
• The memory box edit/delete screen appears.
indicates that a memory box is holding a document.
• A memory box cannot be edited or deleted while it holds a
•
document.
Touch the appropriate keys to edit or
delete the box.
• Follow the same procedure to edit a box as to store a
box.
To print a list or report, touch the key of the list or
report that you wish to print and then touch the
[CLEAR ALL] key ( ).
3
• To delete a memory box, touch the [DELETE] key in
the upper right corner of the screen. (A message will
appear to confirm the deletion.)
8
105
Chapter 9
APPENDIX
9
This chapter contains reference information regarding the fax features of the machine.
106
SPECIFICATIONS
For information on power requirements, power consumption, dimensions, weight, and other specifications that are
common to all features of the machine, refer to operation manual for copier.
Applicable telephone line
Compression method
Transmission modes
Public switched telephone network
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG (MMR and JBIG during Super G3 transmission)
Super G3, G3 (the machine can only send faxes to and receive faxes from
machines that support G3 or Super G3)
Scanning method
CCD flatbed scanning
Scanning resolution
8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)
(Supports ITU-T standards)
8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Fine, Fine + Halftone)
8 x 15.4 lines/mm (Super Fine, Super Fine + Halftone)
16 x 15.4 lines/mm (Ultra Fine, Ultra Fine + Halftone)
Recording method
Transmission speed
Transmission time*1
Laser, electrostatic charge method
33.6 kbps
2.4 kbps Automatic fallback
2 seconds (Super G3 mode / 33.6 kbps, JBIG), 6 seconds (G3 ECM mode
/ 14.4 kbps, MMR)
Paper sizes
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A4R
11" max. (11" x 17" printing)
Effective print width
Input document size
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A4R
(5-1/2" x 8-1/2": Vertically-oriented feeding),
3
Originals up to 39.3" (1000 mm) in length* (using the RSPF);
* Refer to pages 15 for transmission of 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" size documents.
Effective scanning width
Halftone transmission
Contrast adjustment
Extension telephone connection
Auto dialing
11.7" maximum
Yes (256 levels)
Automatic (manual; five levels)
Possible (1 telephone)
Combined total of 500 rapid and group keys, redialing (automatic)
Timer transmission
Program function
Yes
Yes (8 programs)
F-code support
Yes (can transmit and receive SUB/SEP (sub-address) and SID/PWD
(passcode) signals)
Automatic document feeding
Image memory
Yes (100 pages)
2 MB*2
Error Correction Mode (ECM)
Yes
*1 Transmission speed is for an 8-1/2" x 11" document with approximately 700 characters at standard resolution (8x3.85
lines/mm) sent in high speed mode (33.6 kbps (JBIG) or 14.4 kbps (MMR)). This is only the time required to transmit the image
information; the time required to send protocol signals is not included. Actual transmission times will vary depending on the
contents of the document, the receiving machine type, and telephone line conditions.
*2 Image memory can be expanded by installing the optional fax expansion memory (8 MB).
*3 The length varies depending on the scanning resolution and the width of the original. At "FINE" resolution, the maximum size
is 11" (W) x 39.3" (L) (297 mm (W) x 1000 mm (L) ). ("ORIGINALS" (p.9))
9
Some discrepancies may exist in the illustrations and content due to improvements to the machine.
107
INDEX
A
F
Address directory screen ...........................................8
Advanced transmission methods .............................59
Alarm sounds ...........................................................86
Auto reduction sending setting.................................99
Auto-dialing ........................................................11, 16
Fax default settings................................................. 96
Fax forward function................................................ 28
Fax mode ................................................................ 12
Fax receive settings .............................................. 101
Fax send settings.................................................... 99
Fax transmission
B
- Broadcast transmission.................................... 26
- Canceling ......................................................... 24
- Confidential transmission................................. 47
- Direct transmission........................................... 14
- F-code transmission......................................... 51
- Large number of pages.................................... 18
- Manual transmission ........................................ 61
- Message........................................................... 43
- Own number sending....................................... 44
- PC-FAX transmission....................................... 64
- Quick on-line .................................................... 14
- Relay request function ..................................... 49
- Storing transmission jobs................................. 15
- Thin-sheet document ....................................... 39
- Timer transmission........................................... 30
F-code ..................................................................... 51
F-code transmission
Broadcast transmission............................................26
C
Communication activity report..................................85
Condition setting screen
- Address directory screen ....................................8
- Condition setting screen .....................................7
Confidential function.................................................46
Confidential reception list.........................................85
Confidential transmission.........................................47
Connecting the telephone line cord............................3
Cover sheet..............................................................42
D
Date and time.............................................................4
Daylight Saving Time Setting.....................................4
Document feeder tray...........................................6, 10
Document glass ...................................................6, 10
Dual page scan ........................................................40
- F-code confidential transmission...................... 57
- F-code polling................................................... 56
- F-code polling memory..................................... 54
- F-code relay broadcast function....................... 60
- F-code relay broadcast transmission ............... 59
- F-code relay request function........................... 60
E
Editing and deleting
- F-code memory boxes ....................................103
- Group indexes...................................................78
- Group keys........................................................72
- Programs ..........................................................74
- Rapid keys ........................................................70
- Relay group.......................................................77
Entering characters..................................................80
Exposure, selecting..................................................22
Extension phone ......................................................61
G
Group dialing..................................................... 11, 16
Group indexes..................................................... 8, 78
I
ID code.................................................................... 48
Image rotation ......................................................... 15
Index keys................................................................. 8
J
Job build mode........................................................ 18
Job separator tray ..................................................... 6
K
Key operator programs
- Key operator program list................................. 91
- Using the key operator programs..................... 94
L
LINE jack................................................................... 6
List print................................................................. 105
Lithium battery........................................................... 3
Loading an original.................................................. 10
M
MEM.polling list ....................................................... 85
Memory boxes................................................... 48, 52
108
O
R
On-hook dialing........................................................11
Operation Panel .....................................................5, 6
Original guides .....................................................6, 10
Original sizes............................................................20
Originals.....................................................................9
- Automatic reduction ............................................9
- Booklets ............................................................17
- Job build............................................................18
- Sizes .............................................................9, 20
- Two-sided documents.......................................17
Own number sending...............................................44
Rapid dialing ..................................................... 11, 16
Read-end ................................................................ 13
Receiving party is busy ........................................... 15
Reception
- Automatic reception ......................................... 25
- Extension phone (remote reception)................ 63
- Forward function .............................................. 29
- Manual reception.............................................. 62
Reception mode ...................................................... 62
Redialing ................................................................. 11
Relay broadcast function......................................... 49
Relay machine .................................................. 49, 59
Relay request function ............................................ 49
Relay request machine ..................................... 49, 59
Reports.................................................................... 85
Resolution, selecting ............................................... 21
RSPF....................................................................... 10
P
Paper trays.................................................................6
Parts of the machine ..................................................6
Passcode list............................................................85
Passcodes................................................................52
Pause.......................................................................13
PC-FAX....................................................................64
Polling function
- Polling function..................................................33
- Polling security..................................................38
- Serial polling .....................................................32
Polling memory ........................................................35
Polling memory (Public Box)....................................35
Power switch..........................................................3, 6
Printing
- Confidential boxes ............................................48
- F-code confidential memory boxes...................58
- F-code polling memory boxes...........................55
- Lists.................................................................105
- Programmed information ..................................79
- Public box .........................................................36
Priority transmission.................................................23
Programming
- F-code memory boxes ....................................103
- Group indexes...................................................78
- Group keys........................................................71
- Programs ..........................................................73
- Rapid dial keys..................................................67
- Relay groups.....................................................75
Programs..................................................................41
S
Scanning area ........................................................... 9
Sender's information ............................................... 44
Sender's name .......................................................... 4
Sender's number....................................................... 4
Sending options .................................................... 102
Speaker..................................................................... 6
Speaker volume setting........................................... 98
Specifications........................................................ 107
Sub-addresses........................................................ 52
T
Tablets .................................................................... 17
TEL jack .................................................................... 6
Telephone line cord, connecting ............................... 3
Thin-sheet scanning function .................................. 39
Timer list.................................................................. 85
Timer transmission.................................................. 30
Touch panel .............................................................. 5
Transaction report ................................................... 83
Transmission error .................................................. 15
Troubleshooting ...................................................... 87
W
Warning messages ................................................. 86
109
INDEX BY PURPOSE
Advanced transmission methods
Programming/settings
Broadcast transmission............................................26
Confidential transmission.........................................47
Cover sheet..............................................................42
Dual page scan ........................................................40
Fax forward function.................................................29
F-code transmission
Characters, entering
- Alphabetical characters.................................... 80
- Numbers and symbols ..................................... 82
Editing/deleting
- F-code memory boxes ................................... 105
- Group keys....................................................... 72
- Programs.......................................................... 74
- Rapid keys ....................................................... 70
- Relay groups.................................................... 77
Exposure, selecting................................................. 22
Programming
- F-code memory boxes ................................... 103
- Group indexes.................................................. 78
- Group keys....................................................... 71
- Programming.................................................... 65
- Programs.......................................................... 73
- Rapid dial keys................................................. 67
- Relay groups.................................................... 75
Resolution, selecting ............................................... 21
Scanning size.......................................................... 20
Speaker volume setting........................................... 98
- F-code confidential transmission ......................57
- F-code polling ...................................................56
- F-code polling memory .....................................55
Message...................................................................43
Own number sending...............................................44
PC-FAX transmission...............................................64
Polling function
- Polling ...............................................................33
- Polling memory .................................................35
Program ...................................................................41
Relay request function .............................................50
Thin-sheet document, faxing....................................39
Timer transmission...................................................30
Faxes, sending and receiving
Dialing methods
Troubleshooting
- Entering a passcode .........................................53
- Entering a sub-address.....................................53
- Group dialing.....................................................16
- Large number of pages, faxing .........................18
- On-hook dialing.................................................11
- Rapid dialing .....................................................16
- Redialing...........................................................11
- Two-sided documents, transmitting ..................17
Receiving faxes
Alarm sounds .......................................................... 86
Communication activity report, viewing................... 85
Transaction report is printed ................................... 83
Troubleshooting ...................................................... 87
Warning message is displayed ............................... 86
- Activating fax reception from an extension
phone................................................................63
- Automatic reception ..........................................25
- Manual reception ..............................................62
Sending faxes
- Basic procedure for sending faxes....................12
- Canceling a fax transmission............................24
- Manual transmission.........................................61
F-code transmission
F-code relay broadcast transmission .......................59
Preparations
Connecting the telephone line cord............................3
Date and time, checking.............................................4
Own name set..........................................................97
Own number set.......................................................97
Printing
List print..................................................................105
Programmed information..........................................79
Reports.....................................................................85
110
NOTICE FOR USERS IN
CANADA
AVIS POUR NOS
UTILISATEURS AU CANADA
"NOTICE : This product meets the applicable Industry
Canada technical specifications."
AVIS : Le présent matériel est conforme aux
spécifications techniques applicables d’Industrie
Canada.
"NOTICE : The Ringer Equivalence Number is an
indication of the maximum number of devices allowed
to be connected to a telephone interface. The
termination on an interface may consist of any
combination of devices subject only to the requirement
that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not
exceed five."
Remarque : L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie
(IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux
qui peuvent être raccordés
à
une interface
téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut
consister en une combinaison quelconque de
dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme d'indices
d'équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs
n'excède pas 5.
The REN of this equipment is indicated on the
copying machine.
L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) de cet
équipement est indiqué sur le copieur.
The registration number is indicated on the fax
printed circuit board and on the copying machine.
Le numéro d'enregistrement est indiqué sur la carte
à circuit imprimé du télécopieur et sur le copieur.
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à
la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd.
335 Britannia Road East,
Mississauga, Ontario, L4Z 1W9
Canada
Introduction
This manual describes the printer function of the AR-M230/M270 series digital multifunctional system.
●
For information on loading paper, replacing toner cartridges, clearing paper misfeeds, handling peripheral devices, and other
Note
copier-related information, please refer to your operation manual for copier.
The machine's default settings and default settings for the printer function can be changed using the key operator programs. For
●
more information, see the key operator's guide.
Where "AR-XXXX" appears in this manual, please substitute the name of your model for "XXXX". For the name of your model,
●
see "PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS" in the operation manual for copier.
This manual refers to the Reversing single pass feeder as the "RSPF".
The screen images and procedures that appear in this manual are mainly for Windows XP. With other versions of Windows ,
some screen images may be different from those in this manual.
For information on using your operating system, refer to your operating system's manual or online Help.
●
®
®
●
●
Trademark Acknowledgments
®
®
●
Microsoft Windows operating system is a trademark or copyright of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
®
®
®
®
®
®
●
Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP are trademarks or copyrights
of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
®
©
●
●
Acrobat Reader Copyright 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and
the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
2
How to use the online manual
This section explains how to view the online manual. Please read this section before using the online manual.
For information on using Acrobat Reader, see Acrobat Reader Help.
How to Control the Online Manual
Following Links
In this manual, the following buttons are displayed at the
bottom of each page. Click these buttons to move quickly to
pages that you wish to view.
This manual uses a link function that allows you to jump to a
related page. If you click green, underlined text, the related
page will be displayed. (In the Contents and Index sections, the
linked areas are not underlined.)
To return to the previous page, click the button on the menu
bar of Acrobat Reader.
CONTENTS
Displays the Contents of this manual. Click on a topic in the
Contents to jump directly to that section.
Using Bookmarks
Bookmarks have been created on the left side of this manual.
You can click on a bookmark to jump directly to that section.
I N D E X
Displays the Index of this manual. Click on a topic in the Index
to jump directly to that section.
How to Print Out This Manual
To print this manual, select "Print" from the "File" menu of
Acrobat Reader. Select the desired printer settings in the "Print"
dialog box, and then click the "OK" button.
Takes you forward page by page.
Takes you back page by page.
3
PRINT
Basic printing
(part 1)
1
The following example explains how to print a document from WordPad.
Before printing, make sure that the correct size of paper for your document has been loaded in the machine.
Make sure that the ON LINE indicator on the
operation panel is lit.
Select "Print" from the application's "File"
1
3
4
menu.
If the ON LINE indicator is not
The "Print" dialog box will appear.
COPY
on, press the [PRINT] key to
Make sure that "SHARP AR-XXXX" is selected
as the printer. If you need to change any print
settings, click the "Preferences" button
("Properties" button in Windows 95/98/Me/NT
4.0) to open the printer driver setup screen.
The printer driver setup screen will appear.
ON LINE
DATA
switch to printer mode and then
touch the [ONLINE] key.
PRINT
SCAN
DATA
The status of the printer function is indicated by the ON
LINE and DATA indicators next to the [PRINT] key.
ON LINE indicator
DATA indicator
There is print data in
memory that has not
been printed yet.
The machine is online
and ready to print.
Lit
The machine is
printing.
Blinking
Off
—
Windows 2000 does not have the "Preferences" button
in this dialog box. Select settings as needed on each of
the tabs in the setup screen.
The machine is offline The machine is not
and not ready to print. printing.
Start WordPad and open the document that you
wish to print.
2
5
PRINT
Basic printing
(part 2)
1
When "Paper Selection" is set to "Auto Select"
Click the "Print" button ("OK" button in
Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0).
5
If "Paper Selection" is set to "Auto Select" in the "Paper" tab of
the printer driver setup screen and the correct size of paper for a
print job is not loaded in the machine, the printing procedure will
vary depending on the "FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT" setting
in the key operator programs (see the key operator's guide).
Printing begins. The print job is delivered to one of the
following trays (depending on which output devices are
installed):
●
Job separator tray kit is installed: Job separator tray
Finisher is installed: Offset tray
●
When "FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT" is disabled
●
The output tray can be selected in the key operator
programs (see "OUTPUT TRAYS" in the key
operator's guide).
If the bypass tray can be used, a message prompting you to
print from the bypass tray will appear in the touch panel.
Press the [PRINT] key on the operation panel, touch the
[BYPASS TRAY] key, touch the [BYPASS] key, and then load
paper in the bypass tray. Printing will begin automatically.
Note
●
●
The output tray can also be selected in the print
settings at the time of printing. To change the tray
selection, select the desired tray in "Output" in the
"Paper" tab of the printer driver setup screen.
If the paper type setting in the printer driver is different
from the bypass tray's paper type setting in the
machine, printing may stop. To resume printing, press
the [PRINT] key on the operation panel, touch the
[BYPASS TRAY] key in the touch panel, and specify
the same paper type as in the printer driver.
When "FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT" is enabled
Printing will take place using a size of paper that is close to the
size of the print image.
If the paper is loaded in a different orientation than the
print image, the image is automatically rotated to match
Note
the paper. This setting can be changed in the key
operator programs (see "ROTATED PRINT" in the key
operator's guide).
6
PRINT
Basic printing
When the "Paper Selection" setting is "Paper Source" or "Paper Type"
When "Paper Selection" in the "Paper" tab of the printer driver
setup screen is set to:
(part 3)
1
If you selected the "Paper Source" or "Paper Type" in the
printer driver setup screen but there is no paper in the trays that
matches your selection, printing will take place as follows:
●
"Paper Source", select the tray that you wish to use for
printing from the pull-down menu.
"Paper Type", select the type of paper that you wish to use
for printing from the pull-down menu.
You selected a tray in "Paper Source", but the size
of the paper in the selected tray does not match
the printing size.
●
Even though the paper size is different, printing will take place
using the paper in the selected tray.
You selected a "Paper Type", and although the
selected type of paper is loaded in the machine, it's
size does not match the printing size.
"Paper Source" and "Paper Type" cannot be
simultaneously selected.
Even though the paper size is different, printing will take place
using the selected paper type.
Note
However, if "FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT" is disabled,
printing will not take place.
The size and type of paper loaded in each tray and whether or
not the paper loaded in each tray can be used for printing are
specified in the "TRAY SETTINGS" of the custom settings.
(See "CUSTOM SETTINGS" in the operation manual for
copier.
If you wish to select the "Paper Source" or "Paper Type" when
printing, be sure to select these settings in the "Configuration"
tab of the printer driver setup screen. (See "CONFIGURING
THE PRINTER DRIVER" in the software setup guide.)
You selected a "Paper Type", but the selected type
of paper is not loaded in the machine.
If the bypass tray can be used, a message prompting you to
print from the bypass tray will appear. Press the [PRINT] key on
the operation panel, touch the [BYPASS TRAY] key, touch the
[BYPASS] key, and then load the correct size and type of paper
in the bypass tray. Printing will begin automatically.
7
PRINT
Opening the printer driver from the "start" button
1
Printer driver settings can be configured by opening the printer driver from the Windows "start" button. Settings adjusted in this way
will be the initial settings when you print from an application. (If you change the settings in the printer driver setup screen at the time
of printing, the settings will revert to the initial settings when you quit the application.)
Windows 2000/XP
Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0
Click the "start" button, and then click "Control
Panel".
In Windows 2000, click the "Start" button and select
"Settings".
Click the "Start" button, select "Settings" and
then click "Printers".
1
1
Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" printer driver icon
and select "Properties" from the "File" menu.
2
Click "Printers and Other Hardware", and then
click "Printers and Faxes".
In Windows 2000, click "Printers".
2
3
Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" printer driver icon
and select "Properties" from the "File" menu.
In Windows NT 4.0, select "Document Defaults" to open
the printer driver setup screen.
Note
In Windows 95/98/Me, click the "Setup" tab.
3
The printer driver setup screen will appear.
Click the "Printing Preferences" button in the
"General" tab.
The printer driver setup screen will appear.
4
8
PRINT
Printer driver settings
1
To view Help for a setting, click the
button in the upper right-hand corner of the window and then click the setting.
Some restrictions exist on the combinations of settings that can be selected in the printer driver setup screen. When a restriction is
in effect, an information icon (
) will appear next to the setting. Click the icon to view an explanation of the restriction.
1
6
Tab
Check button
The settings are grouped
on tabs. Click on a tab to
bring it to the front.
Drop-down list
Allows you to make a selection
from a list of choices.
Print setting image
This shows the effect of the
selected print settings.
Checkbox
Allows you to select one
item from a list of options.
"OK" button
Click this button to save
your settings and exit the
dialog box.
1
2
3
7
2
3
4
8
9
"Cancel" button
Click this button to exit the
dialog box without making
any changes to the settings.
"Apply" button
Click to save your settings
4
5
Click on a checkbox to
activate or deactivate a
function.
without closing the dialog box.
●
Windows NT 4.0 does not
5
Machine image
6
7
have the "Apply" button.
The "Apply" button does
This shows:
●
●
The paper tray (in blue)
not appear when you
open this window from an
application.
selected in "Paper selection"
on the "Paper" tab.
The output tray (in green)
8
9
●
10
10
selected in "Output" on
the "Paper" tab.
You can also click on a tray
to select it.
"Help" button
Click this button to display
the help file for the printer
driver.
The settings and the image of the machine will vary
depending on the model.
Note
9
PRINT
Two-sided printing
1
This feature allows you to print on both sides of the paper.
To use this function, open the printer driver setup screen and select "2-Sided
(Book)" or "2-Sided (Tablet)" from "Document Style" in the "Main" tab.
●
Paper sizes that can be used for two-sided printing are Ledger, Letter, Letter-R, Legal, A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, and
Note
Foolscap.
●
Paper types that can be used for two-sided printing are Plain, Letter Head*, Recycled and Color.
*The use of Letter Head paper for two-sided printing can be prohibited in the "TRAY SETTINGS" of the custom settings. (See
"CUSTOM SETTINGS" in the operation manual for copier.)
Two-sided printing is not possible if disabled in the key operator programs (see "DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the key operator's guide).
●
The following example shows the result when portrait data is printed on both sides of the paper.
Printing result
Print data
2-Sided (Book)
2-Sided (Tablet)
The pages are printed so that The pages are printed so that
they can be bound at the side. they can be bound at the top.
10
PRINT
Printing multiple pages on one page
1
This feature allows you to reduce and print two or four document pages on a single sheet of paper.
To use this function, open the printer driver setup screen and select "2-Up" or "4-Up" for "N-Up Printing" on the "Main" tab.
The "N-Up Printing" setting is not available when "Fit To Paper Size" is selected.
Note
N-Up
Border
Border
"2-Up"
"4-Up"
If you select the "Border" checkbox, borderlines will be printed around each page.
11
PRINT
Fitting the printed image to the paper
1
The printer driver can adjust the size of the printed image to match the size of the paper loaded in the machine.
Follow the steps shown below to use this function. The explanation below assumes that you intend to print a Ledger size document
on letter size paper.
The "Fit To Paper Size" setting is not available when "N-Up Printing" is selected.
Note
Click the "Paper" tab in the printer driver setup
screen.
Select the actual size of paper to be used for
printing (Letter).
The size of the printed image will be automatically
adjusted to match the paper loaded in the machine.
1
2
4
Select the original size (Ledger) of the print
image in "Paper Size".
Paper Size: Ledger
Fit To Paper Size: Letter
Check the "Fit To Page" box.
3
Ledger size document
(Paper Size)
Letter size paper
(Fit To Paper Size)
12
PRINT
Rotating the print image 180 degrees
1
The print image can be rotated 180 degrees.
This feature is used to enable correct printing on envelopes and other paper with flaps that can
only be loaded in one orientation.
Use this feature when automatic rotation (which takes place when the loaded paper is the same
size as the print image and the orientations are different) results in reversal of the top and bottom
of the image.
To use the feature, select the image orientation in "Image Orientation" on the "Paper" tab, and
then select the "Rotate 180 degrees" checkbox.
The following example shows correct and incorrect rotation of an address printed on an envelope.
Printing result
Print data
Portrait
Portrait
Rotate 180 degrees
Rotate 180 degrees
ABCD
A B C D
ABCD
The procedure for loading paper is explained in operation manual for copier.
Note
13
PRINT
Printing a watermark
1
You can print a watermark such as "CONFIDENTIAL" on your document. To print a watermark, open the printer driver, click the
"Watermarks" tab, and follow the steps below.
How to Print a Watermark
From the "Watermark" drop-down list, select the watermark that you wish to print (for example "CONFIDENTIAL"), and start printing.
Print sample
You can enter text to create your own custom watermark. For details on watermark settings, view printer driver Help.
14
PRINT
Stapling printed pages (when a finisher is installed)
1
When a finisher is installed, printed pages can be stapled.
To use this feature, open the printer driver setup screen, and select the "Staple"
checkbox in the "Finishing" field of the "Main" tab.
●
The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled is 30.
Paper sizes that can be used for staple printing are Ledger, Letter, Letter-R, Legal, A3, A4, A4R, B4, B5, and Foolscap.
Paper types that can be used for staple printing are Plain, Letter Head, Recycled and Color.
Staple printing is not possible when the ROPM function is disabled. (See "CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER" in the
Note
●
●
●
software setup guide.)
●
Stapling is not possible if disabled in the key operator programs (see "DISABLING OF STAPLER" in the key operator's guide).
The following example shows how portrait oriented pages are stapled together.
Print data
Printing result
The pages are stapled in
the upper left-hand
corner.
15
PGRINiTving priority to a print job
1
When a print job is waiting because the machine is copying or printing a received fax, the following procedure can be used to
interrupt the current job and immediately print the print job. Use the print job status screen to give priority to the job. For more
information on using the job status screen, see operation manual for copier.
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
Touch the [PRIORITY] key.
1
4
A message appears asking you
TING
LINE
DATA
DETAIL
PRIORITY
FAX
to confirm the priority print job.
Touch the [OK] key to interrupt
the current job and begin
printing the print job selected in
Step 3.
TING
CUSTOM SETTING
JOB STATUS
STOP/E
JOB
To view information on a print job, select it and then
touch the [DETAIL] key.
Note
Make sure that the [PRINT JOB] key is
highlighted.
2
The print job status screen
appears when the [PRINT JOB]
key is highlighted.
PRINT
010 / 00
PRINT JOB
If the [PRINT JOB] key is not
highlighted, touch the [PRINT
JOB] key.
In the job keys of the jobs waiting to be printed,
touch the key of the job that you wish to print
immediately.
3
The touched key is highlighted.
16
PRINT
Canceling a print job
1
A print job in progress or waiting to be printed can be canceled. Use the print job status screen to cancel the job.
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
The job in progress and the jobs waiting to be
1
3
4
printed appear. Touch the key of the job that
you wish to cancel.
The touched key is highlighted.
LINE
DATA
FAX
CUSTOM SETTING
JOB STATUS
Touch the [STOP/DELETE] key.
A message appears asking you
to confirm the cancellation.
Touch the [YES] key to delete
the job.
TING
DETAIL
TING
PRIORITY
Make sure that the [PRINT JOB] key is
highlighted.
2
STOP/DELETE
JOB
The print job status screen
appears when the [PRINT JOB]
key is highlighted.
If the [PRINT JOB] key is not
highlighted, touch the [PRINT
JOB] key.
If you do not wish to cancel the
PRINT
010 / 00
job, touch the [NO] key.
PRINT JOB
To pause a print job during printing, press the [PRINT]
Note
key on the operation panel and then touch the
[OFFLINE] key. ([OFFLINE] is highlighted.)
• To cancel a print job, press the [CLEAR] key ( ).
• To resume printing, touch the [ONLINE] key to switch
the machine online.
17
PRINTER SHARING
Sharing the printer using windows networking
2
The machine can be used as a shared printer in a Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP network environment.
Note that the Windows network environment must already be established.
Shared printer
Client
Print server
Client
Client
"Print server" as explained here is a computer that is directly connected to the machine, and a "Client" is any other computer that is
connected to the same network.
(On the print server)
18
PRINTER SHARING
Shared printer settings
On the computer to which the machine is directly connected
Follow the steps below to use the computer directly connected to the machine as a print server.
If your operating system is Windows 95/98/Me, start from step 1. If your operating system is Windows NT 4.0, 2000 or XP, open the
control panel and then start from step 6.
2
For detailed setting procedures, refer to the Operation Manual or the help file of your operating system.
Note
If a message appears asking you to restart the
Click the "Start" button, select "Settings", and
then click "Control Panel".
Note
1
2
computer, click the "Yes" button and restart the
computer. Then, open the printer folder and continue the
setup procedures from Step 6.
Double-click the "Network" icon ( ).
Click "Printers and Other Hardware" in the
control panel, and click "Printers and Faxes".
In operating systems other than Windows XP,
double-click the printer icon.
6
If the "Network" icon does not appear in Windows Me,
click "view all Control Panel options".
Note
Click the "File and Print Sharing" button.
Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" printer driver icon
and select "Sharing" from the "File" menu.
3
4
7
8
Enable "I want to be able to allow others to print
to my printer(s)." by clicking the checkbox, and
then click the "OK" button.
Establish the settings for sharing, and click the
"OK" button.
For information on a setting, click the
top-right of the dialog box and then click the setting to
display Help.
button at the
Note
Click the "OK" button in the "Network" dialog
box.
5
19
PRINTER SHARING
Client settings
(part 1)
2
Follow the procedure below to install the printer driver in the client.
Note
Click the "start" button, and click "Control
Panel".
Click the "Next" button.
1
4
5
In Windows 95/98/Me/2000, click the "Start" button and
select "Settings".
Select "A network printer, or a printer attached
to another computer", and click the "Next"
button.
In Windows 95/98/Me/2000, select "Network printer"
and click the "Next" button.
Click "Printers and Other Hardware", and click
"Printers and Faxes".
2
3
In Windows 95/98/Me/2000, click "Printers".
Click "Add a printer" in "Printer Tasks".
In Windows 95/98/Me/2000, double-click the "Add
Printer" icon.
The "Add Printer Wizard" will appear.
20
PRINTER SHARING
Client settings
(part 2)
2
Select "Browse for a printer", and click the
"Next" button.
In Windows 95/98/Me, click the "Browse" button.
In Windows 2000, select "Type the printer name, or
click Next to browse for a printer", and click the "Next"
button.
Select the printer to be shared in the network,
and click the "Next" button.
In Windows 95/98/Me, select the printer to be shared in
the network, click the "OK" button and then click the
"Next" button.
6
7
The contents of this window will vary depending on your
network environment.
Select settings in the "Default Printer" screen,
and click the "Next" button.
8
9
Click the "Finish" button.
21
PRINTER SHARING
Client settings
Settings in Windows NT 4.0
If your operating system is Windows NT 4.0, establish settings as follows in the printer properties after installing the printer driver.
For the procedure for installing the printer driver, see "INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE" in the Software Setup Guide.
(part 3)
2
Click the "Start" button, select "Settings", and
then click "Printers".
Select "Local Port" in the "Available Printer
Ports" list, and click the "New Port" button.
The "Port Name" dialog box will appear.
1
2
4
Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" printer driver icon
and select "Properties" from the "File" menu.
The printer properties will appear.
Click the "Ports" tab, and click the "Add Port"
button.
The "Printer Ports" dialog box will appear.
3
Enter "\\(name of server connected to
machine)\(name of shared printer)", and click
the "OK" button.
5
6
name of shared printer
name of server connected to machine
Click the "OK" button in the printer properties
window.
22
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
3
This chapter describes how to solve printer problems. Refer to the relevant section based on the problem.
To load paper, remove paper misfeeds, load staples in the finisher, remove jammed staples, or replace the toner cartridge, see
"TROUBLESHOOTING" in operation manual for copier.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
23
TPROrUBiLnESHtOiOnTINGg does not take place
(part 1)
3
Check the connections
■ Is the interface cable compatible with the machine
and computer?
■ If the interface cable becomes disconnected
If the interface cable becomes disconnected, even only once
during the machine's operation, then printing may be
disrupted.
If this occurs, check the interface cable and ensure that it is
securely connected, then restart the computer.
Interface cables compatible with this machine are USB and
parallel cables. Check which type of cable is supported by
your computer.
For the specifications of the interface cable, see
"CONNECTING TO A COMPUTER" in the
software setup guide.
■ Is the interface cable connected securely?
Check if the interface cable is securely plugged into the
connectors of the machine and computer.
To connect the cable, see "CONNECTING TO A
COMPUTER" in the software setup guide.
■ Are any other USB peripherals being connected
along with the machine?
If your computer is connected to the machine through a USB
hub, see if printing is possible when no other USB devices
are connected, or if printing is possible when the machine
and computer are directly connected.
24
TPROrUBiLnESHtOiOnTINGg does not take place
(part 2)
3
Check Your Computer
■ Is there enough computer memory or hard disk
space?
■ If your computer is connected to the machine
through the parallel port, is the parallel port (LPT)
mode set to other than EPP mode?
To use the machine, your computer must have sufficient
memory and hard disk space. If there is insufficient hard disk
space, delete unnecessary files to increase the free space of
the hard disk. If there is insufficient memory, close
unnecessary applications to increase memory available for
printing.
The machine may not operate correctly if the parallel port
mode is set to EPP mode. To set the parallel port mode to a
mode other than EPP mode, refer to your computer manual
or ask the manufacturer of the computer. ECP mode is
recommended to obtain the best performance from the
machine. Note that some computers may use different
names for the modes.
If you are using Windows XP, the "Found New Hardware
Note
Wizard" may appear after you change the port setting. In
this case, click the "Cancel" button to close the wizard,
and then reinstall the printer driver as explained in
"INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE" in the software setup
guide.
25
TPROrUBiLnESHtOiOnTINGg does not take place
(part 3)
3
Check the machine
■ Power switch on?
■ Copy job being performed?
Turn the power switch on. (See "POWER ON AND OFF" in
the operation manual for copier)
Wait until copying is finished. You can also select the key of
the job that you wish to print in the job status screen and then
touch the [PRIORITY] key. Copying will be interrupted and
the selected job printed.
■ Is the machine online?
When the ON LINE indicator next to the [PRINT] key on the
operation panel is lit, the machine is online and ready to
print. If the ON LINE indicator is off, press the [PRINT] key
and then touch the [ONLINE] key. (When [ONLINE] is
highlighted, the machine is online.)
■ Is the "I/O TIMEOUT" setting too short?
Set a longer time for "I/O TIMEOUT" in the key operator
programs.
COPY
ONLINE
OFFLINE
ON LINE
DATA
PRINT
BYPASS TRAY
SCAN
DATA
■ Has an error occurred such as a paper misfeed,
staple jam in the finisher, out of paper, or out of
toner?
When one of the above errors occurs, a message will appear
in the touch panel to alert you.
Follow the instructions in the message to clear the error.
Printing will automatically resume when the error is cleared.
For information on handling errors, see "TROUBLESHOOTING"
in the operation manual for copier.
26
TPROrUBiLnESHtOiOnTINGg does not take place
(part 4)
3
Checking the printer driver
■ Has the printer driver been installed properly?
Check if the printer driver has been installed, following the
steps listed below.
■ Is your machine selected correctly in the current
application for the print job?
Select the printer driver of the machine in the "Print" dialog
box of the application.
1 Click the "start" button, click "Control Panel", click
"Printers and Other Hardware", and then click
●
If the printer drivers appear as icons, click the icon of the
machine.
"Printers and Faxes".
On Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, click the "Start" button,
select "Settings" and then click "Printers".
●
If the printer drivers are selected from a pull-down menu,
select the printer driver of the machine from the menu.
2 Check if the "SHARP AR-XXXX" printer driver icon is
shown.
■ Is the port configured correctly?
It is possible that there is a problem with the port
configuration, for example another printer driver may be
using the port. Open the printer driver properties and
correctly configure the port that you are using.
☞See "TROUBLESHOOTING" in the software setup guide.
If the printer icon of the machine does not appear, the printer
driver is not installed correctly. Follow the instructions in the
software setup guide to correctly install the printer driver.
If for some reason the printer driver does not operate
correctly, delete the printer driver and then reinstall it as
explained in the software setup guide.
27
TROUBLESHOOTING
Improper printing operation
3
Printing is slow
Stapling is not possible (when a finisher is
installed)
■ Simultaneous use of two or more application
software programs?
■
Is stapling disabled in the key operator programs?
Enable stapling as explained in "DISABLING OF STAPLER"
in key operator's guide.
Start printing after quitting all unused application software
programs.
■ Is an appropriate print quality selected in the printer
driver?
■ Did you attempt to print more pages than can be
stapled?
When the "Print quality" setting in the "Advanced" tab of the
printer driver is "Normal" or "Photo", slow printing may result.
Be sure to select a print quality that is suitable for the
document or image being printed.
The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled is 30.
Two-sided printing is not possible
■
Is two-sided printing disabled in the key operator
programs?
Enable two-sided printing as explained in "DISABLING OF
DUPLEX" in the key operator's guide.
28
TPROrUBiLnESHtOOqTINGuality is not satisfactory
(part 1)
3
Check the paper being used
■ Non-standard paper used?
Check that the paper conforms to the specification. Refer to
"LOADING PAPER" in the operation manual for copier.
■
Are you using paper with a high moisture content?
Use paper that is in good condition, with a low moisture
content and no curling.
■ Is the paper loaded with the wrong side up?
Some types of paper have a front and a back side. If the
paper is loaded so that printing takes place on the back side,
toner will not adhere well to the paper and poor print quality
will result.
■ Are you printing on paper that has an uneven
surface?
It may not be possible to print correctly on paper with seams
such as the back of an envelope.
29
TPROrUBiLnESHtOOqTINGuality is not satisfactory
(part 2)
3
The printed image is coarse
Part of the printed image is missing
■ Has the printer driver been specified to suit both
paper and the print job?
■ Did you set sufficient margins in the paper settings
of your application?
You can select "Draft", "Normal" or "Photo" for the print
quality in the "Advanced" tab of the printer driver setup
screen. When "Photo" is selected, you can click the "Image
Adjustment" button and adjust the brightness and contrast in
the dialog box that appears. Adjust these settings
appropriately for your print data and try printing again.
Printing is not possible at the edges of the paper. The print
margins are 5/32" (4 mm) at the top and bottom of the paper
and 1/8" (3 mm) at the sides of the paper. When configuring
the paper settings in the software application, be sure to
establish margins that are at least as large as the print
margins.
■ Is the paper size loaded in the tray the same as that
specified in the printer driver?
The printed image is distorted
■ Is the paper loaded correctly?
Check if the "Paper Size" options suit the size of the paper
If a document is physically damaged when it is output or the
image is skewed on the paper, discard the damaged sheet,
reinsert the paper supply and print again. Insert the paper so
that there is no visible space between the paper and the
paper guides.
loaded in the tray.
If the "Fit To Page" setting is activated, make sure that the
paper size selected from the drop-down list of the "Fit To
Paper Size" option is the same as the size of the loaded
paper.
☞See the operation manual for copier for more details on
inserting paper.
■ Is the orientation of document setting correct?
Click the "Paper" tab in the printer driver setup screen, and
verify if the "Image Orientation" option is set to your
requirements.
30
TROUBLESHOOTING
If a Notice Page is printed
3
If you find that a notice page has been printed at the end of a print job, the print data received from the computer has not been
printed as specified. Fix the problem as explained below and then try printing again.
If a Notice Page is printed
If the following Notice Page is printed, check your settings for the Staple function.
When the Staple function is not selected:
****************************************************
Notice Page
Disable the ROPM function by removing the checkmark from
"ROPM" in the "Configuration" tab of the printer driver setup
screen. (See "CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER" in the
software setup guide.) If you wish to use the ROPM function,
set the print quality to "Draft" or increase memory.
****************************************************
The IMC memory full error had occurred,
a normal output was not able to be executed.
Please refer to the operation manual for
the solution method.
When the Staple function is selected:
Select "Draft" for the "Print quality" setting, or increase the
value set for "MEMORY FOR PRINTER" in the key operator
programs. If this does not solve the problem, add more IMC
memory.
The IMC memory is used to store print data when the ROPM function is used. This memory is also used to store original image data
in the copy mode. The percentage of IMC memory allocated to the printer function can be adjusted using a key operator program.
See "MEMORY FOR PRINTER" in the key operator's guide. The memory can be extended by adding commercially available
memory modules. For details, contact your SHARP dealer.
Note
Disabling notice page printing
Notice page printing can be disabled using a key operator program (see "PROHIBIT NOTICE PAGE PRINTING" in the key
operator's guide).
31
TROUBLESHOOTING
Uninstalling the printer driver
3
To delete a printer driver that has been installed using the installer, follow the procedure shown below.
Click the "start" button, and then click "Control
Panel".
On Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, click the "Start"
button, select "Settings", and then click "Control Panel".
1
Click "Add or Remove Programs".
2
On Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, double-click the
"Add/Remove Programs" icon.
Delete the "SHARP AR-M230/M270 Series
Printer Driver" from the list of applications.
For more information, refer to your operating manual or
to the help files for your operating system.
3
Restart your computer.
4
When reinstalling the printer driver, install it correctly as
explained in software setup guide.
Note
32
SPECIFICATIONS
Printer specifications
4
AR-M236/AR-M237: 23 pages/min.
Printing speed
AR-M276/AR-M277: 27 pages/min.
Resolution
600 dpi
IMC Memory
32 MB*
Additional memory slots
Interface
2 slots (maximum of 1024 MB of additional memory modules (168-pin SDRAM DIMM) can be installed)
IEEE 1284-compliant bi-directional parallel interface/USB 2.0 (Full-Speed/Low-Speed) interface
*1 The factory default setting for memory used for the printer function is 16 MB. The proportion of IMC memory allocated to the
printer function can be changed in the key operator programs. See "MEMORY FOR PRINTER" in the key operator's guide.
As a part of our policy of continuous improvement, SHARP reserves the right to make design and specification changes for product
improvement without prior notice. The performance specification figures indicated are nominal values of production units. There
Note
may be some deviations from these values in individual units.
33
|
